JP6798584B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at the starting port, and a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the screen. Then, when a prize is won in the starting opening, a game machine has been proposed that stores the right of the lottery up to a certain number and notifies the number by a symbol .

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-13528

In this type of pachinko machine, if the lottery content stored on hold is first determined and notified, the willingness to win a prize at the starting port will decline thereafter, and the game will be stopped and the game will wait for the lottery result. It will be, there is a problem in that the player is bored.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, it that aims to provide a game machine capable of reducing the problem of the player will be bored with early game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a storage thereof. Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the information stored in the means, display means that dynamically displays identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the specific discrimination result on the display means. When the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, the privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player and the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination by the discriminating means is performed. anda identification symbol display means for displaying on said display means the identification symbols corresponding to the information, if based on a predetermined trigger, the identification symbols are displayed more than a predetermined number, displayed on the display means The symbol variable means capable of changing the display mode of the plurality of identification symbols to a predetermined display mode, and the content determined by the discriminating means based on the fact that the variable condition is satisfied. as a mode for indicating, have a variable aspect display means capable of displaying a variable has been pre-symbol identification symbols variable aspect to the preset display mode, the variable mode display means, said variable mode in a state where the front symbol identification symbols that are variably displayed as configuration is displayed, if the identification symbols for newly the information corresponding to that stored in said memory means is displayed, the new the displayed identification symbols based on the fact that the variable condition is satisfied, it is possible to display the variable to the variable mode, to indicate the judgment result of the information corresponding to the identification symbols If the variable condition corresponding to the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode is not satisfied by the time the dynamic display of the identification information is started, the display mode is changed to the predetermined display mode. The dynamic display of the identification information is started without changing the identification symbol by the variable mode display means .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the acquisition means capable of acquiring the information, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the storage means for storing the information are stored. Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the information, display means that dynamically displays identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result on the display means. Corresponds to the privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when is stopped and displayed, and the information stored in the storage means before the discrimination is performed by the discriminating means. anda identification symbol display means for displaying the identification symbols on the display means, based on a predetermined trigger, the identification symbols if they appear more than a predetermined number, a plurality of which are displayed on the display means As an aspect for showing a symbol variable means capable of changing the display mode of the identification symbol to a predetermined display mode and a content to be discriminated by the discriminating means based on the fact that the variable condition is satisfied. has a variable aspect display means capable of displaying a variable has been pre-symbol identification symbols variable aspect to the preset display mode, the variable mode display means, a variable so as to constitute the variable aspects in a state where the front symbol identification symbols displayed are displayed, when the identification symbols newly the information corresponding to that stored in the storage unit is displayed, which is the newly displayed identification based on the symbol the variable condition is satisfied, it is possible to display the variable to the variable mode, the identification information for indicating the determination result for the information corresponding to the identification symbols If the variable condition corresponding to the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode is not satisfied by the time the dynamic display is started, the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode is the said. The dynamic display of the identification information is started without being varied by the variable mode display means .

This has the effect of reducing the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the unit storage member. It is a front view of the unit storage member. It is a front perspective view of the projecting operation unit in a state where the base side displacement member and the relative displacement member are arranged in the retracted position. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the protruding operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the connecting rod. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically shows the transmission means in the front view. It is a front schematic diagram which schematically shows the transmission means in the front view. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member. It is a rear perspective view of the base side displacement member and the relative displacement member. It is a front view of the protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of the protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of the protrusion operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the projecting operation unit. (A) is a side view of the projecting operation unit in the direction of arrow XVIIa of FIG. 16, and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the projecting operation unit in the partial XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front perspective view of the compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the compound operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a front view of the driven member and the driven member, and (b) is a side view of the driven member and the driven member in the direction of arrow XXIIb of FIG. 22 (a). (A) is a front view of the driven member, and (b) is a back surface portion of the driven member. It is a side view of the driven member in the direction view of arrow XXIV of FIG. 23A. (A) is a front view of the driven member, and (b) is a back surface portion of the driven member. It is a side view of the driven member in the direction view of arrow XXVI of FIG. 25A. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. It is a figure. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. It is a figure. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. It is a figure. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. It is a figure. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. It is a figure. (A) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a front schematic view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. It is a figure. It is a front perspective view of a rotary operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotary operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotary operation unit. It is a vertical sectional view of a rotary operation unit. (A) is a rear view of the main body portion, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the main body portion showing the XXXVII portion of FIG. 37 (a) in an enlarged manner. It is a front view of the rotary operation unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary operation unit on the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa of FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. 38 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary motion unit 600 on the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. .. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing a display mode of a normal hold effect. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display mode of the eight effects. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display mode in the variation pattern of the synthetic display mode. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display mode in the variation pattern of the synthetic display mode. It is a timing chart showing the period setting from the power-on of the pachinko machine. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display mode in the time production period. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display mode in a time effect extension period, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display mode in a time effect extension period. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display mode at the end of the time production period. It is a schematic diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM in the main control unit, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM in the main control unit. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special hit random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special hit type selection table, and (c) is a normal hit random number table. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the time setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the button effect selection process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the synchronous effect management process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the extension effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hold quantity display update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the button effect execution processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the background image setting process executed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice command processing executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hold command processing executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the effect command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram comparing the pixel sizes of the main liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal. (A) to (b) are schematic views showing an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views showing an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views showing an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic view showing an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment, and (b) is a comparison of display sizes of the main liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. It is a figure shown. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command processing executed by MPU in the display control device of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit in the fourth embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining the effect control regarding the hold symbol effect in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the actual display screen in the fourth embodiment. is there. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing a display mode of the normal hold effect in the fourth embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display mode of the eight effects in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display mode of the eight effects in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display mode of the additional winning effect in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing a display mode of the special continuous effect in the fourth embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the flow about the synthetic display effect in 4th Embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing a display mode of the synthetic display effect in the fourth embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing a display mode of the synthetic display effect in the fourth embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing a display mode of the synthetic display effect in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the display mode of the synthetic display effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the flow about time production in 4th Embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display mode of the time effect in the fourth embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display mode of the time effect in the fourth embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display mode of the time effect in the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the fourth embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an effect time selection table in the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is an effect selected by the effect time selection table according to the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the timetable of time schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation execution determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the time setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 2 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the identification number input process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed 8 hold effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the button effect processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the notice selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the button effect selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed 8 setting process during production which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the synchronous effect management process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect time setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the extension effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) to (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the distribution unit according to the fifth embodiment. It is a time chart explaining the flow regarding the special symbol variation effect performed using the main screen and the sub screen in the fifth embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display mode of the special symbol variation effect in the fifth embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display mode of the special symbol variation effect in the fifth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 3 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pre-pseudo variation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 5th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a ball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one time. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time is not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the projecting operation unit 400 and the combined operation unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 project into the opening of the center frame 86 and can be visually recognized through the opening. It is said that. For example, when the projecting operation unit 400 is arranged at the rotational position by the first operation (see FIG. 14A), the tip portion of the relative displacement member 450 is made visible through the opening of the center frame 86. When the relative displacement member 450 is arranged at the overhanging position by the second operation (see FIG. 15B), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" ”Is easy to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64. For example, it may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided, and the certificate stamp, etc. attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the unit storage member 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. 5 and 6 are front views of the unit storage member 300. In FIG. 5, each operation unit 400 to 800 is arranged in a retracted position, and in FIG. 6, the protrusion operation unit 400 and the combined operation unit 500 are stretched. The states arranged at the evacuation positions are shown in the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the unit storage member 300 is on the front side (front of the paper in FIG. 5) from the bottom wall plate having a rectangular front view and the outer wall plate erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion. The side) is formed in an open box shape. A front-view rectangular opening 301 is formed in the central portion of the bottom plate of the unit storage member 300, whereby the unit storage member 300 is formed in the shape of a front-view rectangular frame. The opening 301 is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

In the unit storage member 300, a protrusion operation unit 400, a composite operation unit 500, a rotation operation unit 600, an infestation operation unit 700, and an extension operation unit 800 are respectively housed in the internal space thereof, whereby the operation unit 200 is one unit. It is configured as.

The protrusion operation unit 400 includes a base displacement member 440 and a relative displacement member 450, and both displacement members 440 and 450 are operated (displaced) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhang position shown in FIG. Let me. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the space required for the retracted position is suppressed by forming a state in which the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are overlapped in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 5). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 6, the relative displacement member 450 is slidably displaced with respect to the base displacement member 440 to increase the overall size, thereby ensuring visibility and enhancing the effect. The operation of the protruding operation unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 7 to 17.

The composite operation unit 500 includes a driven member 550 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) and a driven member 560, and both members 550 and 560 are placed between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. Operate (displace) with. In this case, the composite operation unit 500 causes the driven member 550 to perform only a rotational motion centered on a predetermined position, while the driven member 560 connected to the driven member 550 performs a linear motion. By performing a motion combined with a rotary motion, the trajectory of the driven member 560 is changed to enhance the effect of the effect. The operation of the combined operation unit 500 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 32.

The rotation operation unit 600 includes a first rotating body 650 and a second rotating body 660 arranged concentrically, and by rotating both the rotating bodies 650 and 660, it is easy to associate the rotations of both with the player. Therefore, the effect of the effect of rotating a plurality of rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and second rotating body 660) is exhibited. The operation of the rotary operation unit 600 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39.

Further, the projecting / retracting operation unit 700 includes an projecting / retracting member 710 formed so as to be slidable, and the projecting operation unit 800 includes an projecting member 810 formed to be rotatable, and the projecting / retracting member 710 and the projecting member 810 are provided. Slide displacement or rotation between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position (not shown) in which the opening 301 (see the third symbol display device 81, FIG. 2) overhangs the front surface (front surface). Operates (displaces) by.

Next, the projecting operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 17. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the projecting operation unit 400 in a state where the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged in the retracted position. FIG. 8A is an exploded front perspective view of the projecting operation unit 400, and FIG. 8B is a rear perspective view of the connecting rod 460.

Note that FIGS. 7 and 8 show a state in which the projecting operation unit 400 and the infestation operation unit 700 sharing the case body 410 are attached to the projecting operation unit 400. Further, the projecting operation units 400 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the infestation operation unit 700 below the opening 301 (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and these pair of projecting operation units 400 are formed symmetrically. Since the structures are substantially the same, only one (the one arranged on the right side in the front view) will be described, and the other (the one arranged on the left side in the front view) will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the protrusion operation unit 400 includes a case body 410 forming a skeleton on the back side thereof, a drive motor 420 arranged on the front side of the case body 410, and the drive motor 420. A plurality of gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432 and crank gear 433) that transmit rotational driving force, a base displacement member 440 rotatably supported by the case body 410, and slide displacement to the base displacement member 440. It is mainly composed of a relative displacement member 450 that is possibly arranged, and a connecting rod 460 that connects between the relative displacement member 450 and the crank gear 433 and is rotatably supported by the case body 410. To.

The case body 410 is made of a resin material, and a storage recess 411 having an outer shape corresponding to a plurality of gears (each gear 431, 432, 433) is recessed on the front surface (front surface) of the case body 410. A rod support shaft 412 is projected from the side of the storage recess 411 (on the right side in FIG. 8A), and a base support shaft 413 is projected below the storage recess 411 (lower side in FIG. 8A). The support shafts 421 and 413 are made of brass and are arranged in a posture parallel to the rotation shafts of the gears 431 to 433.

In the present embodiment, when the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged in the retracted position, the displacement members 440, 450, the connecting rod 460, and the gears 431, 432, 433 are arranged as described later. (See FIG. 13), a storage recess 411 is recessed in front of the case body 410, and each gear 431, 432, 433 is stored in the storage recess 411. As a result, the protrusion operation unit 400 can be miniaturized in the front-rear direction.

A pinion gear 431 is attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 420, and an intermediate gear 432 is meshed with the pinion gear 431 and a crank gear 433 is meshed with the intermediate gear 432. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 420 is rotationally driven and the pinion gear 431 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the crank gear 433 via the intermediate gear 432, and the crank gear 433 is rotated.

The intermediate gear 432 and the crank gear 433 are pivotally supported by the case body 410. Further, each gear 431 to 433 is formed as a spur gear whose teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface in parallel with the rotation axis. In this case, the crank gear 433 has a radial decoration formed on its front surface (axial end face), and the diameter of the front portion (axial end face) is larger than that of the tooth tip circle engraved on the outer peripheral surface. It is enlarged and formed so that the teeth can be shielded from the player in the front view.

A crank pin 433a is projected from the front surface (axial end surface) of the crank gear 433 at a position eccentric from the rotation axis of the crank gear 433. The crank pin 433a is a portion connected to the connecting rod 460, is formed as a columnar body parallel to the rotation axis of the crank gear 433, and is slidably inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460. (See FIGS. 9 and 10). As a result, when the crank gear 433 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the connecting rod 460 via the crank pin 433a.

The base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are effect members for performing an effect by being displaced from the retracted position to the overhang position (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and the base displacement member 440 (shaft support). The hole 442) is rotatably supported by the base support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and the relative displacement member 450 is slidably displaced on the front side of the base displacement member 440.

Here, the relative displacement member 450 is formed with a decorative portion 454 on the front side thereof. The decorative portion 454 is a portion for decorating the front side of the relative displacement member 450, and is from the base end side (rotation center side when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated, the lower side of FIGS. 7 and 8). The entire shape is formed into a front-viewing tapered shape whose width becomes narrower toward the tip side (rotation tip side when the base end displacement member 440 is rotated, upper side of FIGS. 7 and 8), and the front surface of the decorative portion 454. The first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are arranged in a row along the longitudinal direction.

The first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c of the decorative portion 454 are formed in a size corresponding to the tapered shape of the entire decorative portion 454. That is, the second portion 454b located in the middle of the first portion 454a located on the tip side and the third portion 454c located on the base end side of the second portion 454b located in the middle have large outer shapes. It is formed in a square shape.

In this case, the first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (positions in the vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 5). Specifically, the second portion 454b located in the middle of the first portion 454a located on the tip side and the third portion 454c located in the base end side of the second portion 454b located in the middle are in front of each other. It is arranged on the (front) side (front side of the paper in FIG. 5).

As a result, the decorative portion 454 of the relative displacement member 450 (that is, the front surface of the relative displacement member 450) is moved from the base end side (the rotation center side of the base side displacement member 440, the lower side of FIGS. 7 and 8) to the tip end side (that is, the front side of the relative displacement member 450). The base end displacement member 440 is downwardly inclined in a stepped shape (three steps in the present embodiment) in a direction closer to the case body 410 toward the rotational tip side (upper side of FIGS. 7 and 8).

As a result, as will be described later, when the base displacement member 440 is rotated (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the decorative member 480 is prevented from coming into contact with the decorative member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17). By making it possible for both displacement members 440 and 450 to pass through the back side of the above, the effect of the effect is improved, and when the relative displacement member 450 is projected (see FIG. 15), the decorative portion 454 is placed in front (front). ), It is possible to improve the power.

The detailed configurations of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described later (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

The connecting rod 460 is a long plate-shaped member for transmitting the rotation of the crank gear 433 to the relative displacement member 450, and has a shaft support hole 461 formed as a circular hole on one end side in the longitudinal direction and a shaft thereof. A connection hole 462 formed as an elongated hole extending along the longitudinal direction on the other end side in the longitudinal direction opposite to the support hole 461, and a longitudinal direction between the shaft support hole 461 and the connection hole 462. It is formed with a rod groove 463 that is recessed on the back surface side as a recessed groove that extends along the line.

The connecting rod 460 is attached to the case body 410 in a state where the rod support shaft 412 of the case body 410 is inserted into the shaft support hole 461 and the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463. Further, a connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460 (see FIGS. 11 and 12). As a result, as will be described later, the connecting rod 460 is rotated around the rod support shaft 412 as the rotation center with the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), and the connecting rod 460 is rotated with the rotation of the connecting rod 460. The base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are rotated (first operation) and slide displacement (second operation) (see FIG. 12), and are operated (displaced) between the retracted position and the overhang position.

In this case, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the drive motor 420, the base displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged on the front (one surface) side of the case body 410, respectively. Compared with the case where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged on the front side (one side) side and the drive motor 420 is arranged on the back side (other side) side of the case body 410, the projecting operation is performed. The dimensions of the unit 400 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

Further, since the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged in the retracted position in the posture in which the drive motor 420 is located on the extension line in the longitudinal direction thereof (see FIG. 13A), these drive motors The 420, the base displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 can be arranged linearly. Therefore, the space required as a retracting position on the front side of the case body 410 can be efficiently suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is cranked together with a plurality of gears (each gear 431 to 433) and a crank gear 433. A portion composed of a connecting rod 460 forming a mechanism, and as described later, a portion where the connecting rod 460 (connecting hole 462 and rod groove 463), the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433, and the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 are connected. Of the transmission means (each gear 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460) and each support shaft 411, 412 so as to be arranged in the region between the rod support shaft 412 and the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410. Set the placement.

As a result, in a state where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged in the retracted position, the transmission means is arranged in the region that overlaps the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 in the front view. can do. That is, the dead space formed on the back surface side of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 arranged at the retracted position can be effectively utilized as the arrangement space of the transmission means. As a result, it is possible to synergistically achieve the effect of the positional relationship between the drive motor 420, the base displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450, as well as the miniaturization of the outer shape of the protrusion operation unit 400 in the front-rear direction and in the front view. it can.

Next, the operation of the transmission means (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432, crank gear 433, and connecting rod 460) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. 9 and 10 are schematic front views schematically showing the transmission means in the front view, and in FIG. 9A, the state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position is shown in FIG. 9B. The state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the intermediate rotation position is shown in FIG. 10, and the state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged in the second rotation position is shown in FIG.

In FIGS. 9 and 10, the shapes of the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460 are schematically shown in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. Further, in FIGS. 9 and 10, the positions of the center lines of the connecting rod 460 when the crank gears 433 are arranged at the first rotation position, the intermediate rotation position, and the second rotation position are set as positions P1, Pm, and P2. It is schematically illustrated using a dotted line.

Further, in the description of FIGS. 9 and 10, FIGS. 13 to 15 will be referred to as appropriate. 9 (a) corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), and FIG. 9 (b) corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b). FIG. 10 corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b).

As shown in FIG. 9A, when the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P1, the base displacement member 440 is in the retracted position and the relative displacement member 450 is in the retracted position. They are placed at reference positions, respectively (see FIGS. 12 (a) and 13). In this state, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is located at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460.

Therefore, in the state where the crank gear 433 is arranged in the first rotation position, the crank gear 433 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 9A (that is, the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are stretched). Rotation in the direction of retracting from the ejection position to the retracting position) can be regulated by bringing the crank pin 433a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Therefore, when arranging the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from the overhang position to the retracted position, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to an electrical factor, for example, it is mechanical. The base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are displaced beyond the retracted position by a mechanism (a stopper mechanism that regulates the crank pin 433a with the rod groove 463), and these two displacement members 440, 450 and the connecting rod 460 are present. It is possible to avoid colliding with the members of the above.

When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9 (a) from the state shown in FIG. 9 (a), the crank pin 433 a of the crank gear 433 lowers the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 (rod). It is slid toward the end opposite to the support shaft 412), and the connecting rod 460 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9A with the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation. When the crank gear 433 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate rotation position, as shown in FIG. 9B, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position Pm. In this state, the base displacement member 440 is arranged at the rotational position and the relative displacement member 450 is arranged at the reference position (see FIGS. 12B and 14).

When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9 (a) from the state shown in FIG. 9 (b), the crank pin 433 a of the crank gear 433 lowers the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 (rod). After sliding toward the upper end (the end on the side opposite to the support shaft 412), the connecting rod 460 slides toward the upper end (the end on the side opposite to the rod support shaft 412), and the connecting rod 460 is centered on the rod support shaft 412 in FIG. a) Rotated clockwise (clockwise). As a result, when the crank gear 433 reaches the second rotation position as shown in FIG. 10, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position P2. In this state, the base displacement member 440 is arranged at the rotational position and the relative displacement member 450 is arranged at the overhang position (see FIGS. 12 (c) and 15).

Even when the crank gear 433 is arranged at the second rotation position, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is connected to the connecting rod as in the case where the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 9A. It is located at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of the 460.

Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is arranged at the second rotation position, the crank gear 433 rotates clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 10 (that is, the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 project from the retracted position. Rotation in the direction of projecting to the position) can be regulated by bringing the crank pin 433a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Therefore, when arranging the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from the retracted position to the overhanging position, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to an electrical factor, for example, it is mechanical. The base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are displaced beyond the overhanging position by a mechanism (a stopper mechanism that regulates the crank pin 433a by the rod groove 463), and both displacement members 440 and 450 and the connecting rod 460 are displaced. It is possible to avoid colliding with other members.

Next, the configurations of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 and their operations will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450.

As shown in FIG. 11, the base-side displacement member 440 includes a main body portion 441 formed in a long plate shape, a shaft support hole 442 opened as a circular hole on the back surface of the main body portion 411, and a main body portion 441. A first slide hole 443 and a second slide hole 444, which are formed as elongated holes extending along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction of FIG. 11), are mainly provided.

The shaft support hole 442 is a hole through which the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410 is inserted, and by such insertion, the base side displacement member 440 can rotate into the case body 410 with the base side support shaft 413 as the rotation center. It is supported by. That is, as will be described later, the base displacement member 440 has a retracted position (see FIGS. 12 (a) and 13) and a rotational position (see FIGS. 12 (b), 12 (c), 14 and 15). It is rotatably supported between and.

In this case, the shaft support hole 442 is formed at a position that is lower than the center of the main body portion 441 in the longitudinal direction and is biased toward one side (overhanging position side) of the main body portion 441 in the width direction. As a result, the rotation angle required for the base displacement member 440 to project the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from the outer edge of the case body 410 by a predetermined amount (predetermined area) can be reduced, so that the base side can be reduced. The time required to rotate the displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotation position can be shortened, and as a result, the effect of displacement of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be enhanced.

The relative displacement member 450 has a main body portion 451 formed in the shape of a long plate, a connection pin 452 protruding from the back surface of the main body portion, and a predetermined interval along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) of the main body portion 451. A pair of slide pins 453 arranged so as to be separated from each other and a decorative portion 454 arranged in front of the main body portion 451 are mainly provided.

The connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are columnar portions that are slidably inserted into the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444 of the base displacement member 440, respectively, and the relative displacement member 450 is inserted by such insertion. Is arranged so as to be slidably displaceable along the longitudinal direction of the base displacement member 440. That is, as will be described later, the relative displacement member 450 has a reference position (see FIGS. 12 (a), 12 (b), 13 and 14) and an overhang position (see FIGS. 12 (c) and 15). It is arranged on the base displacement member 440 so that it can be slidably displaced between the two.

In this case, the tip side of the connecting pin 452 projecting from the first slide hole 443 of the base displacement member 440 is slidably inserted into the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460, and the relative displacement member 450 is inserted by such insertion. It is connected to the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 8) via the connecting rod 460.

As a result, as will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 433 causes the connecting rod 460 to rotate with the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation (see FIG. 9), thereby causing the base side support shaft 413 to be the center of rotation. The rotation of the displacement member 450 (first operation) can be executed, and the slide displacement (second operation) of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base displacement member 440 can be executed (see FIG. 12).

Here, the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are arranged at different positions (with intervals) along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, since the locations where the relative displacement member 450 is connected to the base displacement member 440 can be dispersed in the longitudinal direction, the front-rear direction of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base displacement member 440 (the direction in which the relative displacement member 450 is close to the case body 410) ) Can be suppressed to stabilize the slide displacement.

Further, the connection pin 452 is arranged on the longitudinal end side (upper side of FIG. 11) of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the slide pin 453. As a result, the portion where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be brought closer to the distal end side in the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member 450. In other words, the portion where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be moved away from the shaft support hole 442 of the base displacement member 440 toward the distal end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 11). As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the tip side of the relative displacement member 450 from swinging in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the relative displacement member 450 is close to and separated from the case body 410).

That is, only the longitudinal base side (shaft support hole 442) of the base displacement member 440 is pivotally supported by the base support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and the relative displacement member 450 is arranged in the base displacement member 440. Due to the structure, the tip side of both displacement members 440 and 450 in the longitudinal direction becomes a free end, and the tip side tends to swing in the front-rear direction during the first operation. This shaking causes the tip side to come into contact with the decorative member 480. Therefore, a structure in which the position of being supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 is the tip end side in the longitudinal direction is effective.

The collar C is rotatably fitted onto the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453. A collar C is interposed between the outer peripheral surfaces of the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 and the inner peripheral surface of the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444, so that the collar C is interposed along each of the slide holes 443 and 444. The pins 452 and 453 can be slid smoothly. Further, the collar C (specifically, the large-diameter flange portion of the collar C) is interposed between the main body portion 441 of the base displacement member 440, the main body portion 451 of the relative displacement member 450, and the connecting rod 460. The facing distance between the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 and the connecting rod 460 can be kept constant.

The connection pin 452 is prevented from coming off from the connecting rod 460 by fastening and fixing a disk-shaped disk S to the end surface on the tip side thereof with a screw, and the slide pin 453 is an end face on the tip side thereof. A long flat plate-shaped slide guide 470 is fastened and fixed with screws to prevent it from coming off from the base displacement member 440.

FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450. Note that FIG. 12A corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 9A and 13 (that is, the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is arranged at the position P1). However, FIG. 12 (b) corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and 14 (that is, the state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the intermediate rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is arranged at the position Pm). .. Further, FIG. 12C corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 10 and 15 (that is, the state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the second rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is arranged at the position P2).

As shown in FIG. 12A, in the state where the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P1 (see FIGS. 9A and 13), the rotation of the base displacement member 440 with the base support shaft 413 as the center of rotation. A reference in which the slide position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base displacement member 440 is the position where the amount of protrusion from the base displacement member 440 is minimized to the retracted position where the position is the position closest to the rod support shaft 412. Each is placed at a position. In this state, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is located at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460.

From the state shown in FIG. 12 (a), the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9 (a)) causes the connecting rod 460 to rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12 (a) with the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation. When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is slid toward the lower end (the end opposite to the rod support shaft 412) of the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460, and is relative to the base displacement member 440. The displacement member 450 is rotated around the base support shaft 413 as the center of rotation, and the base displacement member 440 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) together with the relative displacement member 450 (first operation). When the connecting rod 460 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate position Pm (see FIGS. 9 (b) and 14) as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the rotational position of the base displacement member 440 is set to the rod support shaft 412. It is placed at the rotation position, which is the position farthest from.

In this case, the slide position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base displacement member 440 can be maintained at the reference position. That is, in the counterclockwise (counterclockwise) rotation of FIG. 12A centered on the rod support shaft 412 of the connecting rod 460, the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 and the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 are at the lower ends. When sliding toward, the direction of this sliding is substantially along the direction of the slide displacement of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base displacement member 440, so that the relative displacement member 450 is placed with respect to the base displacement member 440. Does not generate a force component in the direction of slide displacement. Therefore, while maintaining the slide position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base displacement member 440 (regulating the occurrence of the slide displacement from the reference position), the base displacement member 440 having the base support shaft 413 as the center of rotation Only rotation can be generated.

As a result, both of the displacement members 440 and 450 can be rotated around the base support shaft 413 while the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base displacement member 440 is maintained to the minimum. The separation distance between the rotating tip of the relative displacement member 450 and the drive motor 420 (see FIG. 7) or the decorative member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) can be reduced. As a result, the protrusion operation unit 400 can be miniaturized, and the degree of freedom in design when defining the shape of the decorative member 480 can be increased.

From the state shown in FIG. 12 (b), the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9 (b)) causes the connecting rod 460 to rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12 (b) with the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation. When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is slid toward the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connection rod 460, and then the lower end (opposite to the rod support shaft 412). It is slid toward the side end), and the relative displacement member 450 is slid and displaced in the direction extending along the longitudinal direction (first and second slide holes 443 and 444) with respect to the base displacement member 440. (Second operation). As a result, when the connecting rod 460 reaches the second position P2 (see FIGS. 10 and 15) as shown in FIG. 12 (c), the slide position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base displacement member 440 is set. It is arranged at the overhang position, which is the position where the overhang amount from the side displacement member 440 is maximized.

In this case, the rotational position of the base displacement member 440 can be maintained at the rotational position which is the position farthest from the rod support shaft 412. That is, the counterclockwise (counterclockwise) rotation of FIG. 12B with the rod support shaft 412 of the connecting rod 460 as the center of rotation causes the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 to follow the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460. Since the sliding direction is substantially orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450 is slid with respect to the base displacement member 440. Only the force component in the direction of displacement is generated, and the force component in the direction of rotating the base displacement member 440 with the base side support shaft 413 as the center of rotation is not generated. Therefore, it is possible to generate only the slide displacement of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base displacement member 440 while restricting the rotation of the base displacement member 440 centered on the base support shaft 413.

As a result, the base displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position in a state where the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base displacement member 440 is maintained to the minimum (a state in which the relative displacement member 450 is maintained at the reference position). The relative displacement member is rotated to a position (first operation), and after the first operation is completed, the rotation of the base displacement member 440 is restricted (the base displacement member 440 is maintained in the rotation position). A slide displacement (second operation) can be performed in which the 450 is extended along the longitudinal direction with respect to the base displacement member 440. That is, since the rotation operation and the slide operation can be separated and each can be performed as a separate operation in two stages, the operation of a different mode can be performed as compared with the case where the rotation operation and the slide operation are performed at the same time. It is possible to make the person clearly recognize it, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by displacing the displacement members 440 and 450.

The operation of the projecting operation unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15.

13 to 15 are front views of the projecting operation unit 400. As described above, FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 12 (a), and FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b) are shown. , 9 (b) and 12 (b), and FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 10 and 12 (c). Further, in FIGS. 13 (b), 14 (b) and 15 (b), a state in which the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are removed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, according to the projecting operation unit 400, as described above, the base displacement member 440 has the retracted position shown in FIG. 13 (a) and the retracted positions in FIGS. 14 (a) and 15 (a). ) Is rotatably formed, and the relative displacement member 450 disposed on the base displacement member 440 is rotatably formed with the reference position shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 14 (a). The first operation is formed so that the base displacement member 440 can be slidably displaced from the overhang position shown in FIG. 15A and the base displacement member 440 is rotated between the retracted position and the rotation position, and the relative displacement member 450 is displaced to the base side. The second operation of displacing the member 440 between the reference position and the overhanging position can be performed respectively.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 14 (a), the base displacement member 440 in the retracted position is arranged in the rotation position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 in the reference position is secondly placed. By sliding displacement (extending) to the overhanging position by the operation, as shown in FIG. 15A, the relative displacement member 450 can be extended outward from the base displacement member 440. Therefore, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be enlarged as a whole, the player can sufficiently visually recognize the two displacement members 440 and 450, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, the base side displacement member 440 is arranged at the rotational position by the first operation, so that the tip portion of the relative displacement member 450 (decorative portion in the present embodiment). The entire first portion 454a of 454) can be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the center frame 86, and as shown in FIG. 15A, the relative displacement member 450 is extended by the second operation. By arranging the relative displacement member 450, substantially the entire portion (in the present embodiment, the entire third portion 454a of the striking decoration portion 454) can be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the center frame 86.

That is, the relative displacement member 450, which has been retracted to the retracted position and is not visible from the opening of the center frame 86, first appears from the side in the opening of the center frame 86 by a rotational motion (first operation). , Only a part of the relative displacement member 450 is made visible to the player, and then is projected toward the center of the opening of the center frame 86 by a linear motion (second operation), which is an abbreviation for the relative displacement member 450. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the whole. Therefore, the visible area of the relative displacement member 450 can be expanded by a motion form (linear motion) different from the motion form (rotary motion) at the time of appearance, and the visible area is increased by the unexpectedness due to the change in the motion form and the linear motion. It is possible to give the player a sense of speed due to the expansion and a sense of unity of the combined motion due to the combination of these being performed continuously. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that cannot be achieved in a form in which the relative displacement member 450 appears and disappears with respect to the opening of the center frame 86 only by a linear motion (a form in which the retracted position and the extended position reciprocate).

On the other hand, when the base displacement member in the rotational position is placed in the retracted position shown in FIG. 13 (a) by the first operation, the overhang position is shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 15 (b). By sliding (shortening) the relative displacement member 450 to the reference position by the second operation, it is possible to suppress the outward protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base displacement member 440. Therefore, since both displacement members 440 and 450 can be made smaller as a whole, the space required for accommodating both displacement members 440 and 450 can be suppressed at the retracted position. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other parts and devices.

In this case, as described above, the relative displacement member 450 is disposed on the base displacement member 440 in a state where it can be slidably displaced, and the second operation is as shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 15 (a). Since the relative displacement member 440 is slidably displaced with respect to the base displacement member 450 between the reference position and the overhang position, for example, the second operation is to move the relative displacement member 440 with respect to the base displacement member 450. Compared with the case of rotating, the space required to displace the relative displacement member 440 from the reference position to the overhanging position can be suppressed, and other parts and devices are arranged accordingly. Space can be secured. Further, since the displacement mode (slide displacement) of the relative displacement member 450 by the second operation can be different from the displacement mode (rotation) of the base displacement member 450 by the first operation, the second mode. It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by continuously performing the first operation and the second operation.

In particular, in such a second operation, the direction of the slide displacement is a direction along the longitudinal direction of each of the two displacement members 440 and 450. That is, since the relative displacement members 450 are arranged in a posture along the longitudinal direction of each other with respect to the base displacement member 440 and are slidably displaced in the direction along the longitudinal direction of each other, both displacement members 440, The 450 as a whole can be efficiently stretched and shortened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15A, in the state where the base side displacement member 440 is arranged at the rotational position, both displacement members 440 are increased as a whole by the slide displacement (extension) of the relative displacement member 450. , 450 can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player, and the effect of the effect can be fully exhibited. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the state where the base side displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted position, the relative displacement member 450 is slid displacement (shortened) to make it smaller as a whole, thereby making both displacement members 440. The space required to accommodate the 450 can be reduced, and the space for arranging other parts and devices can be secured.

Further, according to the projecting operation unit 400, as described above, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 14 (b). ) And FIG. 15B, the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460, which is composed of a plurality of gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432 and crank gear 433) and a connecting rod 460 and constitutes a crank mechanism together with the crank gear 433. Is connected to the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 in the region between the rod support shaft 412 which is the rotation center of the connecting rod 460 and the base support shaft 413 which is the rotation center of the base displacement member 440. Therefore, by rotating the crank gear 433, the first operation and the second operation by the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be executed in order. That is, since two different operations, the first operation and the second operation, can be performed only by the drive motor 420 of 1, the component cost can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In this case, as a transmission means, a structure is conceivable in which a gear is provided on the rod support shaft 412 side of the connecting rod 460, and the teeth of the crank gear 433 are meshed with the gear to rotate the connecting rod 460. In the case, the crank gear 433 and the connecting rod 460 are arranged side by side in a plane, and an overlapping allowance is not formed in the front view, so that the space required for the arrangement is increased. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460, it is shown in FIGS. 13 (a), 14 (b) and 15 (b). As described above, the crank gear 433 and the connecting link 460 can be arranged in a state where they always have an overlapping allowance when viewed from the front, and the space required for the arrangement of the crank gear 433 and the connecting link 460 can be suppressed by the overlap.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, the relationship between the relative displacement member 450 and the decorative member 470 when the base displacement member 440 is rotated (first operation) will be described.

FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the projecting operation unit 400. 17 (a) is a side view of the projecting operation unit 400 in the direction of arrow XVIIa of FIG. 16, and FIG. 17 (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the projecting operation unit 400 in the partial XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). Is. Note that FIGS. 16 and 17 show a state in which the decorative member 480 is attached to the projecting operation unit 400. However, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only the decorative member 480 necessary for explaining the relationship with the relative displacement member 400 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, a decorative member 480 is arranged above the projecting operation unit 400 (upper side of FIG. 16) (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The decorative member 480 is a decorative resin member and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, other members located on the back surface side of the decorative member 480 can be visually recognized by the player through the decorative member 480 (transparently).

In the present embodiment, the decorative member 480 is formed by projecting a part thereof downward (lower side in FIG. 17B), so that as shown in FIG. 17B, the base displacement member is viewed from the front. It is formed with an overlapping allowance of dimension L between the 440 and the relative displacement member 450. As a result, when the base displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotation position (first operation) (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation loci of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are displayed. It can be overlapped with a part of the decorative member 480 in the front view.

That is, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be displaced while passing through the back surface side of the decorative member 480, the operation of crossing the decorative member 480 and both displacement members 440 and 450 can be executed. At the time of the intersection, the decorative member 480 can be transmitted through the both displacement members 440 and 450 so that the both displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized. As a result, the effect of displacement of the two displacement members 440 and 450 can be enhanced. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the tip end side of the substrate displacement member 440 separated from the decorative member 480 is projected from the tip end side of the relative displacement member 450 close to the decorative member 480, it is difficult to make contact with the decorative member 480. As a result, the displacement L, which is the overlapping allowance, can be made larger. Therefore, the effect of crossing can be enhanced.

In this case, as described above, in the relative displacement member 450, the decorative portion 454 forming the front side (right side in FIG. 17B) is on the proximal end side (rotation center side of the proximal displacement member 440), FIG. b) From the lower side) to the tip side (rotation tip side of the base end displacement member 440, upper side in FIG. 17 (b)), the step is inclined in a direction closer to the case body 410 (left side in FIG. 17 (b)). Displacement. Further, the tip end side of the base displacement member 440 arranged on the back surface side (left side of FIG. 17B) of the relative displacement member 450 is projected from the tip end side of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 as a whole can be arranged at a position deeper toward the case body 410 side (back side, left side in FIG. 17B) toward the tip side thereof.

As a result, when the base displacement member 440 is rotated (first operation) from the retracted position to the rotation position (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation locus is overlapped with the decorative member 480 in the front view. It is possible to prevent the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from coming into contact with the decorative member 480 while ensuring the improvement of the effect.

In this case, the base displacement member 440 has a structure in which only one side in the longitudinal direction is pivotally supported by the base support shaft 413 and the tip side is a free end (see FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b)). ), The tip side tends to sway in the front-rear direction (direction toward the case body 410 side, vertical direction on the paper surface in FIG. 5) during the first operation, and there is a possibility of contact with the decorative member 480. Therefore, the configuration in the present embodiment (a shape that is inclined so that the tip side is closer to the case body 410 side) is particularly effective.

On the other hand, in the relative displacement member 450, the entire decorative portion 454 is not brought close to the case body 410 side, but as described above, the tip side (rotation tip side of the proximal displacement member 440, FIG. 17B). The shape is such that the base end side (rotation center side of the base side displacement member 440, lower side in FIG. 17 (b)) is located on the front (front) side (right side in FIG. 17 (b)) rather than the base end side (upper side). That is, the decorative portion 454 is ascended in a stepwise manner in a direction away from the case body 410 (on the right side in FIG. 17B) from the tip end side to the base end side.

As a result, when the relative displacement member 450 is slidably displaced (second operation) from the reference position to the overhang position (see FIGS. 14 and 15), the relative displacement member 440 is moved to the front (front) side (that is, that is). It can be placed closer to the player) to increase its power. In particular, in the present embodiment, the outer shape is made larger by the portion arranged on the front (front) side (the second portion 454b than the first portion 454a and the third portion 454c than the second portion 454b). It is possible to exert the effect of enhancing.

Next, the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 30. 18 and 19 are front perspective views of the combined operation unit 500. Note that FIG. 18 shows a state in which the driven member 560 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 5), and FIG. 19 shows a state in which the driven member 560 is arranged in the overhanging position (see FIG. 5). To.

Here, the composite operation unit 500 is arranged on the left and right sides of the rotary operation unit 600 above the opening 301 (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and the pair of composite operation units 500 are symmetrical. Since they are formed and their structures are substantially the same, only one (arranged on the right side of the front view) will be described, and the other (arranged on the left side of the front view) will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the combined operation unit 500 displaces the driven member 550 by the driving force of the drive motor 530, and drives the driven member 560 according to the displacement of the driven member 550. , The driven member 560 is displaced between the retracted position shown in FIG. 18 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. In this case, as will be described later, the driven member 560 is driven by the driven member 550 while changing its relative position with respect to the driven member 550 by rotation and slide displacement (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

As a result, even when the driven member 550 is rotated at a constant speed on a constant trajectory with a predetermined position (shaft portion 535, 554) as the center of rotation, the driven member 550 is driven in a trajectory different from that of the driven member 550. The member 560 can be displaced, and the mode of displacement of the driven member 560 can be changed. That is, according to the combined operation unit 500, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member 560 while maintaining the output of the drive motor 530 constant. The detailed configuration of the combined operation unit 500 will be described below.

20 and 21 are exploded front perspective views of the combined operation unit 500. 22 (a) is a front view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, and FIG. 22 (b) shows the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 in the direction of the arrow XXIIb of FIG. 22 (a). It is a side view.

Note that FIG. 20 corresponds to a state in which the composite operation unit 500 shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 21 corresponds to a state in which the composite operation unit 500 shown in FIG. 19 is disassembled. 22 (a) and 22 (b) correspond to the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 in the state shown in FIGS. 18 and 20.

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the composite operation unit 500 includes a front case body 510 and a back case body 520 forming the skeleton, a drive motor 530 arranged on the back side of the back case body 520, and a drive thereof. The crank member 540 attached to the drive shaft 531 of the motor 530, the driven member 550 driven by transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 530 via the crank member 540, and the relative displacement to the driven member 550. It is mainly composed of a driven member 560 that is possibly connected.

The front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is configured as an accommodating member in which an internal space is formed between the facing surfaces. In the internal space (between the facing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520, a driven member 550 (intermediate plate portion 552), a driven member 560 (intermediate plate portion 561), and a crank member 540 are respectively. It is housed in a displaceable state.

The front case body 510 includes a shaft support hole 511, an insertion hole 512, and a first guide groove 513. The shaft support hole 511 is a circular hole in front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 540. The insertion hole 512 is an opening through which the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is inserted, and is formed in a size that allows the reciprocating movement of the crank pin 541. The crank pin 541 can be connected to the driven member 560 (drive shaft 561a) through the insertion hole 512.

The first guide groove 513 is an opening through which the first pin 561a in the intermediate plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and has a shape obtained by taking out a part of the ring shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape). It is formed in FIGS. 27 (a) to 29 (a)). The groove width of the first guide groove 513 is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the first pin 561a, and as will be described later, the first pin 561a is slid along the extending direction of the first guide groove 513. By moving (guidance), the posture (particularly, the relative rotation position with respect to the driven member 550) of the intermediate plate portion 561 (driven member 560) can be defined (see FIGS. 27 (a) to 29 (a)). ..

The rear case body 520 includes a shaft support hole 521, an insertion hole 522, and a second guide groove 523. The shaft support hole 521 is a circular hole in front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 554 of the driven member 540, and is arranged concentrically with the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510 described above. That is, in the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520, the shaft support holes 511, 521 pivotally support the shaft portions 535 and 554 of the driven member 550, so that the driven member 550 can be rotated. I can support you. The insertion hole 522 is an opening through which the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 is inserted, and the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 can be connected to the crank member 540 through the insertion hole 522.

The second guide groove 513 is an opening through which the connecting shaft 561b in the intermediate plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and has a shape obtained by taking out a part of the ring shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape, FIG. 27 (b) to FIG. 29 (b)). The groove width of the second guide groove 523 is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting shaft 561b, and as will be described later, the connecting shaft 561b is slid along the extending direction of the second guide groove 523. By (guided), the posture of the intermediate plate portion 561 (driven member 560) (particularly, the relative slide position with respect to the driven member 550) can be defined (see FIGS. 27 (b) to 29 (b)).

As described above, the crank member 540 is attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530, and the crank member 540 is eccentric from the rotation shaft (drive shaft 531) when it is rotationally driven by the drive motor 530. A crank pin 541 is arranged at the position. The crank pin 541 is inserted into the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is slid along the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550 to rotate the driven member 550. (See FIGS. 30-32).

As described above, the driven member 550 is a member that is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 and that displaces the driven member 560 with the rotation, and the shaft portions 535 and 554 are pivotally supported. By pivotally supporting the holes 511, 521, it is rotatably held by the front case body 510 and the back case body 520. Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

FIG. 23 (a) is a front view of the driven member 550, and FIG. 23 (b) is a back surface portion of the driven member 550. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member 550 in the direction of arrow XXIV of FIG. 23 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the driven member 550 is provided with a long plate-shaped front plate portion 551 and a long plate-shaped interposition intersecting the front plate portion 551 at a substantially right angle to the front view. A columnar shaft portion 553 connecting the plate portion 552, the front plate portion 551 and the intermediate plate portion 552, and a circle projecting from the back surface of the intermediate plate portion 552 at a position concentric with the shaft portion 553. It is mainly provided with a columnar shaft portion 554.

The front plate portion 551 is a member arranged in front of the front case body 510 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and has a front view elliptical circle on one end side (the side opposite to the side to which the shaft portion 553 is connected). A shaped drive groove 551a is bored. The drive groove 551a is an opening through which the crank pin 541 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the crank member 540 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the front plate portion 551. The groove width of the drive groove 551a is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the crank pin 541. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 can be slid along the drive groove 551a, thereby covering the shaft portions 535 and 554 as the rotation center. The drive member 550 can be rotated (see FIGS. 30 to 32).

The interposition plate portion 552 is a member arranged in the internal space (between the facing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and one end side (front stomach body portion 551) thereof. A connection groove 552a having an oval shape in front view is bored on the side opposite to the side to which the is connected. The connection groove 552a is an opening through which the connection shaft 561b (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the driven member 560 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the intermediate plate portion 552. The groove width of the connecting groove 552a is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting shaft 561b. Therefore, the connection groove 552a can hold the connection shaft 561b so as to be rotatable and slidable. That is, the driven member 560 is connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slide-displaceable state (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

Here, the connection groove 552a has a region that overlaps with the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 in front view when the driven member 550 is rotated around the shaft portions 535 and 554 as the rotation center. The connection shaft 561b is configured to be dispositionable in the region (see FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c)). Thereby, as will be described later, the slide displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be defined based on the shape (contour) of the second guide groove 523.

In the driven member 550, the intermediate plate portion 552 and the shaft portion 535, 554 are integrally formed of the resin material, while the front plate portion 551 is formed of the resin material as a separate member from each of these portions 552 to 554. The axial end surface of the shaft portion 553 (the end surface opposite to the interposition plate portion 552) is brought into contact with the back surface of the base end side (opposite side of the drive groove 551a) of the front plate portion 551. It is assembled by fastening and fixing both with screws.

In this case, four pins 553a project from the axial end surface of the shaft portion 553, while holes 551b for receiving each of the four pins 553a are provided at four locations on the base end side of the front plate portion 551. It is bored and assembled with each pin 553a accepted in each hole 551b. As a result, the number of screws can be suppressed, the cost of parts can be reduced, and the flat plate portion 551 and the intermediate plate portion 552 can be reliably prevented from rotating relative to each other.

The description will be returned from FIG. 20 to FIG. 23. As described above, the connecting shaft 561b of the intermediate plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted into the connecting groove 552a of the intermediate plate portion 552 of the driven member 550, whereby the driven member with respect to the driven member 550. The 560 are connected so that they can be displaced relative to each other (rotational and sliding displacement). As described above, the driven member 560 is a member that is driven according to the displacement of the driving member 550, and connects the connecting shaft 561b of the intermediate plate portion 561 to the connecting groove 552a of the intermediate plate portion 552 of the driven member 550. In addition, by inserting the rear case body 520 into the second guide groove 523, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are held in a rotatable and slide-displaceable state. Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.

FIG. 25A is a front view of the driven member 560, and FIG. 25B is a back surface portion of the driven member 560. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member 560 in the direction of arrow XXVI of FIG. 25 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the driven member 560 includes a plate-shaped intermediate plate portion 561, a decorative portion 562 having a pair of elongated portions having a decorative shape formed on the front surface thereof, and a decorative portion 562 thereof. It is mainly provided with a back plate portion 563 that is connected to the side of the decorative portion 562 and is connected to the back side of the intermediate plate portion 561.

The intermediate plate portion 561 is a member arranged in the internal space (between the facing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and the front case body 510 is in front of the member. The first pin 561a to be inserted into the first guide groove 513 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) is projected, and the connecting shaft 561b is projected from the back surface at a position eccentric with respect to the first pin 561a. Will be done. As described above, the connection shaft 561b is inserted into the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (intermediate plate portion 552) and the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). ..

Therefore, when the driven member 550 is rotated around the shaft portion 535, 5554, the first pin 561a is slid (guided) along the first guide groove 513, so that the intermediate plate portion 561 ( That is, the driven member 560) is rotated relative to the driven member 550 and the rear case body 520 with the connecting shaft 561b as the center of rotation (see FIGS. 27 (a) to 29 (a)), and the connecting shaft 561b. Is slid (guided) along the second guide groove 523, so that the intermediate plate portion 561 (that is, the driven member 560) slides along the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 as the driven member. It is slidably displaced relative to 550 (see FIGS. 27 (b) to 29 (b)).

Here, the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is inserted only into the connecting groove 552a of the driven member 550 (intermediate plate portion 552), and a pin separately provided in the intermediate plate portion 561 is inserted into the rear case body 520th. By inserting the two guide grooves 523, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is provided in both the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 and the connecting groove 552a of the driven member 550 (intermediate plate portion 552). The connecting shaft 561b is inserted and guided by the second guide groove 523 to define the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the rear case body 520 (that is, the driven member 560 is slidably displaced with respect to the driven member 550. ), And the role of connecting the driven member 560 to the driven member 550 so as to be relatively displaceable (rotational and sliding displacement) by being inserted into the connecting groove 561b. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the product cost can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and the reliability and durability of the movable member can be improved.

The back plate portion 563 is a front view circular member arranged on the back surface of the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and has a contact portion on the front surface (the front side surface of the paper surface in FIG. 25 (a)). 563a is projected. The contact portion 563a is a portion that comes into contact with the back surface of the back case body 520, and is formed concentrically with the connecting shaft 561b in a front view annular shape. That is, only the peripheral edge portion (protruding tip surface of the contact portion 562a) of the back plate portion 563 is brought into contact with the back surface of the back case body 520.

By providing the back plate portion 563 with the abutting portion 563 concentric with the connecting shaft 561b in this way, when the connecting shaft 561b is slid (guided) along the second guide groove 523, the first pin 561a And even when the driven member 560 is rotated relative to the back case body 520 with the connecting shaft 561b as the center of rotation due to the rotational action of the first guide groove 523 (see FIGS. 27 to 29), the back case body. It is possible to suppress the change in the supporting reaction force by keeping the contact state with respect to the back surface of the 520 constant. As a result, the driven member 560 can be displaced in a stable state.

In the driven member 560, the decorative portion 562 and the back plate portion 563 are integrally formed of the resin material, while the intermediate plate portion 561 is formed of the resin material as a separate member from each of these portions 562 and 563, and the back plate portion is formed. It is assembled by bringing the axial end surface of the connecting shaft 561b of the intermediate plate portion 561 into contact with the front surface of the 563 and fastening and fixing the two with screws. The structure for connecting the plurality of pins 561c projecting from the axial end faces of the connecting shaft 561b into the plurality of holes 563b of the back plate portion 563 in a relative non-rotatable manner is described above. Since it is the same as the case of the member 550, the description thereof will be omitted.

The description will be returned from FIG. 20 to FIG. 22. The combined operation unit 500 can be assembled as follows. First, the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 550 is inserted into the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510, and the intermediate plate portion 561 and the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550 are fastened and fixed to each other. As a result, the driven member 550 can be assembled to the front case body 510 in a rotatable state. At the time of this assembly, the connecting shaft 561b of the intermediate plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted into the connecting groove 552 of the driven member 550 (intermediate plate portion 552) in advance.

Next, the crank member 540 is mounted on the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 via the insertion hole 522 of the rear case body 520, and the crank pin 541 is mounted on the drive member 550 via the insertion hole 512 of the front case body 510. It is inserted into the drive groove 551a of (front plate portion 551). At the same time, the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 (intermediate plate portion 561) of the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 is inserted, and the intermediate plate portion 561 and the back plate portion 563 of the driven member 560 are fastened and fixed to each other. To do. As a result, the driven member 560 can be assembled to the rear case body 520 in a rotatable state, can be connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slide-displaceable state, and is driven via the crank member 540. It is possible to form a state in which the rotational driving force of the motor 530 can be transmitted to the driven member 550.

After that, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are fastened and fixed with screws (not shown). As a result, the combined operation unit 500 is placed in a state in which the driven member 550 can be displaced by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 and the driven member 560 can be displaced (driven) in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550. It can be unitized as one device. As described above, according to the composite operation unit 500, since each component can be assembled to the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 in order, the assembly cost can be reduced and the unit can be formed. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by facilitating the assembly to the unit storage member 300 (the game machine main body, see FIGS. 5 and 6).

Next, the operation of the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 32. 27 (a), 28 (a) and 29 (a) are front schematic views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513, and FIG. 27 (b), FIG. 28 (b) and 29 (b) are front schematic views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523.

Similarly, FIGS. 30 (a), 31 (a) and 32 (a) are front schematic views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513, and FIG. 30 (a). b), FIGS. 30 (b) and 30 (b) are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523.

27 and 30 correspond to a state in which the driven member 560 is arranged in the retracted position (the state shown in FIGS. 18 and 20), and in FIGS. 29 and 32, the driven member 560 is arranged in the overhanging position. Corresponds to the state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20). Further, the states shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 correspond to a state in which the driven member 560 is arranged between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 30, when the driven member 560 is arranged in the retracted position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is on the right side of the front view with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (FIG. 30A). Located on the right side), the driven member 550 tilts the tip end side (the formed portion of the drive groove 551a) of the front plate portion 551 to the right side (right side in FIG. 30B) when viewed from the front, and the intermediate plate. The posture is such that the tip end side (the forming portion of the connection groove 552a) of the portion 552 is lifted upward (upper side in FIG. 30B). That is, the driven member 550 is arranged at a rotation position that is the end of rotation in the front view clockwise (clockwise) direction with the shaft portion 535, 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) as the center of rotation.

On the other hand, as described above, the driven member 560 is in a posture in which the driven member 550 lifts the tip end side of the intermediate plate portion 552 upward, so that the connecting shaft 561b is on the upper end side of the second guide groove 523 ( It is assumed that the posture is pushed up to the upper side of FIG. 27 (b). That is, the driven member 560 is arranged at the highest position in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30 (b)) and at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 30 (b)). Will be done. Further, in the driven member 560, the first pin 561a of the intermediate plate portion 561 is located on the upper end side (upper left side of FIG. 27 (a)) of the first guide groove 513, so that the tip side of the intermediate plate portion 561 ( The first pin 561a (arranged portion) is oriented horizontally toward the left side (left side in FIG. 27A) when viewed from the front. That is, the driven member 560 is arranged at a rotation position that is the end of rotation in the counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction in the front view with the connecting shaft 561b as the center of rotation.

From the state where the driven member 560 shown in FIGS. 27 and 30 is arranged in the retracted position, the crank member 540 rotates the drive shaft 531 in a counterclockwise direction (counterclockwise) due to the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530. When rotated, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is slid along the drive groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, so that the driven member 550 is moved to the shaft portion 535, 554 (FIGS. 20 and 20). (See FIG. 21) is rotated in the counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction when viewed from the front, and the driven member 560 is located at a position substantially intermediate between the retracted position and the overhanging position, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 31. Be placed.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, when the driven member 560 is arranged at a position substantially intermediate between the retracted position and the overhanging position, the driven member 550 causes the front plate portion 551 to stand substantially upright and is interposed. The posture is such that the plate portion 552 is substantially horizontal. That is, the driven member 550 is arranged at a rotation position substantially intermediate in the rotatable range centered on the shaft portion 535, 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

On the other hand, in the driven member 560, the driven member 550 is in a posture in which the intermediate plate portion 552 is substantially horizontal, so that the connecting shaft 561b pushed down by the connecting groove 552a of the intermediate plate portion 552 is second. It is assumed that the posture is arranged at the intermediate position of the guide groove 523. That is, the driven member 560 is arranged at a position substantially intermediate in the displaceable range in the vertical direction (FIG. 31 (b) vertical direction), and is located on the far right in the horizontal direction (FIG. 30 (b) horizontal direction). It is placed in the position where. Further, the driven member 560 is arranged at a position where the first pin 561a of the intermediate plate portion 561 is substantially in the middle of the first guide groove 513, so that the tip side of the intermediate plate portion 561 (the first pin 561a The arrangement portion) is tilted toward the upper left side of the front view (upper left side of FIG. 28A). That is, the driven member 560 is arranged at a rotation position substantially intermediate in the rotatable range centered on the connecting shaft 561b.

From the state shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, when the crank member 540 is further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when the drive shaft 531 is rotating due to the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank member 540 By sliding the crank pin 541 along the drive groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, the driven member 550 faces the front with the shaft portion 535, 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) as the center of rotation. It is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the driven member 560 is arranged at the overhang position as shown in FIGS. 29 and 32.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, when the driven member 560 is arranged at the overhanging position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is on the left side of the front view with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (FIG. 32 (a). ) Left side), whereby the driven member 550 tilts the tip end side (the formed portion of the drive groove 551a) of the front plate portion 551 to the left side (left side in FIG. 32B) and is provided. The posture is such that the tip end side (the forming portion of the connection groove 552a) of the plate portion 552 is dropped downward (lower side in FIG. 32B). That is, the driven member 550 is arranged at a rotation position at which the rotation ends in the counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction in the front view with the shaft portion 535, 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) as the center of rotation.

On the other hand, as described above, the driven member 560 is in a posture in which the driven member 550 is in a posture in which the tip end side of the intermediate plate portion 552 is lowered downward, so that the connecting shaft 561b is on the lower end side of the second guide groove 523 ( The posture is pushed down to FIG. 29 (b) lower side). That is, the driven member 560 is arranged at the lowest position in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 32 (b)) and at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 32 (b)). Will be done. Further, in the driven member 560, the first pin 561a of the intermediate plate portion 561 is located on the lower end side (lower right side of FIG. 29 (a)) of the first guide groove 513, so that the tip side of the intermediate plate portion 561 is provided. It is in an upright posture with (the disposed portion of the first pin 561a) facing upward in the front view (upper side in FIG. 29A). That is, the driven member 560 is arranged at a rotation position that is the end of rotation in the front-view clockwise (clockwise) direction with the connecting shaft 561b as the center of rotation.

As described above, according to the combined operation unit 500, when the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the driven member 560 is displaced according to the displacement of the driven member 550. It can be driven while being displaced relative to the drive member 550. That is, the mode of displacement of the driven member 550 is a rotation centered on the shaft portions 533 and 554, and even if the driven member 550 is displaced in a constant trajectory, the trajectory (displacement) different from that of the driven member 550. 560), the driven member 560 can be displaced. Further, since the change in the mode of such displacement is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550, even if the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) at a constant speed, the change is formed. The driven member 560 can be displaced in a trajectory (displacement mode) different from that of the driven member 550. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member 560 while keeping the output of the drive motor 530 constant.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the means (displacement defining means) for relatively displace the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 are the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520. It is formed by the 523, the first pin 561a of the driven member 560, and the connecting shaft 561b. That is, by guiding the first pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b along the guide grooves 513 and 523, the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the case bodies 510 and 520 can be defined. Thereby, the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be formed according to the contour (shape) of each of the guide grooves 513 and 523. As a result, the displacement defining means can be formed by the mechanical element of the guide groove and the shaft-shaped body guided by the guide groove, and the structure thereof is simplified, so that the product cost can be reduced. Further, since a simple mechanical element can be adopted, it is possible to improve the reliability and durability of the moving part.

Further, by setting the contours (shapes) of the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the mode of relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be arbitrarily set, so that the displacement of the driven member 560 can be set arbitrarily. The degree of freedom in design when setting the mode can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily secure variations in the modes of displacement that can be applied to the driven member 560.

In particular, in the present embodiment, where the driven member 560 is rotatably and slidably connected to the driven member 550, the first guide groove 513 and the first pin 561a are configured to mainly regulate rotation. A guide structure and a second guide structure composed of a second guide groove 523 and a connecting shaft 561b and mainly defining a slide displacement are provided. As a result, not only can the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode be increased, but also when the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 becomes a plurality of types (rotation and slide displacement), each of these displacements is first. And the second guide structure can guide each of them appropriately. As a result, the displacement of the driven member 560 can be stabilized, and the reliability of the movable member can be improved.

Here, in the above-described first guide structure, for example, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the intermediate plate portion 561 or the back plate portion 563, and the first pin 561a is formed in the front case body 510 or the back case body 520, respectively. It also holds true in the configuration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510, and the first pin 561a is formed in the intermediate plate portion 561. As a result, it is possible to easily secure a space for forming the first guide groove 513.

That is, since the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 need to hold the both members 550 and 560 while securing the displacement space of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, they must be formed into a relatively large outer shape. There is a tendency for dead space to be formed on the plate surface. Therefore, by setting the formation target of the first guide groove portion 513 to the front case body 510, it is possible to effectively utilize the dead space and secure a sufficient space for forming the first guide groove portion 513. As a result, the degree of freedom in the contour (shape) and the extension length of the first guide groove 513 can be increased, and the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased accordingly. Since the second guide structure is the same as that of the first guide structure, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the first guide structure and the second guide structure are also established in a configuration in which both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed on the back case body 520. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510 and the second guide groove 523 is formed in the rear case body 520, so that the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed respectively. Can be formed without considering the formation position of each other.

That is, when both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed on the back case body 520, it is necessary to form the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 so as not to intersect with each other. The degree of freedom in designing the contour (shape) and extension length is limited. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the contour (shape) and the extension length of both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are arbitrarily set without considering the positional relationship with the other party. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the design can be increased, and the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased accordingly.

Next, the rotary operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39. FIG. 33 is a front perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the rotary operation unit 600, the first rotating body 650 having an annular shape in front view is arranged so as to surround the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and the back surface of the first rotating body 650 is arranged. The second rotating body 660 having an annular shape in front view is arranged concentrically on the side, and in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are rotated at different rotation speeds and in opposite directions.

Here, in the conventional product in which a plurality of rotating bodies are arranged at positions separated from each other, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotations of the plurality of rotating bodies in association with each other. That is, the conventional product has a form in which each rotating body is rotated independently without being involved with other rotating bodies, and therefore, the effect of the effect of rotating a plurality of rotating bodies is fully exhibited. I couldn't get it.

On the other hand, according to the rotation operation unit 600 in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are concentrically arranged around the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and these two rotating bodies rotate differently. Since it is rotated in a mode (a mode in which the rotation speed and the rotation direction are different from each other), it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize these rotations in association with each other, and it is possible to exert the effect of the effect by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies. it can. The detailed configuration of the rotary operation unit 600 will be described below.

FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600. Further, FIG. 36 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600. In addition, in FIGS. 35 and 36, the illustration of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is omitted. Further, the cross section shown in FIG. 36 corresponds to the cross section of the rotary operation unit 600 cut by a plane including the rotation centers of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the rotary operation unit 600 includes a front case body 610 and a back case body 620 forming the framework thereof, a drive motor 630 arranged on the back side of the back case body 620, and a drive thereof. A plurality of gears (first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and front gear 646) as transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the motor 630, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 are transmitted through the plurality of gears. The first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 that are rotated by being rotated, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 arranged on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, and the front case body 610. It mainly includes a light emitting device 680 arranged on the front surface.

The front case body 610 and the back case body 620 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is configured as an accommodating member in which an internal space is formed between the facing surfaces. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 are housed in the internal spaces (between the facing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, respectively.

Circular openings 611 and 621 are formed in the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, respectively, and these openings 611 and 621 are concentrically arranged in the assembled state. On the front side of the front case body 610, a tubular tubular portion 612 is projected toward the front (front) at a position concentric with the openings 611 and 621. In the front case body 610, the inner diameters of the opening 611 and the tubular portion 612 are set to the same dimensions, and the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 610 rotates on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the tubular portion 612. Supported as possible. Further, a second rotating body 620 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral side of the tubular portion 612.

In this way, the first rotating body 650 (main body portion 651) and the second rotating body 660 are rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 611 of the front case body 610. The arrangement positions of the rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be defined with reference to the front case body 610, respectively. Therefore, as will be described later, the gears (first and second outer peripheral gears 653a, 661a) engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 650 (storage flange portion 653) and the second rotating body 660, and the front surface. The positional relationship between the second accommodating gear 642 and the front gear 646 arranged on the case body 610 can be defined with reference to the front case body 610. As a result, the meshing state of the outer peripheral gears 653a and 661a of both rotating bodies 650 and 660 with the second accommodating gear 642 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed and the drive resistance can be suppressed. Can be suppressed.

The drive motor 630 has a pinion gear 631 attached to its drive shaft and is mounted on the back surface of the rear case body 620, whereby the pinion gear 631 is attached to the first storage gear 641 among a plurality of gears constituting the transmission means. Make teeth fit. Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 can be transmitted to the transmission means (plurality of gears) via the pinion gear 431, and as a result, as described later, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be transmitted. Can be rotated respectively.

As described above, the first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the front gear 646 are a group of gears for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660. Each tooth is formed as a spur gear carved on the outer peripheral surface in parallel with the axis of rotation. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 are rotatably supported on the back side of the front case body 610, and are connected (toothed) in series so that the first storage gear 641 is at the head and the fifth storage gear 641 is stored. One gear train (gear train) having a gear 645 as a tail is formed.

The front gear 646 is rotatably supported on the front side of the front case body 610 in a state where it can rotate synchronously with the fifth storage gear 645. That is, the front gear 646 and the fifth storage gear 645 are fixed to one end and the other end of the rotating shaft arranged so as to penetrate the front case body 610, and both gears 645 and 646 and the rotating shaft are integrated. Is rotated.

According to the gear group configured in this way, when the drive motor 630 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force is transmitted to the first accommodating gear 641 via the pinion gear 631, and the first accommodating gear 641 is rotated. .. The rotation of the first accommodating gear 641 is transmitted to the fifth accommodating gear 645 by the action of the gear train (gear train), and the rotation of the fifth accommodating gear 645 causes the front gear 646 to rotate.

Here, as will be described later, the second accommodating gear 642 has the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 (storage flange portion 653), and the front gear 646 has the second outer peripheral of the second rotating body 660. Since the gears 661a are meshed with each other, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be rotated as the drive motor 630 is rotationally driven. That is, by driving the rotation of the drive motor 630, the two rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) can be rotated at the same time.

In this case, in the present embodiment, an even number of gears (third and fourth accommodating gears 643, 644) are interposed between the second accommodating gear 642 and the fifth accommodating gear 645. Therefore, not only can the rotation speeds of the front gear 646 and the second accommodation gear 642, which are synchronously rotated by the fifth accommodation gear 645, be different, but also the rotation between the second accommodation gear 642 and the front gear 646. You can also change the direction. As a result, as will be described later, the rotation speed and the rotation direction of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be made different from each other.

Further, in the present embodiment, a gear train including the second storage gear 642 is arranged on the back side of the front case body 610, and a front gear is arranged on the front side of the front case cheer 610, respectively, and the front side of the front case body 610 and On the rear side, the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are meshed with the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 and the second outer peripheral gear 651a of the second rotating body 660, respectively. Therefore, for example, both the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are arranged on the front side of the front case body 610, and both gears 642 and 646 are meshed with the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, respectively. Not only the transmission structure that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, but also the structure of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 itself. Can be simplified.

Further, the gear train and the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 to which the second storage gear 642 of the gear trains are meshed with each other are arranged on the back side of the front case body 610 to rotate. The gear train and the storage flange portion 653 can be shielded by the front case body 610 from the player who looks at the operation unit 600 in front. That is, a shielding structure for invisible shielding the gear train and the storage flange portion 653 can be simply formed by using the back case body 610 without the need to provide a separate member.

The first rotating body 650 is an effect member for performing an effect by rotating around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (see FIG. 33), and is integrally formed with the main body portion 651 and the main body portion 651 on one side in the axial direction. It mainly includes a front effect portion 652 to be formed, and a storage flange portion 653 to be fastened and fixed to the other side (axial end face) in the axial direction of the main body portion 651 with screws.

The main body portion 651 is a portion formed in a cylindrical shape from the resin material, and is inserted into the opening 611 in the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the tubular portion 612. That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (opening 611 and tubular portion 612) with the main body portion 651 as the rotation axis. Here, the detailed configuration of the main body portion 651 will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

37 (a) is a rear view of the main body portion 651, and FIG. 37 (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the main body portion 651 showing an enlarged view of the XXXVII portion of FIG. 37 (a). In addition, in FIG. 37 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the diameters of the first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion 651b are schematically shown in a larger size than they actually are, and the first protruding portion 651a is shown. And the virtual circle IS, which is a virtual circle inscribed with each top of the second protrusion 651b, is illustrated using a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), a first protruding portion 651a and a second protruding portion 651b are formed on the main body portion 651, and at positions corresponding to the second protruding portion 651b. , The offset portion 651c is formed.

The first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion 651b are formed so as to project from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651, respectively, and are formed along the axial direction of the main body portion 651 (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 37 (a)). However, it is a portion extending over the entire length of the main body portion 651 (see FIG. 35), and is a plurality of locations (a total of eight locations in the present embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion 651a. The portions 651b are alternately arranged and formed in the circumferential direction.

That is, in the first protruding portion 651a, a columnar body having a circular cross section having a diameter dimension larger than the plate thickness dimension of the main body portion 561 is embedded in the main body portion 651 in a posture in which the axial direction coincides with that of the main body portion 651. It is formed by a portion (a part of the columnar body) protruding from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 of the buried columnar body. The second protrusion 651b is also the same as the first protrusion 651a, except that the diameter of the columnar body embedded in the main body 651 is larger than that of the first protrusion 651a.

In this way, the first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion 651b protruding from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 are extended along the axial direction over the entire length of the main body portion 651, whereby the main body portion The rigidity of 651 can be increased.

The second protruding portion 651b extends further along the axial direction from the axial end surface (front side surface of the paper surface in FIG. 37B) of the main body portion 651. Therefore, as will be described later, when the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 with screws, the axially extending portion of the second protruding portion 651b is recessed in the front surface of the storage flange portion 653. By being fitted in the recessed portion, the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 can be firmly coupled to each other so as not to rotate relative to each other (see FIG. 36).

The offset portion 651c is a portion in which the vicinity of the second protruding portion 651b forming portion in the main body portion 651 is offset toward the inner peripheral side while maintaining the plate thickness dimension, and is approximately three times the diameter of the second protruding portion 651b. It is formed over a range (circumferential direction). That is, the offset portion 651c is curved in an arc shape concentric with the main body portion 651 in the axial view of the main body portion 651 shown in FIG. 37 (b). By forming the offset portion 651c on the main body portion 651 in this way, the axial center of the second protruding portion 651b can be offset to the axial center side as described later, and the main body portion 651 as a whole can be positioned. Rigidity can be increased.

The plurality of (four in the present embodiment) first protrusions 651a are set so that the amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651 is the same, and the plurality of (four in the present embodiment) second protrusions 652b The amount of protrusion of the main body portion 651 from the outer peripheral surface is set to be the same as that of the first protrusion 651a due to the offset by the offset portion 651c. A plurality of (8 in this embodiment) first projecting portions 651a and second projecting portions 652b are set to have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651. As a result, as shown in FIG. 37B, the virtual circle IS in which the tops of the first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion 652b are inscribed can be set concentrically on the outer peripheral side of the main body portion 651. In this case, the diameter dimension of the virtual circle IS is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the inner diameter dimension of the opening 611 and the tubular portion 612 in the front case body 610.

Therefore, in a state where the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted through the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the tubular portion 612, the contact regions thereof are the first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion. Since it can be limited to each top of the 651b, the contact resistance can be suppressed and the main body 651 can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the tubular portion 612.

In particular, the first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion 651b have an arcuate shape in the axial direction (specifically, an arcuate shape in which the cross section cut in a plane orthogonal to the axial direction of the main body portion 651 is convex outward. ), Not only can the contact area be suppressed, but also the tops of the first and second protrusions 651a and 651b can be smoothly contacted with respect to the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral surface of the tubular portion 612. Therefore, even if there is rattling due to the dimensional tolerance, the main body portion 651 can be rotated more smoothly on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the tubular portion 612.

As described above, the first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion 651b are projected not only from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 but also from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651. As a result, when the main body portion 651 is molded by the resin mold, the shape of the main body portion 651 can be made uniform (symmetrical shape) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side, and the moldability can be ensured.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in the axial view of the main body portion 651 shown in FIG. 37B, the first protruding portion 651a has a protruding dimension of a portion formed so as to project from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 and the main body portion 651. The protrusion dimension of the portion formed so as to protrude from the inner peripheral surface of the above is the same. Similarly, in the second protruding portion 651a, the protruding dimension of the portion formed by projecting from the outer peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c and the protruding dimension of the portion formed protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c are the same. .. Therefore, the shapes on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side of the main body portion 651 can be made more uniform (symmetrical shape), and the moldability thereof can be further ensured.

Further, in the second protruding portion 651b, a hole having a circular cross section formed along the axial direction thereof is formed over the entire length (see FIG. 36). As a result, the wall thickness dimension of the second protruding portion 651b, which has a larger diameter than the first protruding portion 651a, can be made uniform with other parts (main body portion 651, offset portion 651c, first protruding portion 651a, etc.). As a result, the moldability of the main body portion 651 can be ensured.

In this case, a female screw is engraved on the inner peripheral surface of the hole formed in the second protruding portion 651b, and a screw for fastening and fixing the storage flange portion 653 can be screwed (see FIG. 36). In this way, the strength of the screw fastening portion can be ensured by having the second protruding portion 651b formed having a relatively large diameter bear the screw fastening portion for fastening the screw. In particular, the second protruding portion 651b is a portion formed in the offset portion 651c, and the rigidity of the main body portion 651 is strengthened. Therefore, the second protruding portion 651b connects the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653. By carrying it, it is possible to firmly connect the two and improve the durability.

It will be described back from FIG. 34 to FIG. 36. The front effect portion 652 is a portion that is visually recognized as an effect portion by the player, and is formed so as to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 in a flange shape. The front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect unit 652 is plated, and an appearance imitating a glossy metal is given to the front effect unit 652. The front effect unit 652 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, but by being plated, the light emitting device 680 (light emitting element 681) can be visually recognized by the player through the front effect unit 652. It can be avoided.

The front view shape of the front effect portion 652 is formed into a saw blade shape in which irregularly shaped peaks (second part) and valleys (first part) are repeated along the circumferential direction, and in the present embodiment, 16 pieces are formed. Mountains (valleys) are arranged at unequal intervals (unequal pitch) in the circumferential direction. As will be described later, when the first rotating body 650 is rotated, the peaks and valleys of the front effect unit 652 pass through the front side (front) of the light emitting element 681 of the light emitting device 680 in order, so that the player emits light. The element 681 can be visually recognized intermittently and selectively (see FIG. 39).

The storage flange portion 653 is a portion to be stored in the internal space (between the facing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, is formed in a front view ring shape, and is a tubular portion of the front case body 610. It is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the main body portion 651 inserted through the 612 via the opening 611. Specifically, as described above, the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 by screwing the screw inserted through the storage flange portion 653 into the second protruding portion 651b of the main body portion 651.

The thickness of the storage flange portion 653 is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the distance between the facing surfaces of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, and the outer diameter is set to the front case body 610 and the back case. The size is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the openings 611 and 621 in the body 620. Therefore, the first rotating body 650 defines the axial position of the first rotating body 650 by bringing the front surface or the back surface of the storage flange portion 653 into contact with the back surface of the front case body 610 or the front surface of the back case body 620. it can.

A first outer peripheral gear 653a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653, and the first outer peripheral gear 653a is used for the second storage of the above-mentioned gear trains arranged on the back surface of the front case body 610. Gears 642 are meshed. Therefore, when the gear train is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the storage flange portion 653 via the second storage gear 642 and the first outer peripheral gear 653a, and the first rotating body 650 It is rotated.

As described above, in the first rotating body 650, the first outer peripheral gear 653a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653, and among the gear trains arranged along the peripheral edge in the opening 511 of the front case body 610. Since the second storage gear 642 is meshed with the first outer peripheral gear 653a, the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 can be simplified. In particular, since the first rotating body 650 is formed in a tubular shape and the projected surface portion 671 of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 described later is arranged on the inner peripheral side thereof, it is difficult to secure a space on the inner peripheral surface side. It becomes. Therefore, it is effective that the above-mentioned transmission structure can be arranged on the outer peripheral side of the first rotating body 650.

Further, as described above, the first rotating body 650 (main body portion 651) is rotatably supported on the inner peripheral surface of the tubular portion 611 of the front case body 610, so that the first rotating body 650 is arranged. The position can be defined with reference to the front case body 610. Therefore, the position between the gear (first outer peripheral gear 653a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 650 (storage flange portion 653) and the second accommodating gear 642 arranged on the front case body 610. The relationship can be defined with reference to the front case body 610. As a result, the meshing state of the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 and the second accommodating gear 642 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gear can be suppressed and drive resistance can be suppressed. it can.

The second rotating body 660 is an effecting member for producing an effect by rotating on the back side of the first rotating body 650 (see FIG. 33), and is a main body portion formed in a cylindrical shape from a light-transmitting resin material. It mainly includes a 661 and a front effect portion 662 integrally formed on the axial end surface of the main body portion 661.

The inner diameter of the main body 661 is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular portion 612 of the front case body 610, and is fitted on the outer peripheral side of the tubular portion 612 (that is,). (By inserting the tubular portion 612 on the inner peripheral side of the main body portion 661), it is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (cylindrical portion 612).

A second outer peripheral gear 661a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the main body 661, and the above-mentioned front gear 646 disposed in front of the front case body 610 is meshed with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. Therefore, when the above-mentioned gear train and front gear 646 are rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the main body 661 via the front gear 646 and the second outer peripheral gear 661a, and the second rotation is performed. The body 660 is rotated.

In this way, the second rotating body 660 has the second outer peripheral gear 661a engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and the front gear 646 arranged in front of the front case body 610 is meshed with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. , The transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the second rotating body 660 can be simplified. In particular, since the second rotating body 650 has a structure in which the second rotating body 650 is formed in a tubular shape and is rotatably held by being fitted onto the tubular portion 612 of the front case body 610, a space is secured on the inner peripheral surface side. It becomes difficult to do. Therefore, it is effective that the above-mentioned transmission structure can be arranged on the outer peripheral side of the second rotating body 660.

Further, as described above, since the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 611 of the front case body 610, the arrangement position of the second rotating body 660 can be set to the front case body. It can be specified with reference to 610. Therefore, the positional relationship between the gear (second outer peripheral gear 661a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 arranged on the front case body 610 is determined by the front case body 610. Can be specified as a standard. As a result, the meshing state of the second outer peripheral gear 661a of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed and drive resistance can be suppressed.

The axial dimension of the main body 661 is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the facing distance between the front surface of the front case body 610 and the back surface of the front effect unit 652 of the first rotating body 650. Therefore, in the second rotating body 660, the end face on one side in the axial direction or the end face on the other side in the axial direction of the main body 661 is brought into contact with the back surface of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 or the front surface of the front case body 610. As a result, the axial position of the second rotating body 650 can be defined.

The main body 661 has front ridges 661b and back ridges 661c projecting from the end surface on one side in the axial direction and the end surface on the other side in the axial direction, respectively. The front ridge 661b is formed in a front view ring shape, and the back ridge 661c is formed in a shape obtained by dividing the front view ring shape at a plurality of points. As a result, when rotating the first rotating body 660, the frictional resistance between the main body portion 661 and the front case 610 and the second rotating body 650 (front effect portion 652) is reduced, and the load of the drive motor 630 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

The front effect unit 662 is located on the back side of the front effect unit 652 of the first rotating body 650, and is a portion that is visually recognized as an effect portion by the player together with the effect unit 652, in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface of the main body unit 661. It is formed by projecting outward in a flange shape. The front effect portion 662 has an outer peripheral side portion 662a formed in a saw blade shape in which irregularly shaped peaks and valleys are repeated along the circumferential direction, and a front view ring shape on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral side portion 662a. It includes an inner peripheral side portion 662b which is a portion.

The front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect unit 662 is plated as in the case of the front effect unit 652 of the first rotating body 650. However, in the above-mentioned first rotating body 650, the entire surface (entire range) of the front directing portion 652 was plated, but in the second rotating body 650, only the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front directing portion 662 was plated. Is applied, and the inner peripheral side portion 662b is not plated.

Therefore, as will be described later, the peaks (second portion) and valleys (first portion) of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 are sequentially passed on the front side (front) of the light emitting element 681 of the light emitting device 680. When the light emitting element 681 is intermittently and selectively visually recognized by the player, the light emitting element 681 is watermarked through the inner peripheral side portion 662b (that is, the unplated portion) of the front effect portion 662. Therefore, it can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 39).

The spherical liquid crystal device 670 includes a projected surface portion 671 formed as a spherical shell from a light-transmitting material, and a case body 672 in which a projection device for projecting an image onto the inner surface of the spherical shell of the projected surface portion 671 is housed. Is mainly provided, and the player is made to visually recognize the image projected from the projection device and transmitted to the outer surface of the projected surface portion 671. In the assembled state, the case body 672 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the back case body 620, and the projected surface portion 671 projects approximately half of the spherical shell forward from the front surface of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. It is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 in a vertical posture (see FIG. 33).

The light emitting device 680 includes a front view ring-shaped case body 681 that is externally fitted to the tubular portion 612 of the front case 610, a circuit board housed in the case body 681, and the front surface (front surface) of the circuit board. A plurality of (12 in this embodiment) light emitting elements 682 arranged (mounted) on the side are mainly provided, and in the assembled state, the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660. It is arranged on the back side of 662.

On the front surface (front surface) of the case body 681, openings having an outer shape larger than that of the light emitting element 682 are formed at 12 locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and each light emitting element corresponds to the opening position of each opening. 682 is mounted on the circuit board. That is, in the front view of the light emitting device 680, the light emitting element 682 is exposed from the opening of the case body 681, and the light emitted from the light emitting element 682 is transmitted to the front side (first rotation) through the opening of the case body 681. It is possible to irradiate the front effect portion 652,662) of the body 650 and the second rotating body 660.

As described above, the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are arranged on the front (front) side of the light emitting device 680, and the front effect unit 652 of the first rotating body 650. By rotating the light emitting element 682, the light emission by the light emitting element 682 can be made to be visually recognized by the player intermittently and selectively. Here, a structure for allowing the player to visually recognize the light emission of the light emitting element 682 intermittently and selectively will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the rotary operation unit 600, and FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b) show a state in which the first rotating bodies 650 are arranged at different rotational positions. 39 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600 in the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa of FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. 39 (b) is a sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600 in the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 38 (b). It is a cross-sectional view of.

In FIG. 38, in order to clarify the phase relationship between the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680, the first rotating body 650 of the rotating operation unit 600 and Only the light emitting device 680 is shown, and in FIG. 39, in order to clarify the relationship between the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 in the radial position. The disassembled state in which the second rotating body 660 is added to the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting device 680 shown in FIG. 38 is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the front view shape of the front effect portion 652 in the first rotating body 650 is such that irregularly shaped peaks (second portion) and valleys (first portion) are repeated along the circumferential direction. The position of the light emitting element 682 in the light emitting device 680 is radially outside (upper side in FIG. 39 (a)) of the valley bottom in the front effect portion 652 and is formed in the front effect unit 652. It is set to a radial position (vertical position in FIG. 39 (a)) that is radially inside (lower side in FIG. 39 (a)) from the mountaintop.

In this case, as described above, the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is formed so that the front surface (front surface) is not plated and light can be transmitted. The forming range of the peripheral side portion 662b (the range indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 39) is set to a range including the valley bottom in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. That is, in front view, light is emitted from the valley portion in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 through the inner peripheral side portion 662b in the front effect unit 662 of the second rotating body 660 (that is, transmitted). The light emitting element 682 of the device 680 can be visually recognized by the player.

Further, as described above, the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated on the front surface (front surface) to give an appearance imitating a glossy metal. The outer peripheral side portion 662a is arranged so as to face the back surface side of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. That is, in the front view, the player can visually recognize the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 from the valley portion of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650.

As described above, according to the rotation operation unit 600, peaks and valleys are alternately formed in the frontal effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 in the region overlapping the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 in the front view. Therefore, as the first rotating body 650 rotates, the peaks and valleys of the front effect portion 652 alternately pass in front of the light emitting element 682, so that the light emitting of the light emitting element 682 is emitted by the second rotating body 660. The player can be made to visually recognize intermittently through the inner peripheral side portion 662b in the front effect portion 682 of the above. As a result, it is possible to effectively rotate a plurality of rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and second rotating body 660) around the spherical liquid crystal device 670.

Further, the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated to give an appearance imitating a glossy metal, and the front (front) side of the outer peripheral side portion 662a is given an appearance. Is provided with a front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. Therefore, as described above, when the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are rotated in opposite directions to each other, the first rotating body 650 is passed through the valley portion in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. The player can visually recognize the mode in which the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 652 of the two rotating bodies 660 is rotated in the direction opposite to the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650.

That is, according to the rotation operation unit 600, the player who looks at the first rotating body 650 from the front is made to intermittently visually recognize the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 on the valley bottom side in the mountain valley shape of the front effect unit 652. On the mountaintop side of the front effect portion 652 in the mountain valley shape, the front effect portion 662 (outer peripheral side portion 662a) of the second rotating body 660 is rotated in the opposite direction to the front effect portion 652 (mountain valley shape) of the first rotating body 650. It is possible to visually recognize the mode. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body 650 and the rotation of the second rotating body 660, and as a result, a plurality of rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and second rotating body 660). It is possible to effectively perform the effect of rotating each.

Further, according to the rotation effect unit 600, as described above, valleys in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 are formed at 16 points in the circumferential direction, while the light emitting elements 682 of the light emitting device 680 are formed in the circumferential direction 12. Since the light emitting elements 682 are arranged at the locations, the player can selectively visually recognize only the specific light emitting element 682 from the light emitting elements 682 arranged at the 12 locations.

That is, the circumferential spacing of the valleys in the front effect unit 652 and the circumferential spacing of the light emitting element 682 are different, so that, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 38A, the valleys are arranged at four locations on the top, bottom, left, and right. While the provided light emitting element 682 is visible, when the first rotating body 650 (front effect unit 652) is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the state shown in FIG. 38 (a), FIG. 38 (b) ), Different light emitting elements 682 are selected, and the light emitting elements 682 arranged at four locations of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left are visible.

As a result, not only the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 can be visually recognized intermittently, but also the position of the light emitting element 682 to be visually recognized can be changed in the circumferential direction, so that a plurality of rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and) can be changed. The effect of rotating each of the second rotating bodies 660) can be performed more effectively.

Returning from FIG. 34 to FIG. 36, the overall structure of the rotary operation unit 600 will be described. As described above, the opening 611 and the tubular portion 612 are formed in the front case body 610, and the first rotating body 650 is formed separately from the main body portion 651 and the front effect portion 652 with the storage flange portion 653. Therefore, the second rotating body 660 is attached to the outer peripheral side of the tubular portion 612 of the front case body 610, and the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted into the inner peripheral side of the tubular portion 612 of the front case body 610. At the same time, after fastening and fixing the storage flange portion 653 to the inserted main body portion 651, the rear case body 620 is fastened and fixed to the front case body 610, whereby the first rotating body 650 is fastened to the front case body 610 and the back case body 620. And the second rotating body 660 can be held in a rotatable state.

That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably supported by the front case body 610 by inserting the main body portion 651 into the opening 611 and the tubular portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the front case body 610 and the front surface of the back case body 620, respectively, whereby the first rotating body 650 with respect to both the case bodies 610 and 620 can be brought into contact with each other. Displacement to the front side (front side) and back side (rear side) can be regulated.

At the same time, the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported by the front case body 610 by being fitted onto the tubular portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the second rotating body 660 (front ridge 661b and back ridge 662c) is brought into contact with the back surface of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the front surface of the case body 681 of the light emitting device 680, respectively. Therefore, the displacement of the second rotating body 660 to the front side (front side) and the back side (rear side) with respect to both case bodies 610 and 620 can be regulated.

As described above, according to the rotating operation unit 600, the rotating body (first rotating body 650) itself can hold a plurality of rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and second rotating body 660) in a rotatable state. Also serves as a portion that regulates the displacement of the second rotating body 660, so that the structure can be simplified accordingly. Further, a holding structure capable of holding a plurality of rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and second rotating body 660) in a rotatable state is fastened and fixed to a main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 with a storage flange portion 653. Since it can be formed only by squeezing, the assembly process can be simplified. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

Further, according to the rotation operation unit 600, since the first rotating body 650 is formed in a tubular shape and the opening 621 is formed in the back case body 620, a plurality of rotations are formed in the front case body 610 and the back case body 620. After the bodies (first rotating body 650 and second rotating body 660) are held in a rotatable state, the rotating operation is simply performed by attaching the spherical liquid crystal device 670 from the back side of the rear case body 620 and fastening and fixing the body (first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660). The assembly of the unit 600 can be completed (see FIG. 33). That is, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 can be retrofitted to the assembly of each case body 5610, 620 and each rotating body 650, 660 in a separate process. Therefore, this point can also contribute to simplifying the assembly process and reducing the product cost.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In the projecting operation unit 400 in the above embodiment, the case where the relative displacement member 450 is arranged so as to be slidable with respect to the base displacement member 440 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the base displacement member is not limited to this. The relative displacement member 450 may be rotatably arranged with respect to the 440. That is, the first operation is the same as in the case of the above embodiment, the base displacement member 440 is rotated between the retracted position (see FIG. 13) and the rotation position (see FIG. 14), and the second operation is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the relative displacement member 450 is rotated between the reference position (see FIG. 14) and the overhang position (see FIG. 15) with respect to the base displacement member 440.

Even with this configuration, the base displacement member 450 in the retracted position is placed in the rotating position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 in the reference position is placed in the overhanging position by the second operation. While the entire displacement members 440 and 450 can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player and the effect of the effect can be fully exerted, the relative displacement member 450 in the overhanging position is rotated to the reference position by the second operation. By arranging the base displacement member 440 in the rotational position to the retracted position by the first operation, the entire displacement members 440 and 450 are made smaller, and the space required for accommodating the displacement members is suppressed. it can.

In the projecting operation unit 400 according to the above embodiment, when the base displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 17B), the tip end side of the base displacement member 450 is larger than the tip end side of the relative displacement member 450. Although the case where the decorative member 480 side (upper side in FIG. 17B) is projected has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and conversely, the tip side of the relative displacement member 450 is the base displacement member 450. A configuration may be adopted in which the decorative member 480 side (upper side in FIG. 17B) is projected from the tip side.

Even with this configuration, the rotation loci of both displacement members 440 and 450 can be intersected with the decorative member 480, and at the time of the intersection, the decorative member 480 can be transmitted through the decorative members 480 so that both displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized. By displacing the members 440 and 450, the effect of effect can be enhanced. Further, according to this configuration, when the relative displacement member 450 is projected (see FIG. 15), the area of the decorative portion 454 located in the front (front) can be further expanded, and the power is further increased. It can be improved.

In the composite operation unit 500 according to the above embodiment, the driven member 550 (connecting groove 552a) can rotate the driven member 560 (connecting shaft 561b) by forming the connecting groove 552a of the driven member 550 in an elongated hole shape. In addition, the case where the connection is made in a slide-displaceable state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the connection groove 552a is formed in a circular shape to form a driven member with respect to the driven member 550 (connection groove 552a). A configuration in which the slide displacement of the 560 (connecting shaft 561b) is disabled (that is, a configuration in which only rotation is allowed) may be adopted. Even with this configuration, when the driven member 560 is displaced relative to the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed, so that the trajectory of the driven member 560 can be changed. It is possible to give a change to the effect to enhance the effect.

In this case, the displacement defining means composed of the first guide groove 513 and the first pin 561a is meshed with the gears arranged concentrically with the connecting shaft 561b on the driven member 560 and the gears thereof. It may be composed of a curved rack gear formed along an arc centered on the drive shaft 551a of the driven member 550 and arranged on the front case body 510 or the rear case body 520. As a result, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced with the displacement of the driven member 550, the gear rolls the rack gear, so that the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed. it can.

In the combined operation unit 500 according to the above embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the front case body 510 and the back case body 520, and are inserted into both guide grooves 513 and 523, respectively. Although the case where the 1-pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b are formed on the driven member 560 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and conversely, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed on the driven member. In addition to being provided in the 560, a configuration is adopted in which the portions (members corresponding to the first pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b) to be inserted through the guide grooves 513 and 523 are provided in the front case body 510 and / or the rear case body 520. You may. Even with this configuration, the driven member 560 can be made to perform a motion that combines a linear motion and a rotary motion with the displacement of the driven member 550. Therefore, the trajectory of the driven member 560 can be changed. The effect can be enhanced.

In the composite operation unit 500 according to the above embodiment, the case where the first guide groove 513 is bored (opened) in the front case body 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the first guide groove 513 is not necessarily limited to this. May be formed as, for example, a concave groove having a U-shaped cross section. That is, it is sufficient that the first guide groove 513 has a shape capable of guiding the first pin 561a along the extending direction thereof.

In the combined operation unit 500 according to the above embodiment, the case where the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are curved and extended while the connection groove 551a is extended linearly has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. On the contrary, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are extended in a straight line, while the connection groove 551a is curved and extended. Is also good. In particular, for the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the case where the radius of curvature is set to a constant arc shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a combination of arc shapes having a plurality of radii of curvature is combined. Of course, it is possible to adopt a different shape (for example, S-shape). As a result, the trajectory of the driven member 560 can be changed in a more complicated manner, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Specifically, for example, when the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to an arc shape, the arc shape is changed to the rotation start end in the rotation direction in which the driven member 550 is centered on the shaft portion 535, 554. Alternatively, in the state of being arranged at the end or in the vicinity thereof, it is preferable to make the radius larger than the reference value (make the curvature smaller). That is, the radius in the first range or the end in the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 and its vicinity and the second range in the vicinity thereof is made larger than the reference value, or the first range and the second range. It is preferably larger than the radius in the third range located between the ranges. As a result, the load can be reduced and the drive can be smoothly started at the initial stage of starting the drive of the driven member 550 in the stopped state by the drive motor 530.

Alternatively, while the driven member 560 is made invisible by the front case body 510, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value, and a part of the driven member 560. Is exposed (visible) outside the area of the front case body 510 until the entire driven member 560 is exposed outside the area of the front case body 510 (visible). The radius of the guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in the former case, the operation of the driven member 560 is not visible to the player, so that the load on the drive motor 530 can be reduced without affecting the effect of the effect. In the latter case, the load can be reduced. Since the driven member 560 can move faster in the range where a part of the driven member 560 is shielded from the front case body 510, the effect that the driven member 560 suddenly appears from the front case body 510 and the driven member 560 are the front case body 510. You can quickly hide behind the body.

Alternatively, the driven member 560 is decorated within a range defined by a pair of virtual lines inclined up and down by 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal line passing through the connecting shaft 561b in the horizontal posture (in the direction view of the connecting shaft 561b (see FIG. 30)). While in the posture in which the position of the center of gravity of the portion 562 is located), the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value, and while the driven member 560 exceeds the horizontal posture, The radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in a region where it is relatively necessary to support the own weight (action of gravity) of the driven member 560 with the driving force of the drive motor 530, the radius is increased to increase the frictional resistance and the driven force in each of the guide grooves 513 and 514. While the influence of inertial force due to the change in attitude of the member 560 can be reduced to reduce the load on the drive motor 530, the area where it is relatively small that the weight of the driven member 560 (the action of gravity) needs to be supported by the drive force of the drive motor 530. Then, by reducing the radius, the change in the operation of the driven member 560 can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the rotary operation unit 600 according to the above embodiment, the case where the main body portion 651 and the front effect portion 652 are integrated and the storage flange portion 653 is a separate body in the first rotating body 650 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. A configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating body 650 is formed by integrating the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 and separating the front effect portion 652. Also with this configuration, as in the case of the above embodiment, the structure for holding the plurality of rotating bodies rotatably and the assembling process can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the rotary operation unit 600 according to the above embodiment, the case where the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is formed with the front surface (front surface) as a flat surface has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. A part or all of the front surface thereof may be replaced with a flat surface to have another shape. Examples of other shapes include a surface having a plurality of irregularities, a surface formed in a corrugated cross section, an inclined surface, a curved surface, or a surface obtained by combining these. When these other shapes are adopted, not only the light emitted from the light emitting element 682 and transmitted through the inner peripheral side portion 662b can be diffusely reflected or refracted, but also the diffused reflection or the diffused reflection occurs with the rotation of the second rotating body 660. Since the movement can be provided in the direction of refraction, the effect of the effect can be enhanced (see FIG. 39).

In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case where the outer diameter dimension of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is set to a size that overlaps only a part of the front gear 646 in the front view has been described. (Refer to FIG. 36), the outer diameter of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 may be set to a size that overlaps with the entire front gear 646 in the front view. As a result, the front gear 646 can be shielded by the front effect unit 662, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a member for making the front gear 646 invisible to the player. If the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player, the front gear 646 can be a gear having a larger diameter, so that the degree of freedom in setting the gear ratio can be increased. Therefore, the change in rotation of the second rotating body 660 with respect to the first rotating body 650 can be increased.

In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the description of the stop positions of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 has been omitted, but the following may be configured. That is, the shape of the mountain in at least one or both of the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 is formed so as to be able to shield the front gear 646 in the front view. The rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 may be stopped at a phase position where the shaped portion is arranged in front of the front gear 646. As a result, the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player when the rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 is stopped.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

<Second Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 97. In the second embodiment, the control process (process related to the control of the game such as display effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be described.

<About the mechanical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. 1 is a front view, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 49) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17.

The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the background mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the content of the advance notice effect. To. Further, the frame button 22 may be configured to be used as a switch for driving a driving accessory or the like provided in the game machine, for example.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launch unit 112a. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, an electric accessory 640a, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed with wood screws from the front side. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 49) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery for special symbol 1 (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first winning opening 64, and special symbol 2 (when the ball enters the second winning opening 640). The lottery of the first symbol) is performed, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 (hereinafter, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is referred to as a special symbol) performed for the ball entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, it is special. Whether or not it is a big hit of a symbol is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the type of the big hit is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are two types of jackpots for special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable display of the special symbol for a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds). After a lapse of ~ 30 seconds, etc.), a special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is the first. It is shown by the symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, when a ball enters the second winning opening 640 while the special symbol is changing, the number of times the ball is entered is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Both are also shown for the third symbol display device 81. The number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in an identifiable display mode, respectively. As will be described in detail later, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to make it easier for the player to identify the number of reserved balls, the variation display mode of the special symbol, the determination result, etc. than the first symbol display device 37. Usually, the player is configured to play the game by looking at the display mode of the third symbol display device 81.

When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the lottery is performed. The variable display according to is started. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls in the second winning opening 640 is prioritized over the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64, and the special symbol 2 is drawn. , The variable display according to the lottery is started. Therefore, the lottery for the reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is executed when there are no reserved balls in the second winning opening 640. While the change of the special symbol 2 is being executed, the change of the special symbol 1 is not executed. That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured so that there is no period during which they fluctuate at the same time.

In the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 do not change at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to change at the same time. With such a configuration, a lottery of more games can be executed in a short time, and the determination result can be displayed, so that the games can be played more time-efficiently.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the second winning opening 640 is in an open state in which the game ball can be guided to the entry opening at the entry opening where the game ball enters, and the entry into the entry opening is restricted. It has an electric accessory 640a provided with a blade member that can rotate in a closed state. The electric accessory 640a is operated from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time based on the winning (winning) of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) described later. In addition, in the normal state, the game ball is held in an upright state so as to prevent the game ball from entering from both sides of the ball entry port, and the game ball is prevented from entering between the blade members. , The first winning opening 64 is arranged. Therefore, the second winning opening 640 is normally configured so that the ball can be entered only when the electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state. Therefore, normally, the game ball is easily inserted into the first winning opening 64, and the player fires the game ball to enter the game ball into the first winning opening 64 to play the game. It will be a thing.

The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the second winning opening 640. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to make the special winning opening 65a win, so that many balls also enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first winning opening 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the through gate 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit. There are two types of hits for normal symbols: normal hits and long-time hits in which the opening time and the number of times of opening increase, respectively, as compared with the normal hits. When the normal symbol is hit normally or for a long time, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 2 seconds), and the second winning opening 640 is opened. It becomes easy for the ball to enter the ball. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640, and as a result, the special symbol lottery is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a sphere passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. At the same time, it is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is started. To.

As described above, there are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B". In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16R big hit). After that, in the case of "big hit A", as an added value after the big hit ends, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol from the end of the big hit to the start of the big hit game of the next special symbol ( Move to (during probabilistic change of special design). On the other hand, in "Big hit B", the winning probability of the normal symbol increases from the end of the big hit to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times. Even in the high probability state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is similarly increased and set.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is the normal state. (Normal state or low probability game state of special symbol). In addition, the "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol time saving medium or time saving game state) is a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. To say. On the other hand, the time when it is not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is called "the normal state of the normal symbol" (normal game state), and this is the state where the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during the time saving. Indicates that. Hereinafter, the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation period of the special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the period from the end of the "big hit A" to the start of the next jackpot is set as the probability variation period, but the number of times (for example, 20) is not limited to this. The period during which the lottery of special symbols (such as times or 100 times) is executed may be set as the probability variation period. Further, both "big hit A" and "big hit B" may be set so as to have a predetermined number of times and a probability variation period. Further, the probability variation period may naturally be a probability variation period for a predetermined time (2 minutes, 5 minutes, etc.).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol". After that, when the special symbol becomes a big hit, it shifts to the "high probability state of the special symbol" and also shifts to the "time saving state of the normal symbol".

In addition, while the "high probability state of the special symbol" is continued, if the special symbol becomes a big hit and the jackpot type is "big hit A", the "high probability state of the special symbol" is further changed. It will continue from the end of the big hit of the new special symbol to the start of the next big hit game.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a determine whether or not the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 performed in association with the entry into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) is being executed, depending on the lighting state. By showing, the variation is displayed, or as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls whose fluctuation has not been executed (reserved balls) among the balls entered in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, is indicated by the lighting state.

The ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 while the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37. When a ball is hit, the number of times the ball is entered is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the balls entered into the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot). A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to B) is shown.

The special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are assigned separate dedicated LEDs 37a for displaying the symbol and displaying the number of reserved balls, respectively. With this configuration, it is possible to configure the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 so that the player can distinguish them more easily.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the starting opening entered in the first symbol display device 37 is triggered by the ball. The variable display of the symbol) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 40 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 40B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 49) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are aligned and stopped. Further, in the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the upper two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The substantially center of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning opening 64, and the small area Ds2 is. The small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the advance notice effect image, and the small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the second winning opening 640. Is.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbols displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are visibly displayed, so a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, one "●" symbol is displayed for one reserved sphere, and a maximum of four reserved spheres are displayed for each of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. Is displayed. That is, a maximum of eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same reserved symbol (design), but the design is not limited to this, and a different symbol (for example, the special symbol 1 is designated as a "●" symbol. The symbol 2 may be configured to be displayed as a “□” symbol).

As a result, the reserved balls of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, can be displayed in an easy-to-identify manner. In addition, since the display mode of the reserved ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is displayed differently depending on the hit type of the normal symbol, the player can easily determine that the reserved ball has occurred in a long time. be able to.

In the present embodiment, in the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-mentioned main symbol, reserved symbol, etc., character display, notice effect display of characters, etc., and total The display of the number of fluctuations is displayed as appropriate. When the reserved symbol is not displayed, it means that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first winning opening 64 is set to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds3, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the amount. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44, a display mode of the hold effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In the second embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbol of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is variably displayed, so that the result of determining whether the game is successful or not and the selected variable pattern type are notified. .. In the present embodiment, a normal hold effect as shown in FIG. 41 and eight effects as shown in FIG. 42 are set respectively. As for the normal hold effect, as shown in FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (b), when the number of holds is less than 8, one of the hold symbols is changed to a symbol displayed as "push". It is displayed (FIG. 41 (a)). When the player presses the frame button 22 after the symbol displayed as "push" is variably displayed, the symbol is variably displayed as a "Δ" symbol (see FIG. 41 (b)).

In the present embodiment, when the reserved symbol for which super reach is selected is stored in the stored reserved symbol, or when the reserved symbol for which the hit / fail judgment result is a hit is stored, the normal reserved symbol is executed by lottery. When the lottery is drawn, the reserved symbol is variably displayed as a "push" symbol as shown in FIG. 41 (a). The "push" symbol is a notification pending symbol that notifies the player to press (operate) the frame button 22. Unless the frame button 22 is pressed, the notification-holding symbol is displayed while maintaining the display mode of the notification-holding symbol until the reserved symbol starts to fluctuate.

In the present embodiment, it is configured to be displayed as a notification pending symbol until the fluctuation starts, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification pending symbol may be displayed only for a certain period of time. In addition, the normal hold effect is configured to be executed by lottery when the hold symbol that becomes the super reach is stored and when the hold symbol that becomes the jackpot is stored, but it is not limited to that. (For example, normal reach, loss of memory, etc.) may be configured to be executed by lottery. It is possible to set various symbols to be variably displayed from the notification pending symbols, and to notify the hit / fail determination result, reach type, etc. according to the symbol type, color, and the like. Further, by configuring the normal hold effect so that it can be easily drawn when the winning / failing determination result is a big hit, it is possible to expect a big hit when the normal hold effect is displayed.

Next, eight effects will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In the present embodiment, when the maximum number of reserved symbols is eight, a lottery is drawn as to whether or not to execute an eight-piece effect (see FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (b)) using all eight reserved symbols. When it is determined that the eight effects are to be executed, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), all the reserved symbols are variably displayed as the notification reserved symbols of the "push" symbol. Then, at the right end, a notification mode (notification mode that is not a reserved symbol) showing the characters "press!" Is displayed, and is configured to prompt the frame button 22 to be pressed.

When the player presses the frame button 22 during the period in which the eight effects are being executed, the notification pending symbols are displayed one by one in a variable manner as shown in FIG. 42 (b). Here, each time the frame button 22 is pressed once, one notification hold symbol is variably displayed. The variable order is configured to be variable in order from the notification hold symbol displayed on the left.

It is decided whether or not to execute the eight effects by lottery when the reserved memory that becomes the super reach and the reserved memory that the hit / fail judgment result becomes a big hit are stored in the stored eight reserved symbols. Will be done.

In the eight-piece hold effect, the player is notified by characters using the eight hold symbols. Specifically, when the characters "Big hit !!!" are displayed, it is notified that there is a hold memory in which the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit (it is confirmed that the big hit is made) among the eight hold memories. doing. On the other hand, when the characters "Big hit !!!?" Are displayed, there is a possibility that the hold memory that becomes the big hit is stored in the eight hold memories (the big hit is among the eight hold memories). It is uncertain that the reserved memory is stored).

With this configuration, when the player presses the frame button 22 once after displaying the eight notification hold symbols, the leftmost notification hold symbol is variably displayed as "large". Will be done. When this character is displayed, the player first expects the character "big hit" and then presses the frame button 22. Here, when "this" is displayed, it is expected that the frame button 22 is pressed next and the character "ri" is displayed. In this way, the seven notification pending symbols are variably displayed, and when the characters "Big hit !!!" are displayed, the last remaining notification pending symbol (the rightmost reserved symbol) is "! Expectations for a big hit are high that it may be changed to. After that, when the player operates the frame button 22, the player can determine the notification result. In this way, in the eight-piece hold effect, each time the frame button 22 is pressed, the game can be performed while expecting the characters to be displayed next, and the player can be entertained.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the reserved balls are digested and start to fluctuate, the remaining notification reserved symbols changed by the eight effects are maintained and displayed, so that the player can display the remaining notification pending symbols. It is possible to predict what kind of character (notification mode) was set from the character.

In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the effect that is advantageous to the player is executed by storing eight holds, so that the player can play the game so that the hold balls are more memorized. Can be done. Specifically, when a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time such as super reach (high expectation for a jackpot) is selected, the player may stop firing the game ball and play the game. However, during that period, it is also a period in which the reserved balls are likely to accumulate, so it is possible for the player to play the game without stopping the launch of the game balls so that eight productions will be executed even if the balls are missed. it can.

Further, for a certain period of time after the eight effects are executed, the eight effects may be executed when the eight reserved balls are stored. With this configuration, the player can be made to continue to shoot the game ball in order to generate a more reserved ball.

Further, the notification mode (displayed characters) determined at the timing when the eight effects are executed may be configured to be changed according to the determination result when a new holding ball is generated. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of the player deciding the timing of changing the notification hold symbol.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 44, the composite display effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described. In the composite display effect, when the reach display mode is adopted, after the main symbol that is out of the middle symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the sub symbol (blank symbol "△") is variably displayed as a "push" symbol. After that, the "push" symbol moves to the center of the third symbol display device 81, and is combined and variably displayed as a large "push" symbol. After that, when the player presses the frame button 22, the combination of the main symbols indicating the winning / failing determination result is displayed again. Specifically, if the hit / fail determination result is a hit, it is displayed in a combination indicating a big hit such as "777". On the other hand, if it is off, it is displayed with a symbol such as "717" indicating the off.

FIG. 43A shows a state in which the variation pattern of the composite display mode is displayed, the reach display mode is the “7” symbol, and the middle symbol is variablely displayed. Except for the variation pattern of the composite display mode, when the reach is reached, the middle symbol is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed) beyond the reach symbol. That is, the reach symbol once passes through the effective line of reach and is scrolled and displayed. However, in the variation pattern of the composite display mode, the reach symbol is set so as to temporarily stop before the effective line of the reach. That is, the reach period is set shorter than the normal reach display mode.

As shown in FIG. 43 (b), after the "5" symbol before the reach symbol stops at the reach effective line, the sub symbol arranged between the main symbol in the left symbol row and the right symbol row 3 seconds later. The symbol (blank symbol “Δ”) is variably displayed as a notification symbol of a small “push” symbol. Among the variation patterns of the composite display mode, the variation pattern of the pseudo-synthesis display mode is configured so as not to change from the case where the notification symbol is changed to the composite display mode. In this case, by pressing the frame button 22, an effect of re-variating the stopped middle symbol "5" symbol is executed.

On the other hand, in the variation pattern variable to the composite display mode, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the "push" symbol is displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81, and the "5" symbol in the middle symbol sequence is displayed. It is displayed by moving toward. After that, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the “5” symbol is covered and a large “push” symbol is displayed. Since the variation pattern of the synthetic display mode in which this large "push" symbol is displayed is configured to be extremely easy to be selected when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, the player can display this synthetic display mode. , You can have high expectations for big hits.

Next, the time effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48. The time effect is changed to a preset dedicated background image for a predetermined time (5 minutes in this embodiment) at regular time intervals (fixed period) after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. It is an effect mode to be executed. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a timekeeping means 292 composed of an RTC (real-time clock) and an internal power source (battery in the present embodiment) dedicated to the timekeeping means 292. Timekeeping can be continued even when it is not supplied. Here, when manufacturing the pachinko machine 10, by setting the same time (for example, the current time) in the timing means and manufacturing the pachinko machine 10, the power is supplied to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time. , The same input time information can be acquired between the pachinko machines 10. With this configuration, the time effect can be executed synchronously among the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing the timing of executing the time effect period. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the current time information is measured by the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214) in the start-up process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later. Obtained from. Based on the acquired time information, the time effect period (effect mode B) is set when 55 minutes have elapsed. The normal game machine period (effect mode A) is set until the time effect period is set. The time production period is usually set to 5 minutes, and when this 5 minutes elapses, the normal game period is set.

Here, when 5 minutes of the time production period elapses, it is determined whether or not a hold memory stored at that time or a special symbol that is changing and the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit is set, and the big hit is obtained. If a thing is set, the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set by the time until the fluctuation ends.

FIG. 46A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the time effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining time in the time effect period is 180 seconds. During the time production period, the background image is a display mode in which a dedicated school of fish is displayed.

FIG. 46B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining time in the time effect period is 3 seconds. In the example of FIG. 46B, the actual third symbol is reduced and displayed in a variable manner in the lower right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the effect symbol similar to that of the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the deviation. In this case, the effect symbol is displayed with a slight shaking to notify that the display is not completely stopped. In this way, it is rare that the end timing of the time production period and the fluctuation stop timing of the third symbol match, but by switching to the production symbol and displaying it, it is possible to make the third symbol appear as if it was stopped. , It is possible to make it seem as if the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the same timing as the other pachinko machines 10. The effect symbol is also displayed when the stop timing of the third symbol coincides with the time effect period. With such a configuration, the display mode at the end of the time production period becomes constant, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

When the effect symbol is stopped and displayed 3 seconds before the remaining period, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), a precursor display mode in which the effect symbol is slightly quivered and displayed for the remaining 3 seconds is displayed. Then, after the characters "super fish school time" indicating that it is a time production period, a notification mode, which is the timing of the division of whether or not to be extended, is displayed. After that, when the time production extension period is set, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the characters "Super fish school time extension !!" are displayed to notify that the time production period has been extended, and the background image of the fish school is displayed. Is displayed again. In this case, the effect symbol starts to change and display at the same time as the extension starts, and the player is notified that the change of the new special symbol has started. Further, since the extension period is a period until the end of the variable display which is a big hit, the remaining time (115 seconds in the example of FIG. 47B) is displayed for that period.

In the present embodiment, when the time effect period is extended, the time effect is extended because the hold storage that is a big hit is set or the change has already started (during change). This means that the player 4a will be notified of the big hit. Here, during the time effect period, the same effect is executed synchronously between the same pachinko machines 10, and an effect (see FIG. 47 (a)) indicating whether or not the extension period is set at the same timing is displayed. Will be done. As a result, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 10 for which the extension period is set will be a big hit from other players, and the gambling spirit of the other players can be fueled.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48, when the extended effect is not set, the characters "Super fish school time is over !!" are displayed to notify that the time effect period has ended. After that, when the third symbol is changing, the effect symbol is displayed with the same time variation as the remaining variation time of the third symbol, and then stopped. From the next variation, the reduced display of the third symbol is canceled, and the third symbol is variablely displayed in the normal size. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player even when the time production period ends. On the other hand, when the timing at which the third symbol is stopped and displayed matches the end timing of the time effect period, the reduced display of the third symbol is canceled and displayed from the start of the next fluctuation.

If the fluctuation has already ended at the end timing of the time effect period and the hold memory is not stored, the precursor effect is not executed.

In the present embodiment, the condition for setting the extension is a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a hold memory in which a fluctuation pattern to be a super reach is selected may be set. It may be configured to be set when a lottery is executed and a winning result is obtained.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 fluctuates by indicating whether or not the lottery of ordinary symbols performed as the ball passes through the through gate 67 is being executed by the lighting state, and stops after the fluctuation ends. As a symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, a variable display that alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the second symbol is displayed. Will be done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 operates for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of balls at the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, as in the case of the 1st winning opening 64 and the 2nd winning opening 640, but is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. The number of times (for example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 and a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can enter are arranged. When a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, the first entry opening switch and the second entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. Due to the turning on of the first ball entry switch and the second ball entry switch, the main control device 110 draws a lottery for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, and the display according to the lottery result is the first symbol display device 37. It is indicated by LED37a of. Further, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are entered is the same, but the number of prize balls may be different. For example, when the ball is entered in the first prize opening 64, the number of prize balls for the second winning opening 640 is set as three prize balls, and when the ball is entered in the second winning opening 640, the number of prize balls is set as four prize balls. It may be set more than the number of prize balls for one winning opening 64.

On the other hand, when the number of prize balls of the second prize opening 640 is set smaller than that of the first winning opening 64, it is possible to design so that more game balls are won in the second winning opening 640 during the probability variation period or the time reduction. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be maintained at a larger number, and an efficient game can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the game time during the probabilistic change period during the time reduction, and it is possible to increase the sales on the game store side.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the second winning opening 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (16 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 49) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 49). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for the fluctuation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 67). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a composed of four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and a reserved ball of the special symbol 2. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) is provided, and a special symbol holding ball execution area common to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is provided. It is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64, respectively. Similarly, in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second winning opening 640.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball passes through each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the gate 67.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 57).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is generated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first is special. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the probability is high, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first is The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the present embodiment, two types of jackpots, "big hit A" and "big hit B", are set, and either "big hit A" or "big hit B" is set by the first hit type counter C2. Is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are three random number values that are big hits of the special symbol when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the random number values "7,107,282" are the special symbols for the low probability. It is stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/100".

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 30 random numbers that are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the values are "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106, 112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. It is stored in. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 30 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/10".

In this embodiment, a random number value that becomes a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and a random number value that becomes a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. So, the random number values that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2 set in the jackpot type selection table (not shown), when the random number value is "0 to 59", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (see FIG. 52 (b)). The table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 67) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Has been done.

In the variation pattern selection table 202d, variation pattern selection tables for selecting a variation pattern dedicated to the special symbol 1 are set for each game state (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variation game state). Although the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later, will be described in more detail, the main control device 110 is based on the hit / fail determination result, the number of reserved balls, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, the content of the rough fluctuation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the fluctuation time are determined, and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 20 at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol is normal. It is determined to be a hit. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is a normal hit.

By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the second winning opening 640 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of the game ball by the player and increase the profit on the side of the game store by focusing on entering the ball into the first winning opening 64. On the other hand, during the time reduction and the probability change period, which have a high probability, the chance of the electric accessory 640a operating can be given with a probability of "1 / 1.2", and the chance of entering the second winning opening 640 is increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the game ball of the player and set the game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game aiming at the game with a high probability, and can play the game for a longer time.

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ) Is displayed with the "○" symbol lit. Then, if the value of the random number counter C4 per second is "5 to 20", the second winning opening 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal hit. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 53 (a)) for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the release period of the second winning opening 640 is further. Is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only for "2 seconds x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 67).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 50, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 67) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 65) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number. It has a counter 203d, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a time saving medium counter 203g, a probability change flag 203h, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol 1 and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first execution area. Each value of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the special symbol 2.

The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 61). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S307 in FIG. 60).

The value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command. The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning the second winning opening 640, and the other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. A detailed description will be omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S704 in FIG. 64). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 63).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 64). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (Fig.). 64 S703: No).

The time saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a new value is set according to the big hit type regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g.

The probability variation flag 203h is a flag indicating that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The probability variation flag 203h is set to on when the probability variation game state is set as the gaming state. This probability variation flag 203h is set to off when the jackpot B is won. It is set to off in the initialized state.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of a specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including switch groups and sensor groups (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 65) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 53A, the variation pattern selection table 222a is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, as shown in FIG. 53B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and a normal symbol reserved ball. Number counter 223d, fluctuation start flag 223e, stop type selection flag 223f, effect counter 223g, hold effect flag 223h, eight effect flags 223i, set time storage area 223j, effect mode storage area 223k, normal period flag 223m, start period flag At least 223o, an extension effect flag 223p, an extension effect time storage area 223q, a button effect flag 223r, a button effect counter 223s, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a is an area in which the winning information is stored corresponding to the reserved ball based on the winning command output from the main control device 110. As the winning information, various information such as a winning / failing judgment result, a fluctuation pattern, and a stop type are set.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a storage area in which the reserved ball number of the special symbol 1 is stored based on the reserved ball command. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is a storage area in which the reserved ball number of the special symbol 2 is stored based on the reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is a storage area in which the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is stored based on the reserved ball command.

The fluctuation start flag 223e is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the fluctuation of the third symbol.

The stop type selection flag 223f is a flag indicating the stop type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the stop type command output from the main control device 110.

The effect counter 223 g is a counter used in the voice lamp control device 113 for determining various effects, details of fluctuation patterns, various lottery, and the like. The effect counter 223h is repeatedly updated in the main process in the range of 0 to 198.

The hold effect flag 223h is a flag indicating that the hold effect is normally executed. Normally, the hold effect is set to be turned on, and the hold symbol is set to off based on the timing when the fluctuation starts.

The eight effect flags 223i are flags indicating that eight effects are being executed. It is set on based on the decision that 8 effects are executed, and is turned off based on the timing when the 8th reserved symbol displayed when 8 effects are executed starts to change. This is the flag set to.

The set time storage area 223i is a storage area in which time information for executing the time effect period is stored. In the set time storage area 223i, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214) in the start-up process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 113 of the voice lamp control device 113). In S1222 of the above, information on the time production period is set for 24 hours.

The effect mode storage area 223k is a storage area in which information related to the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C is stored (set). In the production mode, if the current production mode is the normal game period (outside the time production period), the production mode A is stored, if it is the time production period, the production mode B is stored, and if it is the extended time production period, the production mode is stored. Mode C is stored.

The normal period flag 223m is a flag indicating that the normal game period is started. When the normal period flag 223m is set to ON, the background image is changed from the time effect period or the extended time effect period to the background image corresponding to the normal game period. In that case, after the background image shown in FIG. 48 is displayed, the background image showing the normal game period is displayed.

The start period flag 223o is a flag indicating that the time production period is started. When this time effect period is set to ON, a background image (see FIG. 46 (a)) of the super fish school indicating that the time effect period is set is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The extension effect flag 223p is a flag indicating that the time effect extension period is started. When this time effect extension period is set, a background image showing the time effect extension period shown in FIG. 47 (b) is set.

The extended effect time storage area 223q is a storage area in which when the time effect extension period is set, the time until the end of the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is calculated, and the information indicating the time is stored. Based on the value of the extended effect time storage area 223q, the remaining time of the time effect extension period is displayed.

The button effect flag 223r is a flag indicating that a variation pattern for executing the button effect is selected. It is determined by this flag that the button effect is executed.

The button effect counter 223s is a counter for selecting a display mode of the button effect.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 71) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 65).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 84) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 57) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 85B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 83).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (not shown). 3 Displayed on the symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. Medium, alternate and repeat display. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 40) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball is entered into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the variation is caused in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the production is not started immediately.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal pattern, and the ball becomes the second winning opening. The easier it is to enter 640, the more prize balls. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even when the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table.

When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) depending on this back type, the player of the background The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the back type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 55) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 57) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 56). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 56).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In addition, in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 56, in the example of FIG. 56, In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 57) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 56, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display an image at power-on (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) on the third symbol display device 81 (not shown). The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 83) (see S2005 in FIG. 83). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3605 in FIG. 95 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 85 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 85B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 85B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 85 (b) see S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 86 to 91) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 92 to 94) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3501 in FIG. 95 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 96) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 57), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 57) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 57) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 85 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3105 in FIG. 70B) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 57) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 57, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Character (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites by overwriting in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 85 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3107 in FIG. 69). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3713 in FIG. 96). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 96). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 97).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 85 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S3802 of FIG. 97).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 58 to 67. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are explained first, and then started up. The processing and the main processing will be described.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 299, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S203). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S204). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the stop type selection counter C3 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation is determined. If the time has not elapsed (S204: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S204: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S205). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S203) described later with reference to FIG. 60. When this special symbol change start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area commonly provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , A lottery of special symbols will be held. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the second hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S205 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S206). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S206: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot is among the two types of jackpots of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot B) (S207), and the jackpot type. If is a jackpot B, 100 is set in the time saving medium counter 203g of the RAM 203 (S209). After that, the process of S210 is executed. If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability of the probability variation period (S208). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S210), and this process ends.

In the processing of S206, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S206: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (S211), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1. If the above is the case (S211: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S212), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 (S211: No), the processing of S212 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special symbol variation start processing (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S203). This special symbol variation start process (S203) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 59) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and includes the special symbol retention 1 retaining ball storage area 203a. Special symbol 2 Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with the reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing (S203), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e (the number of reserved balls N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired. (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S302), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S302: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S303), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S304). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store.

After the hold ball number command is set by the process of S304, the data stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball number area 203b is shifted (S305). In the process of S305, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After the process of S305 is executed, the process of acquiring the data of the execution area in the special symbol reserved ball number storage area is executed (S310).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S302 that the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 (S302: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d acquired in the processing of S301. It is determined whether (N1) is 0 (S306). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S306: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S306, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S306: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1. Then (S307), a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S308). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S308, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S309). In the process of S309, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the values of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are acquired. (S310).

Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S311). The determination of whether or not the period is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag (not shown) is on. This probability variation flag is set to on based on the end of the jackpot game based on jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the probabilistic change is in progress (S311: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to S312. In the process of S312, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S310 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability ( S312). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 30 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, as the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106,112,122,134,140,151,168" , 176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 ", and the value of the first random number counter C1 and these hits If it matches the random number value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S314.

On the other hand, in the process of S311 when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (S311: No), the process of S313 is executed. In the process of S313, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S310 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time ( S313). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 3 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability one by one. Three random numbers "7,107,282" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values to be hits match. , Judged as a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S314.

In the process of S314, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S312 or S313 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S314), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S314: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the second hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S310 (S315). More specifically, the value of the second hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S310 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the jackpots of the two types of special symbols (big hit A, Of the jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined that the jackpot is A (16R jackpot, the probability variation period from the jackpot game to the next jackpot), and "60 to If it is in the range of "99", it is determined that the jackpot is B (16R jackpot, 100 times in a short time period of a normal symbol).

In the process of S315, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S316). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S316, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation time is predetermined by a table or the like.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the result of the hit / fail determination. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode is the off-reach, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode within the same fluctuation time. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. ing. As the fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the process of S314, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S314: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S317). In the process of S317, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S318). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S317, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is performed based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time.

Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S316 or the process of S318 is set (S319). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the stop type selection counter C3 set in the process of S316 or S318 is set (S320). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 67). To. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S320 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and if there is a starting winning, This is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, the reserved ball number command of the special symbol 1 indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the second hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. Special symbol 1 The reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, with respect to S407 to S411, for each of the processes S401 to S406 described above, the process for winning the first winning opening 64 is only changed to the processing for winning the second winning opening 640. Since the same processing is executed, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when a game ball wins in the second winning opening 640, even if it is stored as a reserved ball, each value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the second hit type counter C2 is acquired, and the corresponding special The symbol 2 is stored in the empty hold area of the hold ball storage area 203b.

In this way, by acquiring the values of the first random number counter C1 and the second hit type counter C2 similar to the special symbol 1 for the special symbol 2 based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Since the lottery can be executed using a common random number for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the winning probability can be made constant for both the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

After executing the process of S411, the look-ahead process is executed (S412). The details of the look-ahead process (S412) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 62, but are based on the values of various counters acquired for the entry into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Then, a process of determining in advance each lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the stop type selection counter C3) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the counter related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the hit / miss judgment can be obtained later, and the amount of data to be stored can be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game. It can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a look-ahead process (S412), which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S412).

In the look-ahead process (FIG. 62, S412), first, based on the acquired value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail judgment at the start of fluctuation is a big hit (S501). The hit / fail judgment at the start of fluctuation indicates whether the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is the normal gaming state (low probability) or the probabilistic gaming state (high probability gaming state). 203a, special symbol 2 The value of each counter stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is variable and displayed, and the value is determined by the hit / fail judgment and the hit type. When it is determined that the determination result is a big hit (S501: Yes), a winning command indicating a big hit is set (S502). On the other hand, in the process of S501, if the determination result is not a big hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not it is out of super reach (S503). If it is determined in the process of S503 that it is out of super reach (S503: Yes), a winning command indicating that it is out of super reach is set (S504). On the other hand, in the process of S503, when it is determined that it is not out of super reach (S503: No), a winning command indicating that it is out of order is set (S505). In this way, the result of the hit / fail determination in advance before the start of fluctuation is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can be used. The hit / fail judgment result and the hit type can be recognized in advance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 may change the color of the reserved symbol to a color that notifies the winning / failing judgment result in advance based on the winning command to notify the player of the winning / failing judgment result for the reserved ball. , An effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the hit / fail determination result in the reserved ball) can be executed. Further, as the winning command, one winning command is output for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 63. This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor associated with the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the second symbol, the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is being performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the second symbol is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the second symbol is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is determined. If is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether the time is shortened (S608), and if the time is not shortened (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. On the other hand, in the case of the time saving state (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the jackpot (S609). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed.

In the process of S609, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S609: No), the process proceeds to the process of S610. In the process of S609, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S610.

If the probability change or the time reduction is in progress (that is, the time reduction state) (S609: Yes), and if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol (S609: No), the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 Based on the value and the normal hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 52 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the ordinary random number table 202c (see FIG. 52C) for high probability.

In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the normal hit random number table 202c for probability time (see FIG. 52 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 52 (c)) for low probability.

In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball trying to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second winning opening 640, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second winning opening 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the second winning opening Many balls enter the 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second winning opening 640 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the second symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the second symbol (S612: Yes), the display mode at the time of hitting is set (S613). Next, it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (S614).

Then, in the process of S614, when it is determined that the time is shortened (S614: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S615: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 1 second, and the number of times of opening is set to 2. Then (S616), the process proceeds to S619.

If it is determined in the process of S614 that the time is not shortened (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the second symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set. While setting it to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the second symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (S619), and if the time is shortened (S619: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S619). S620), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the process of S619 is not in the time saving state (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the probability of the second symbol is high, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the second symbol. Further, since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640.

On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 67) is executed next, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 67) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if the ball has passed, the second hit. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S703). : No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area. To finish.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 67, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 58) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 61) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning processing and the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 62) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 63), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S613 of FIG. 63 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S316 or the process of S318 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 60), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed on the first symbol. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S315 or the process of S317 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 60) ends, the first symbol display device The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S315 or the process of S317 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 60) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 63), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 63), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. Stop display (lighting display) of the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 63) after ending the variable display. To do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the initial time is reached within the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the first hit). The initial value of the random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the stop type selection counter C3 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 65 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 82, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1320 (see FIG. 70) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 70, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S1317 in FIG. 70), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S1320. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1320 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1320 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1320 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data shifts to S1208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1320, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1320 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 70). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1320 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1320 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1208 goes through the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main process. After that, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1212).

It should be noted that the clearing process of S1209 is skipped because when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

In the process of S1214, the time setting process is executed (S1214). The time setting process (S1214) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 69.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a time setting process (S1214), which is one of the start-up processes (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S1214). In the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214), the setting of the setting switch 291 is determined to determine whether or not to execute the time effect, and if the setting is to execute the time effect, the time information is acquired from the RTC292. Then, based on the time information, the process of setting the time effect period to the set time storage area 223j is executed.

In the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214), first, time information is acquired from RTC292 (S1221). As the time information acquired here, the values of "hours and minutes" are acquired. The RTC292 is a timekeeping means having a battery inside, and when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years of operating time. The RTC292 also has a calendar function, and has a configuration in which the "date" can be determined. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to control to change to a background image dedicated to Christmas or to display a special character such as Santa.

Next, based on the acquired time information, the preparation period and the time production period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223j (S1222).

In the present embodiment, the preparation period and the time production period for 24 hours are calculated based on the acquired time information and set in the set time storage area 223j. 54 minutes for executing the game may be set in, the period may be measured by countdown, countup, or the like, and the preparation period may be set based on the elapse of 54 minutes. In addition to that, the time after 54 minutes may be set, and the time for the next period may be set when the time is reached. With this configuration, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), 1 millisecond. If the above has not passed (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1311. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S1302 to S1311 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1312, the variation display setting process of S1313, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1301: Yes). S1302). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. The frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 80.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and further, the background image setting process is executed (S1311). After that, the process proceeds to S1312. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1312, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1312). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71. After the processing of this command determination processing (FIG. 71, S1312) is executed, the variation display setting processing is executed (S1313). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

When the process of S1313 is completed, the process of the synchronous effect management process (S1314) is executed. The details of the synchronous effect management process (S1314) will be described later with reference to FIG. 77.

When the processing of S1314 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1319), and the power-off process is executed (S1320). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1321), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1318), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1318: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1318: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1312). This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223e is turned on (S1402), and the data in the corresponding winning information storage area is shifted (S1403). After that, the advance notice selection process is executed (S1404), and the process proceeds to S1419.

Here, the details of this advance notice selection process (S1404) will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this advance notice selection process (S1404).

In the advance notice selection process (S1404), first, the value of the effect counter 223 g is acquired (S1501). It is determined whether or not the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223k is the effect mode A (S1502). When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1502: Yes), the normal advance notice effect is selected based on the result of the hit / fail determination and the value of the effect counter 223 g (S1503). After that, a display notice command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S1504).

On the other hand, in the process of S1502, when the effect mode A is not set (S1502: No), it is determined whether the effect mode C is set (S1505). When the effect mode C is set (S1505: Yes), when the result of the hit / fail judgment is correct, the display indicates the notice of the super fish school in which the school of fish flows from right to left on the third symbol display device 81. A notice command is set (S1507).

On the other hand, when the effect mode C is not set in the process of S1505 (S1505: No), or when the hit / fail determination result is not hit in the process of S1506 (S1506: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, it is possible to switch and configure the display notice command to be set based on the set effect mode. Further, since the advance notice effect is also determined based on the hit / fail determination result and the value of the effect counter 223 g at the start of the fluctuation, there is no need to perform a process of determining and selecting the display start timing, etc., and the control load is reduced. be able to. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing for displaying the notice is predetermined according to the fluctuation pattern, and by setting the display notice display command indicating the timing, the display control device 114 displays at that timing. Is set to be done.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 71. After the advance notice selection process (FIG. 72, S1404) is executed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. When it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1405). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 74) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), each reserved ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are received. The number of reserved balls is set in (S1409).

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by S1407. Can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the starting prize or drawing the special symbol. Can be modified to match the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the process of S1407 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1408: No), then it is determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1410). Then, when the winning command is received (S1410: Yes), the winning command receiving process is executed (S1411). After that, processing corresponding to other commands is executed (S1419), and the process returns to the main processing. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), the main control device 110 acquires each value of each counter C1 to C3, and the value thereof is acquired. Each value of each of the acquired counters C1 to C3 is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number storage area 203b, respectively. Further, as soon as the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired in the main control device 110, the original values of the acquired counters C1 to C3 are selected separately from the original jackpot lottery of the special symbol. Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

Here, the winning command receiving process (S1411), which is a process in the command determination process (FIG. 71, S1312), will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process (S1411). In the winning command receiving process, first, data is set in the winning information storage area corresponding to the received winning command (S1511), and the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired (S1512). Next, it is determined whether or not the eight effect flags 223i are on (S1513). When the eight effect flags 223i are on (S1514: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when the eight effect flags 223i are not turned on, is the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c 8 (that is, with the first special symbol)? Whether the number of reserved balls with the second special symbol is the maximum value) is determined (S1514).

When the number of reserved balls is 8 (S1514: Yes), based on the effect counter 223 g, an 8 effect lottery is executed as to whether or not to perform the notice display mode executed for the 8 reserved balls (S1514: Yes). S1519). Here, in the eight effect lottery, it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223 g (counter updated in the range of 0 to 198) acquired in the process of S1512 is any of "0 to 49".

When the result of the eight-piece effect lottery is to execute the eight-piece effect (S1520: Yes), the eight-piece effect flag 223i is turned on and the eight-piece effect is set (S1522). On the other hand, if the result of the eight-piece effect lottery does not execute the eight-piece effect (S1520: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1514, when the number of reserved effects is not eight (S1514: No), the normal reserved effect is selected based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g (S1515), and whether or not there is a change in the reserved effect Determine (S1516). Here, when the received winning command is a hit, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 99", the normal hold effect (the display mode of the hold symbol corresponding to the received prize command is shown in FIG. 41 (a). ) Is selected (changed to a symbol displayed as PUSH), and in other cases, the normal hold effect is not selected (that is, there is no change in the hold effect (display mode of the hold symbol)).

When there is a change in the hold effect (S1516: Yes), the corresponding hold effect flag 223h is set to on (S1517), and the selected normal hold effect is set (S1518). On the other hand, if there is no change in the hold effect (S1516: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. In the process of S1410, if it is determined that the winning command of the special symbol has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. Then (S1419), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold effect displayed is set to be different depending on the difference in the number of holds. When the number of holds reaches the maximum value, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), an effect mode different from that of the normal hold effect (see FIG. 41 (a)) is displayed, so that the player tries to increase the number of holds as much as possible. You can play games with motivation.

Further, as will be described later, in the normal hold effect, the frame button 22 is operated to change the hold symbol that notifies the winning / failing determination result corresponding to the changed hold symbol. Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the star symbol is displayed, and when the selected fluctuation pattern is super reach, the triangle symbol is variably displayed by pressing the frame button 22. To. Further, in the eight-piece effect, the notification mode is determined based on the hit / fail determination result for any of the eight reserved symbols and the type of the variation pattern among the displayed eight reserved symbols. For example, a hold that is a big hit is stored, and as a notification mode based on the hold, when the frame button 22 is pressed for each of the eight PUSH symbols to make them variable and displayed, as shown in FIG. 42 (b). The characters "Big hit !!!" are displayed. FIG. 42B shows a state in which up to the second PUSH symbol is variably displayed.

In the present embodiment, for the eight effects, when it is determined to execute the eight effects, the effect mode displayed according to the hit / fail determination result in the set hold storage and the selected variation pattern type. However, it is not limited to this, and based on the fact that the number of reserved pieces is 8, it is decided whether or not to execute the 8 effect, and when it is decided to execute the 8 effect. Displays the reserved symbol display in a variable manner as shown in FIG. 42 (a). When the hold memory in which the hit / fail determination result is a big hit is set in the hold memory, the notification mode (for example, "big hit !!!") indicating the big hit is set. On the other hand, when the hold on which the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit is not stored, a notification mode for expecting a big hit (for example, "big hit decision ???") is set, and the frame button 22 is pressed. If the reserved ball is digested and a new reserved ball is stored before, the notification mode set according to the hit / fail determination result of the reserved ball may be changed and set. In this case, if the hit / fail judgment result of the newly established reserved ball is a big hit, the notification mode is configured to newly set a notification mode (for example, a big hit decision !!) that suggests a big hit. May be good. As a result, the player can enjoy the pleasure of determining the timing of pressing the frame button 22.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1313). This variation display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 74, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1601). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1601: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1605 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S1601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned off (S1602), and then the fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S1603). The details of the fluctuation pattern selection process (S1603) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 75, but the details of the fluctuation pattern are determined according to the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 based on the current effect mode. The process to be executed is executed. Regarding the selection of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 determines the rough contents such as the fluctuation time and the fluctuation type (reach, non-reach, etc.), and the effect mode set by the voice lamp control device 113. The content of the variation mode (details of the variation pattern) to be actually displayed is determined by the value of the effect counter and the like.

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1604). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1605.

In the process of S1605, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223f provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1605). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is not on (that is, it is off) (S1605: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S1605: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is turned off (S1606), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is set from the RAM 223. Acquire (S1607). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1608), and the process proceeds to S1609.

In the process of S1609, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1609). .. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of S1609 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the variation pattern selection process (S1603), which is one of the variation display setting processes (FIGS. 74 and S1313) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the contents of this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1603).

In the variation pattern selection process (S1603), first, the value of the effect counter 223 g is acquired (S1611). It is determined whether or not the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223k (S1612). When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1612: Yes), the button effect selection process is executed (S1613). After that, this process ends. The button effect selection process (S1613) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 75, but a process of selecting a variation pattern dedicated to the normal game period is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that the effect mode is not A (S1612: No), it is determined whether the effect mode B (time effect period) is set (S1614). When it is determined that the effect mode B is set (S1614: Yes), the variation pattern is displayed from the variation pattern selection table 222a of the corresponding time effect period based on the value of the effect counter 223g and the content of the variation pattern command. Select and set (S1615). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1614, when it is determined that the effect mode is not B, that is, the effect mode C (time effect extension period) (S1614: No), the variation pattern selection table 222a of the corresponding time effect extension period is used. A variation pattern is selected and set based on the effect counter 223g and the content of the received variation pattern command (S1616). After that, this process ends.

In this way, since the dedicated fluctuation pattern is selected based on the set effect mode, the effect content displayed can be changed depending on the period. Therefore, the production of the game can be diversified, and the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a button effect selection process (S1613), which is one process in the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 75, S1603) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button effect selection process (S1613).

In the button effect selection process (FIG. 76, S1613), first, a variation pattern is selected from the corresponding variation pattern selection table 222a dedicated to the normal game period based on the value of the effect counter 223g and the content of the received variation pattern command. Set (S1621). It is determined whether the selected fluctuation pattern is a button effect (variation pattern of the composite display mode). When it is determined that the pattern is a variation pattern of the composite display mode (see FIG. 43) (S1622: Yes), a stop symbol for button effect is set as the reach stop symbol (S1623). Here, the sub-design is set to have a reach display mode in which the sub-symbols are in diagonal positions. The button effect flag 223r is set to on (S1624). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1622, when it is determined that the selected variation pattern is not the variation pattern of the composite display mode (S1622: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the synchronous effect management process (S1314), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1314). In this synchronous effect management process (S1314), time information is acquired from RTC292, and based on the time information, it is determined whether it is a normal game period, a time effect period, or a time effect extension period, and an effect indicating that is indicated. Execute the process to set the mode.

In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 77, S1314), first, the time information of "hours and minutes" is acquired from RTC292 (S1701). It is determined whether or not the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223k (S1702). When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1701 is within the time effect period (S1703). When it is determined that it is within the time effect period, that is, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the time effect (S1703: Yes), the start period flag 223o is set to ON (S1704). The effect mode B (time effect period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223k (S1705), and then this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1703 that it is not the time effect period, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1702, when it is determined that the effect mode A is not set (S1702: No), it is determined whether the effect mode B (time effect period) is set (S1706). When it is determined that the effect mode B is set (S1706: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S1701 is 3 seconds before the end of the time effect, that is, 3 of the end timing of the time effect period. It is determined whether it is a second ago (S1707). With this configuration, it is possible to execute a precursory effect of whether or not to execute the extended effect for 3 seconds.

When it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (S1707: Yes), the extension effect setting process is executed (S1708). After that, this process ends. The extension effect setting process (S1708) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 78, but a process of whether or not to set the time effect extension period is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the effect mode B, that is, the effect mode C (time effect extension period) (S1706: No), it is outside the time effect extension period, that is, the end timing of the time effect extension period. Is determined (S1709). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect extension period (S1709: Yes), the effect mode is set to A (S1710). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the extension effect setting process (S1708), which is one of the processes in the synchronous effect management process (FIGS. 77, S1314) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the contents of this extension effect setting process (S1708).

In the extension effect setting process (FIG. 78, S1708), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S1721). When it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S1721: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S1722), and the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S1723). After that, this process ends.

In this way, when the jackpot game is in progress, the extension effect cannot be executed. Therefore, by executing the process of setting the normal game period, the background image of the normal game period is set after the jackpot game. Can be controlled as

On the other hand, in the process of S1721 when it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1721: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the time production period (S1724). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (S1724: Yes), it is determined whether the revariation effect is set in the process of S1728 described later, that is, whether the extension effect is determined to be set. (S1725). When the extension effect is determined (S1725: Yes), the extension effect flag 223p is set to on (S1725). The effect mode is set to C (S1727). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the extension effect has not been determined in the process of S1725 (S1725: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1722. Further, in the processing of S1724, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the time production (S1724: No), the winning information corresponding to the winning information storage area 223a is stored, or the winning / failing determination during the fluctuation is a winning. It is determined whether or not there is (S1728). If the winning information is stored, or if the winning / failing judgment during the fluctuation is a winning (S1728: Yes), the time until the winning fluctuation is completed is calculated and set as the extended production time. (S1729). A re-variation effect is set (S1730). Here, as the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), a display mode in which the display mode of the school of fish appears from the right is set. After the processing of S1730 is completed, this processing is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a hold quantity display update process (S1306), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. To do. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold quantity display update process (S1306).

In the hold quantity display update process (FIG. 79, S1306), first, it is determined whether it is necessary to change the display of the hold symbol (S1801). This determination is determined based on the hold command acquired from the main control unit 110. A display hold command indicating the changed hold symbol display is set (S1802). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1801, when it is determined that there is no change in the hold display (S1801: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 80, S1307), first, it is determined whether or not the valid period determined to be valid when the frame button 22 is pressed is set (S1811). When it is determined that the valid period is valid (S1811: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1812). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1812: Yes), it is determined whether or not the eight effect flags 223i are set to ON (S1813). When it is determined that the eight effect flags 223i are on (S1813: Yes), the corresponding hold eight effect flags 223i are set to off (S1814). The eight effect flags are configured so that the flags are set for each reserved ball, and the flag corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed after being changed to the notification reserved symbol is set to on. Further, the notification hold symbol is set to off based on the fact that the notification holding symbol is variably displayed in the notification mode (character display in the present embodiment) based on the operation of the frame button 22 (when it is displayed).

After the processing of S1814, among the reserved symbols in which the eight effect flags 223i are set to be on, the notification mode of the eight effects is set for the notification pending symbol having the earliest variation start order (S1815). .. After that, this process ends. It should be noted that this notification mode is set in advance when eight effects are set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is out of the valid period (S1811: No), or if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the process of S1812 (S1812: No), this process is terminated. To do.

Further, in the process of S1813, when it is determined that the eight effect flags 223i are off (S1813: No), it is determined whether the hold effect flag 223h is on (S1816). When it is determined that the hold effect flag 223h is on (S1816: Yes), the corresponding hold effect flag 223h is set to off (S1817). The normal hold effect of the corresponding hold is executed (S1816). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1816 that the hold effect flag 223h is off (S1816: No), the variation pattern of the composite display mode is being executed, so the button effect execution process is executed (S1816: No). S1819). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a button effect execution process, which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 80, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. (S1819) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button effect execution process (S1819). In this button effect execution process (S1819), control of the button effect in the variation pattern of the composite display mode shown in FIGS. 43 to 44 is executed.

In the button effect execution process (FIG. 81, S1819), first, it is determined whether or not the button effect flag 223r is on (S1831). The button effect flag 223r is a flag indicating that the variation pattern in which the composite display mode shown in FIG. 44B is displayed is selected. The variation pattern of the composite display mode also includes a fake variation pattern in which the composite display mode shown in FIG. 44 (b) is not displayed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the button effect flag 223r is on (S1831: Yes), it is determined whether the timing is after the composite display mode (see FIG. 44B) is displayed (S1832). When it is determined that the timing is after the composite display mode is displayed (S1832: Yes), a display command indicating the composite display mode corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S1843). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1831 that the button effect flag 223r is off (S1831: No), the timing of the variable display on the notification symbol before the composite display mode is displayed (FIG. 43 (b)). (See). (S1835). If it is determined that the timing is before the composite display (S1835: Yes), the button effect counter is incremented by 1 (S1836). A display command indicating a pre-synthesis effect mode (notification mode) is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern and the value of the button effect counter (S1837). After that, this process ends. Here, characters such as "chance" and characters are displayed to notify the player of the result of the winning / failing determination.

On the other hand, in the process of S1835, if it is determined that the pressing timing is not before the composite display mode is displayed, this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of button effects are set, but each flag is discriminated and controlled properly. With such a configuration, the number of frame buttons 22 can be not increased, and the configuration can be inexpensive and easy to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a background image setting process (S1311), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of the background image setting process (S1311).

In the background image setting process (FIG. 82, S1311), first, it is determined whether the extension effect flag 223p is on (S1901). When the extension effect flag 223p is on, that is, when it is the start timing of the extension effect (S1901: Yes), the extension effect flag 223p is set to off (S1902). A display background image command corresponding to the time effect extension period is set (S1903). In the present embodiment, a background image in which the color of the background image during the time effect period is changed to gold is set. This background image is a background image that notifies the player of the hit because the time effect period is extended, that is, it is determined that the fluctuation that becomes the hit is started. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1901 when it is determined that the extension effect flag 223p is off (S1901: No), it is determined whether the start period flag 223o is on (S1904). When it is determined that the start period flag is on (S1904: Yes), the start period flag 223o is set to off (S1905), and the display background change command corresponding to the time effect period is set (S1906). .. As described above, when the start period flag 223o is on, since it is the start timing of the time effect period, a background image dedicated to the time effect period (see FIG. 46A) is set. As a result, the background image can be changed according to the start timing, so that the background image can be changed in synchronization with other pachinko machines 10 of the same model.

On the other hand, in the process of S1904, when it is determined that the start period flag 223o is off (S1904: No), it is determined whether the normal period flag 223m is on (S1907). When it is determined that the normal period flag 223m is on (S1907: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to off (S1908), and the display background command corresponding to the normal period is set (S1909). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal period flag 223m is off (S1907: No), this process ends.

<Control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 97. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 83, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after designating the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND type flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 83) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) (S2105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 84, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2102 and S2102, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 83. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 95 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3402 in FIG. 95 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 47 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85 (b)). The determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 85 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 85 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the display variation pattern command is received, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on, which is not shown, can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period to perform a simple variation effect. it can. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2005, the interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (a). FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 57) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 85B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. Therefore, it is not the image at power-on shown in FIG. 47, but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 to 91.

In the display setting process (S2303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous warning command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), which are determined in the task process (S2304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 57 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. Then, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed to process S2304. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (FIG. 86, S2302), as shown in FIG. 86, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command, there is no unprocessed new command. (S2401: No), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. 87 (a). FIG. 87 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, the display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2501). Here, the display data table buffer 233d is configured so that a plurality of display data tables can be set, and it is possible to synchronize the set display data tables and shift the pointer for processing. Therefore, even when different displays are executed corresponding to a plurality of background modes, it is possible to switch to a plurality of display contents by actively setting and switching one of the plurality of display data table buffers.

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed in the display data table buffer. Set to 233d.

If the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). It is determined whether it is a variation pattern of the composite display mode (whether it is a variation pattern of the button effect) (S2503). When it is determined that the variation pattern of the composite display mode is (S2503: Yes), a reach symbol corresponding to the variation pattern of the composite display mode is set (S2504). After that, the process of S2505 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2503, when it is determined that the pattern does not change in the composite display mode (S2503: No), the process of S2505 is executed.

Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the set fluctuation display data table is turned on, and other fluctuation display data tables are displayed. The corresponding data table determination flag is set to off (S2505). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2506, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2506), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Initialize (S2507). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2508), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2508, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is changed to the pointer 233f. The drawing content specified at the indicated address is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the content is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S2505. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 in the image storage area of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2507, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 86. In the processing of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display variable type command (S2406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2407), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. 87 (b). FIG. 87B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, before big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2601), and the stop type table and V interrupt processing are performed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set by comparing with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time (see FIG. 85B) is executed. (S2602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S2603). After that, the process returns to the process of S2401 in FIG.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). When it is determined that the display notice command has been received (S2408: Yes), the notice command process is executed (S2409).

Here, the details of the advance notice command processing (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notice command processing (FIG. S2409).

In the advance notice command processing, first, the display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2701). Here, the display data table buffer 233d is configured so that a plurality of display data tables can be set, and it is possible to synchronize the set display data tables and shift the pointer for processing. Therefore, even when different displays are executed corresponding to a plurality of background modes, it is possible to switch to a plurality of display contents by actively setting and switching one of the plurality of display data table buffers.

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed in the display data table buffer. Set to 233d.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, among the data table discrimination flags of the variable display data table corresponding to each notice pattern, the set data table discrimination flag is turned on, and the other data table discrimination flags are set to off (S2703). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2703, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Initialize (S2705). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2706), the advance notice command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 86. If it is determined in the processing of S2408 that there is no display advance notice command (S2408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display hold command among the unprocessed commands. If it is determined that the display hold command has been received (S2410: Yes), the hold command process is executed.

Here, the pending command processing (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the contents of this hold command process (S2411).

In the hold command process (FIG. 89, S2411), first, it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating the number of holds (S2801). If it is determined that the command indicates the number of pending symbols (S2801: Yes), the pending display data corresponding to the reserved symbol is displayed in the pending quantity and symbol (pattern, color, etc.) indicated by the received display pending command. Data table Is set to (S2802). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2801 when it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating the number of holds (S2801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command of the normal hold effect (S2803). When it is determined that the command is the normal hold effect (S2803: Yes), the corresponding hold symbol is changed to the normal hold effect symbol and set in the display data table (S2804). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2803, when it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating the normal hold effect (S2803: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command of eight effects (S2805). If it is determined that the command is for eight effects (S2805: Yes), display data to be changed to the notice symbol for eight effects is set in the display data table (S2806), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the command is not for eight effects, other hold display settings are executed (S2807). After that, this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2410 that the display hold command has not been received (S2410: No), it is determined whether or not the display effect command has been received (S2412). When it is determined that the display effect command has been received (S2412: Yes), the effect command process is executed (S2413).

Here, the details of this effect command processing (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the contents of this effect command processing (S2413).

In the effect command process (FIG. 90, S2413), first, it is determined whether the revariation effect (see FIG. 47 (b)) in the time effect extension period is set (S2901). Here, when the revariation effect is set by the process of S1730 of the extension effect setting process (FIG. 78, S1708) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is notified by a command. When it is determined that the revariation effect is set (S2901: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the revariation effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2902). After that, the process proceeds to S2909.

On the other hand, in the process of S2901 when it is determined that the revariation effect is not set (S2901: No), it is determined whether it is a pseudo extension effect (S2903). This pseudo-extended effect is a precursor effect displayed 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period, and the effect symbol is displayed tremblingly (see FIG. 47 (a)). When it is determined that the pseudo extension effect is set (S2903: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the pseudo extension effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2904). After that, the process proceeds to S2909.

On the other hand, in the process of S2903, when it is determined that the pseudo extension effect is not set (S2903: No), it is determined whether or not eight effects are set (S2905). When it is determined that the eight effects are set (S2905: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the eight effects is set in the display data table buffer (S2906). After that, the process proceeds to S2909.

On the other hand, in the process of S2905, when it is determined that the eight effects are not set (S2905: No), it is determined whether the normal hold effect is set (S2907). When it is determined that the normal hold effect is set (S2907: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the normal hold effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2908). After that, the process proceeds to S2909. On the other hand, in the process of S2907, when it is determined that the normal hold effect is not set (S2907: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S2909, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2909). Then, among the data table discrimination flags of the display data table corresponding to each display pattern, the set data table discrimination flag is turned on, and the other data table discrimination flags are set to off (S2910).

Next, based on the display time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2911), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S). S2912). After that, this process ends.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 86. When it is determined that there is no display effect command in the process of S2412 (S2412: No), it is determined whether or not the rear image change command is received (S2414). If it is determined that the rear image change command has been received (S2414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2415).

Here, the rear image change command process (S2415) will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the rear image change command process (S2415).

In the rear image change command process (FIG. 91, S2415), the rear image change flag is set to on (S3001). The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the changed rear image type indicated by the command is set to on (S3002). After that, this process ends.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 86. When it is determined that the rear image change command has not been received in the process of S2414 (S2414: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command (S2416). If it is determined that an error command has been received (S2416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2417).

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2417) will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (b). FIG. 91B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3102), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S3102 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3002 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 86. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2416 (S2416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2419), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

In the processing of S2401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processing of S2402 to S2419 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2419 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, the commands required to display the power-on image (not shown) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command The variable pattern command processing (see FIG. 87 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 87 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other commands are executed. Performs a process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 87 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 92, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3201: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S3202 to S3204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3202), S3203 to S3204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3301).

In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the warning image are specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 92. After the warning image setting process (S3204) or in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3205.

In S3205, the pointer update process is executed (S3205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Therefore, the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3301, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3402). As a result, if it is End information (S3402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3403), and if it is a demo display data table (S3403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3303: No). S3406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 92 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3108: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S3209).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S3209: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to produce the definite display effect. It is set (S3210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3209, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S3209: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3216). If the demo display flag is off (S3216: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3217) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the process of S3216, if the demo display flag is on (S3216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. A process is performed in which a display data table that specifies that the image (not shown) is stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 95A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3501 (S3501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (b). FIG. 95B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3501: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3602). In the process of S3602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S3602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3603. Further, as a result of the processing of S3501, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3603.

In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3603 (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 85 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 85 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 86 to 91) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 92 to 94) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 96) (see S3401: No in FIG. 95 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by the above, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a normal image transfer setting process (S3503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3205) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3702), and if it is the transfer data information (S3702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3704), and the process proceeds to S3705.

Further, in the process of S3702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3702: No), the processes of S3703 and S3704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3706).

In the process of S3606, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S3606 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3707. Further, as a result of the processing of S3705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3707.

In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3709. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3707: No), this process ends.

In the process of S3709, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3709). The discrimination in the processing of S3709 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3709, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3709: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3709 (S3709: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3710). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3610, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3711), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 57 (S3801). That is, in the processing of S3701, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304). Then, the specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. As various drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S3702 (S3703). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 85B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Further, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. After that, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, it is in use) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown). ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may confirm the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when the access is terminated, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can perform the access. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is the transfer data that is not the Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer process can be executed by utilizing the time when the important processes in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 is used for image data without affecting the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address at that address. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is provided as the image controller. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 having the configuration described in the above embodiment, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234, and after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may store a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above embodiment, a first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case is not limited to this, and a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the internal bus (bus line 240). A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program that is first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), etc. are provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and MPU231 is provided. You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured so that the resident video RAM 235 can be directly connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 port input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-port is not always limited. A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously retained during power-on is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read new image data to be resident, and the read image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is supplied. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where many data signals are exchanged. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another image data is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are input from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 from the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. You may transfer directly to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the time main image or the like. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply is supplied. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 235 When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the game machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the game machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is transferred. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 The increase in load can be suppressed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be main. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, by turning on the error discrimination flag corresponding to the vibration error, the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 69). By executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 70A) when the above is determined, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive an error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game plate 13. May be good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress the flow of the ball being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the ball into the ball entry port. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined that the main control device 110 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is generated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, it is determined that the display control device 114 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, and the display control device 113 May display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used, the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to generate an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player behaves illegally. It can be deterred.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone at that time corresponding to the address expressed in units of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for the frame is displayed, and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. The transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required when drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing contents and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured as.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various kinds of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player The case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by is described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data third of the display data table.

In the above embodiment, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are included in the display data table has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. .. Further, even if the additional data table includes not only the additional drawing contents but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing contents. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing. Therefore, from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transferred data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect can be described, for example. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variation effect are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. "Fluctuating start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common for each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

In the above embodiment, a case where a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described, but each data table has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of an image for one frame at which the drawing process is completed will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is signaled for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above embodiment, after the final display data table corresponding to the final display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113 until the final display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo production is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the final display effect is displayed until one of the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the final display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the rear image and stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, only the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of turning on the power can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on is transferred to the fluctuating image area 235b at power-on immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the variation display by the variation image when the power is turned on.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time and should be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn, which is defined at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and refers to the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction for transferring image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 after determining whether or not the data is transferred has been described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 is transferred to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “back surface A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the rear image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed in the above from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information regarding the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the data to the video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, in the back surface C which is the back image of the “island stage”, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. Further, as the rear image, not only the one that scrolls or the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the information of various counters (random number counter C1 per first, type counter C2 per first) acquired at the time of starting winning, and the number of reserved balls. Although the case of including it in the command has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of various counters (random number counter C1 per first, type counter C2 per first) acquired at the time of starting winning is input to the voice lamp by another command. The control device 113 may be notified.

In the above embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed variation. , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where one first winning opening 64, in which the lottery for the big hit of the special symbol is started when the ball enters, is arranged in the game board 13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 in which the entry is detected independently and the lottery for the jackpot is started. In this case, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each first ball entry port indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the hold ball counter for the mouth and a fluctuation pattern command is received, if the hold ball counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

In the above embodiment, every time the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is mainly used. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, so that the main control device 110 and The control burden on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning of the first winning opening 64 is different by the number of the reserved balls in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four. It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertically The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 104. In the third embodiment, the display control between the rotary operation unit 600 and the third symbol display device 81 described in the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 98 (a) is a schematic view showing a display mode when the main symbol is displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 of the rotary operation unit 600. In the spherical liquid crystal device 670, a plurality of pixels composed of 1 mm square are arranged to form a display area. The display area Pb of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 shown in FIG. 98A and the display area Pa shown in the third symbol display device 81 are display areas of the same size.

FIG. 98B is an enlarged view of the display area Pa and the display area Pb. The display area Pa is composed of 2 rows × 2 rows of 1.5 mm square pixels (pixels), and is composed of a total of 4 pixels. Further, the display area Pb is composed of 3 rows × 3 rows of 1 mm square pixels, and is composed of a total of 9 pixels. As described above, the third symbol display device 81 is composed of pixels having a size 1.5 times that of the spherical liquid crystal device 670.

The spherical liquid crystal device 670 has a display area arranged so as to overlap the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is configured to be able to display display effects that are related to each other.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 102, an example of a display mode displayed in association with the third symbol display device 81 and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 will be described. FIG. 98A is a diagram showing a state in which the third symbol is displayed only on the spherical liquid crystal and is scrolled while being enlarged from the upper right direction to the lower right direction. When the main symbol is displayed up to the edge of the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, the third symbol moves to the boundary portion of the third symbol display device 81 with the spherical liquid crystal device 670 as shown in FIG. 99 (a). Is displayed. In this case, the same display data as the display data of the main symbol displayed immediately before by the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is set and displayed in the third symbol display device 81.

With this configuration, the third symbol display device 81 has a pixel size 1.5 times larger than that of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, so that the size of the third symbol is 1.5 times larger. Is displayed. As a result, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 to the third symbol display device 81 can be shown to the player as if they are gradually enlarged and scrolled. As a result, it is possible to reduce the process of enlarging and setting the main symbol, and it is possible to reduce the control load of the display control device 114.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the third symbol is scrolled and displayed while being enlarged by 1.5 times. Further, even when scrolling is displayed in the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, the display is enlarged by 1.5 times and displayed in a variable manner. With this configuration, even if the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without changing the enlargement setting, the rate and change of the enlarged display by the pixels do not change, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Problems can be suppressed.

100 (a) to 100 (b) are views showing a state in which an enlarged scroll display is performed while rotating within the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670. In this case as well, each time the movement is displayed, the image is enlarged by 1.5 times. 101 (a) to (b) and 102 (a) are in a state of being scrolled from right to left from the right end of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 after being rotated and displayed by the spherical liquid crystal device 670. It is a figure which showed. Here, too, each time the movement is displayed, the image is enlarged by 1.5 times. As shown in FIG. 102 (b), a table showing the size of the symbols actually displayed at the set magnification of the third symbol display device 81 (main liquid crystal) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub liquid crystal). Is.

In the sub liquid crystal, the actual size of the symbol set at the enlargement ratio of c1 and the symbol set at the enlargement ratio of c1 in the main liquid crystal are 1.5 times different.

In the present embodiment, when scrolling is displayed in the same display device, it is configured to gradually enlarge and display at the same enlargement ratio, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the enlargement ratio is increased at a constant rate to make the main display. The boundary between the liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal may be set to be close to 1.5 times (ratio of pixel size). With this configuration, the display of switching between the main liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal can be displayed with less discomfort. Further, the scroll display may be performed while reducing the size from the main liquid crystal to the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the reduction ratio may be gradually changed at the same reduction ratio or the same ratio as in the case of the enlarged display, and may be configured to match the reduction ratio of the pixels at the switching timing. Further, in the present embodiment, the main symbol has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other symbols, characters, characters, and the like may be used.

The electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a block diagram of the display control device 114 according to the third embodiment.

In the third embodiment, a sub-display data table buffer 233m, a sub-pointer 233n, and a sub-timekeeping counter 233i are added to the second embodiment. Here, the sub liquid crystal is configured in the same manner as the main liquid crystal 81 so that a different display mode can be displayed at the same time as the main liquid crystal. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted because it is the same as the description already given in the second embodiment.

Next, the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 104. In the third embodiment, only this command determination process is changed, and the same process as in the second embodiment is executed for other processes, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment is a variation pattern command process (FIG. 87, S2302) in the command determination process (FIG. 86, S2302) in the second embodiment. The difference is that S2302) has been changed to the variation pattern command processing 2 (FIG. 104, S2450). Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 104, the variation pattern command process 2 (S2450) in the third embodiment is the process of S2519 to S2523 with respect to the variation pattern command process (FIGS. 87 (a) and S2405) in the second embodiment. Has been added.

In the process of S2513, when it is determined that the effect is not a button effect (S2513: No), it is determined whether the display effect using the sub liquid crystal (spherical liquid crystal device 670) is a variable pattern to be set. If the fluctuation pattern does not use the sub liquid crystal, the process proceeds to S2515.

On the other hand, in the process of S2519, when it is determined that there is an effect using the sub liquid crystal (S2519: Yes), the display data table for the sub liquid crystal is set (S2520). The sub data table discrimination flag corresponding to the set display data table for the sub liquid crystal is set to on (S2521). Time data is set in the sub-timekeeping counter based on the data table (S2522). The subpointer is initialized and set (S2523), and the process proceeds to S2515.

With this configuration, the display mode can be displayed independently on the sub liquid crystal and the main liquid crystal. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various display effects.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 148. In the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the distribution unit 1064, the processing order of the balls winning in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and the display control of the third symbol display device 81 are the second embodiment described above. It is different from the embodiment, and other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

To elaborate on the differences between the display control of the fourth embodiment and the second embodiment, the additional winning effect and the special continuous effect, which will be described later, are added to the eight pending effects, and the composite display effect. The difference is that the effect using the frame button 22 is added and the time effect period described later can be changed in the time effect.

FIG. 105 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 105, a distribution unit 1064 in which a ball can enter is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 provided on the front surface of the game board 13. The balls that have entered the distribution unit 1064 are configured to be alternately distributed to the first winning opening 964a or the left second winning opening 964b, which will be described later.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has a right second winning opening 640 (so-called second winning opening) as a winning opening (so-called second winning opening) in which a lottery for the special symbol 2 is executed by winning a prize. A second winning opening (2nd winning opening) arranged on the lower right side of the game board 13 and a left second winning opening 964b (second winning opening arranged in the distribution unit 1064) are provided.

Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 1064 will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b) are views showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 1064. In reality, a cover body made of transparent resin is arranged on the front surface side of the cover body, and the surface of the cover body is colored with a spiral handle so that the inside is difficult to see. In addition, a decorative LED (shown) is attached to the distribution unit 1064, which emits light when the pachinko machine 10 is playing a big hit game or when a normal game is being played, and makes the game board 13 gorgeous. We are directing to do. The light emitted when performing such an effect is reflected on the surface of the cover body, which makes it difficult to see the inside of the distribution unit 1064 while playing the game with the pachinko machine 10, and the game is performed. In the absence state, the inside of the distribution unit 1064 is configured to be easily visible. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the principle of the ball distribution mechanism, and to facilitate a visual inspection of the inside of the distribution unit 1064 by a clerk when no game is being played. ing.

A passage port through which the game ball can enter is provided in the upper part of the distribution unit 1064, and a transmission type entry sensor 1064a that can detect that the game ball has passed through the passage port is arranged. .. The ball that has passed through the passage port is alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b arranged below the ball.

The ball distributed by the distribution member 900 rolls on the first guide member 900z1 and the second guide member 900z2 erected in the distribution unit 1064, and is guided to each winning opening. In this way, by providing the guide members 900z1 and 900z2 between the distribution member 900 that is rotatable left and right and the winning ports 964a and 964b, the distribution member 900 that is rotated is the winning port. It is possible to prevent contact with 964a and 964b. Further, the distribution member 900 can be miniaturized.

The size of the distribution member 900 is preferably such that the accommodating portion 900a of the distribution member 900 is sized so that two balls are not accommodated (the length of the wall surface constituting the accommodating portion 900a is less than 5.5 mm). good. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls housed in the housing unit 900a from balancing and hindering the rotation of the sorting member 900. Further, in order to prevent one of the accommodating portions 900a from continuously receiving a plurality of game balls, a gently inclined portion may be provided which temporarily receives the balls entering the distribution unit 1064 and allows the gentle slope to flow down. By using such a configuration, spheres (balls in a string of beads) that have continuously entered the distribution unit 1064 flow down the gently sloping portion, so that a gap is generated between the spheres. It is possible to prevent one of the accommodating portions 900a from continuously receiving the ball.

The distribution member 900 is rotatably attached to the base body provided on the back side of the distribution unit 1064 via the shaft support portion 900d, and the game ball that has entered is rotatably attached to the accommodating portion 900a of the distribution member 900. Alternatively, it is configured to receive at 900c. The distribution member 900 is symmetrically configured around the shaft support 900d, and the shaft support is fixed so that the boundary wall between the accommodation portion 900a and the accommodation portion 900c is in a vertical state (directly above) due to the weight of the distribution member 900. Has been done. When the game ball is received by the accommodating portion 900a, the distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise in the front view due to the weight of the game ball to guide the game ball to the first winning opening 964a.

Limiting members 900y1 and 900y2 are erected in the distribution unit 1064, and are configured to be rotatable about 45 degrees left and right in the rotation range of the distribution member 900, respectively. Further, a magnet 900b is provided at the boundary between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900b.

A magnet (base side magnet) 901 is arranged at a position on the center line of the passage port on the base body provided on the back side of the distribution unit 1064. The magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 and the base side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip end portion. The base side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the distribution member 900 side.

Similar to the base side magnet 901, the magnet 900b is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the distribution member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base side magnet 901 side. The base side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 are closest to each other (the tips face each other) at the position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodation portion 900a and the accommodation portion 900c is directly above. It becomes the position. Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity, they repel each other, and the boundary wall of the sorting member 900 does not stop at a position facing directly upward and is rotated to the left or right. It will be maintained.

As a result, when the magnet 900b provided on the boundary wall due to its own weight reaches a position on the center line of the passage port (a position directly above), the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901 repel each other. The distribution member 900 rotates to the left or right, and either the accommodating portion 900a or the accommodating portion 900c faces the side receiving the ball entering the distribution unit 1064 (upper side of the game machine). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball that has entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c and causing ball clogging.

Further, when the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901 repel each other, for example, the accommodating portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 45 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first winning opening 964a, and then the distribution member. It is possible to prevent the 900 from rotating clockwise (the accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the game ball to the first winning opening 964a, the accommodating portion 900c is in a state of facing upward, and then the ball that enters the distribution unit 1064 is received by the accommodating portion 900c and the weight of the ball. The distribution member 900 is rotated about 90 degrees to the right to guide the game ball to the second winning opening 964b. In this way, the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the ball entering the sorting unit 1064 to the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b. Therefore, the game balls can be evenly distributed to the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b to enter the ball, and the lottery game resulting from the entry of the ball into the first winning opening 964a (described later) The first lottery game) and the lottery game (second lottery game) caused by the ball entering the left second winning opening 964b can be efficiently executed.

Next, the operation of the distribution member 900 when the ball enters the distribution unit 1064 will be described. FIG. 106A shows a state in which the accommodating portion 900a of the distribution member 900 is located so as to face the passage port of the distribution unit 1064 (upper side of the game machine). In this state, the magnet 900b is located on the right side of the base side magnet 901, and the position where the rotational force to the left due to the weight of the distribution member 900 and the repulsive force between the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901 are balanced. It is something that is maintained. In this case, when the ball passes through the passing port, the ball is housed in the accommodating portion 900a, and the distribution member 900 is rotated counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball to roll on the guiding portion 900z1 to the first winning opening 964a. Is induced. When a ball enters the first winning opening 964a, the winning balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first lottery game is executed.

After the ball is distributed to the first winning opening 964a by the distribution member 900, the distribution member 900 is maintained at a position where the accommodating portion 900c faces upward as shown in FIG. 106 (b). After that, when the ball passes through the passing opening, it is accommodated in the accommodating portion 900c, and the game ball is distributed to the left second winning opening 964b. When a ball enters the left second winning opening 964b, the winning balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second lottery game is executed. Therefore, it can be alternately divided into the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b.

The configuration of the distribution member 900 is not limited to the configuration described above, and for example, an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid may be used to rotate the distribution member 900 at regular intervals. When such a configuration is adopted, the origin position is a position where the game ball can be guided to one of the winning openings (for example, the first winning opening 964a), and the origin position is when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It is preferable to make the configuration return to the origin position when it is detected that the lottery game has not been performed for a long time. By doing so, it becomes possible to provide a fair game to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution member 900 is distributed in two directions, the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b, but it may be configured to be distributed in three directions or more. In such a case, it is preferable to provide a through gate 67, which causes the second symbol (ordinary symbol) lottery, and a general winning opening 63, which causes the payout of prize balls, at the distribution destination. By doing so, it is possible to consolidate the devices that cause the games (lottery and prize balls) of the pachinko machine 10 into one place, and secure a large area that can be used for decoration and production on the game board 13. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls when the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b are entered is the same, but may be different. Further, although the distribution member 900 is configured to distribute evenly to each distribution destination, the distribution ratio may be changed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment can store up to eight lottery games (four first lottery games and four second lottery games) in the order of ball entry. (Details will be described later). Therefore, as described above, the balls that have entered the distribution unit 1064 are configured to alternately enter the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b, so that the two lottery games are evenly stored. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which only one of the lottery games is stored and the maximum number of stored lottery games (8) is not reached.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured to perform the second lottery game even if the ball enters the right second winning opening 640. That is, during normal times, a left-handed game (a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the left side of the game area provided in the game board 13) is performed, and by aiming at the distribution unit 1064, the first lottery game and the first lottery game are performed. 2 A right-handed game (a game in which a ball is shot aiming at the right side of the game area provided in the game board 13) during a probability change or a short time when the electric accessory 640a is easily released by being provided alternately with the lottery game. By aiming at the second winning opening 640 on the right side, the game can be performed so as to always receive the provision of the second lottery game.

Next, the effect control displayed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 107 is a time chart for explaining the effect control related to the reserved symbol effect described later. As shown in FIG. 107, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is controlled to perform a plurality of reserved symbol effects based on an increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, it is configured to perform a hold symbol effect different from the normal (hold effect performed when the number of hold balls is less than or equal to a predetermined number) on condition that the number of hold balls is equal to or more than a predetermined number. The details of the reserved symbol effect will be described later, but in this way, by performing a special effect when the number of reserved balls exceeds a predetermined number, the player can see the special effect. , The game will be continued so that the number of reserved balls exceeds a predetermined number or reaches the upper limit.

First, the increase / decrease in the number of reserved balls shown in FIG. 107 will be described. The number of reserved balls is a number that stores information about a lottery game that is performed due to a ball entering the first winning opening 964a or the left second winning opening 964b, and is the number of reserved balls in the present embodiment. The maximum is set to 8 (4 first lottery games, 4 second lottery games). In addition, although the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with two second winning openings as described above, in this description, a game during left-handed hitting in which the number of reserved balls is likely to be eight. It will be described using a state. Therefore, of the two second winning openings, the left second winning opening 964b will be used for explanation.

In the pachinko machine 10, a fluctuation state (variation time) of a predetermined time is provided for displaying the result (big hit or miss) of the lottery game in an identifiable manner. The interest of the game is enhanced by providing the player with an effect suggesting the result of the lottery game using this variable time (for example, dynamic display (variable display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81). .. In addition, a plurality of the above-mentioned fluctuation times are set according to the result of the lottery game. ing. This is to encourage the player whether or not the result of the lottery game currently being performed is a big hit, and the longer the fluctuation time, the longer the production can be performed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is designed so that a plurality of the above-mentioned lottery games cannot be performed at the same time, and the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b are used while one lottery game is being performed. When a ball enters, it has a function (holding function) of storing a lottery game caused by the entry so that the lottery game currently being performed is performed after the lottery game is completed. The number of balls stored in this lottery game is the number of reserved balls.

That is, the increase / decrease in the number of reserved balls shown in FIG. 107 is the number of reserved balls when a ball enters the first winning opening 964a, the left second winning opening 965b, or the right second winning opening 640 during the lottery game. Is increased, the lottery game ends, and the number of reserved balls decreases at the timing when a new lottery game is started, and the maximum number of reserved balls is eight. The number of reserved balls is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 using the reserved symbols (see FIG. 108 (b)), and the lottery results of the lottery games individually stored (win / fail determination results). ) Is used to change the display mode of the reserved symbol (details will be described later).

The period A shown in FIG. 107 represents a period until the number of reserved balls reaches eight, and during this period, a normal reserved effect is performed as an effect of the reserved symbol. Since the normal hold effect is the same as the content described in the second embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the number of reserved balls reaches eight, eight reserved balls are produced (start of period B). This eight-hold hold effect is a hold symbol effect performed using the eight hold symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds (see FIG. 110). Period B is the period from the start of the 8 hold production to the end of the 8 hold effect (when the last lottery game of the 8 hold balls used for the hold 8 effect is started). is there. That is, the period B is continued from the time when the number of reserved balls reaches eight until the eighth lottery game is started.

When the number of reserved balls increases (memorizes a new lottery game) in the period B, an additional winning effect is performed. The additional prize-winning effect is a hold symbol effect that is performed when a new lottery game is memorized (additional prize) when a hold symbol effect using a plurality of hold symbols such as eight hold symbols is being performed. , Unlike the normal hold effect, it is an effect of changing the hold symbol so that the hold symbol effect using a plurality of hold symbols is continuously performed (see FIG. 111 (b)). By performing this additional winning effect, the player will continue to play the game even while the eight hold effects are being performed, in order to experience the hold symbol effect different from the usual one. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

Next, when the number of reserved balls is 5 or more at the end of the period B, a special continuous effect is performed using all the reserved symbols displayed at that time (start of the period C). That is, the special continuous effect is a reserved symbol effect that is performed only when at least five or more lottery games are newly stored during the period B. Since the start condition of this special continuous effect is more difficult than that of the above-mentioned eight hold effect, the provided hold symbol effect is also a valuable effect for the player. A valuable production is, for example, a premier production that is displayed only in a small part when the result of the lottery game is a big hit, or points accumulated by the player regardless of the result of the lottery game. It is conceivable to display a large amount of information that can be given. The period C is a period from the start of the special continuation effect to the end of the special continuation effect (the time when the last lottery game to be performed among the reserved balls used for the special continuation effect is started). The additional winning effect is being executed during the period C as well.

When the period C in which the special continuous production is performed ends, the process shifts to the period A again. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a plurality of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 on the condition that the number of reserved balls is a predetermined number (8). Perform multiple hold symbol effects (8 hold effects) using. If the number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (5) at the time when the plurality of reserved symbols effect is completed, the plurality of reserved symbols displayed at that time are held. The second multiple reserved symbol effect (special continuous effect) is performed using the symbol. In addition, an additional prize-winning effect different from the normal hold effect is performed for a newly generated reserved symbol while a plurality of reserved symbol effects using a plurality of reserved symbols are being performed.

With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game so that a predetermined number or more of the reserved symbols are always displayed.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112. FIG. 108A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, a reserved symbol corresponding to a prize in the first winning opening 964 (special figure 1 reserved symbol) and a reserved symbol corresponding to a winning in the left second winning opening 964b (special figure 2 reserved symbol) are used. They are arranged in the order of winning from the left side of the screen and displayed in the sub-display area Ds (up to 8). Due to the structure of the distribution unit 1064 described above, the special figure 1 reserved symbol and the special figure 2 reserved symbol are displayed alternately in the left-handed state.

In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 reserved symbol and the special figure 2 reserved symbol are displayed in an indistinguishable display mode, but each may be in an identifiable display mode. Further, the reserved symbol that has been displayed corresponding to the special symbol that is being variablely displayed on the main display area Dm may be separately displayed at a predetermined position in the sub display area Ds. With this configuration, the player can grasp which of the special figure 1 reserved symbol and the special figure 2 reserved symbol is used for the game (whether it is performed). Therefore, it is possible to raise interest in the progress of the game. Since the other parts have the same configuration as the second embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 108 (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. In FIG. 108 (b), seven reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In the present embodiment, as described above, the reserved memory of the special figure 1 and the reserved memory of the special figure 2 are alternately stored, but they cannot be identified by the display of the reserved symbol. By displaying the reserved symbols in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether the lottery game that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. , You can play the game while expecting what kind of benefits will be provided when it becomes a big hit.

The mode of the displayed reserved symbol may be displayed so as to be distinguishable between the reserved memory of the special figure 1 and the reserved memory of the special figure 2. Further, it may be possible to distinguish whether the lottery game currently being changed is based on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player grasp the privilege in the case of a big hit in advance, and it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the effect during the fluctuation.

FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing a normal hold effect during the period A of FIG. 107. In FIG. 109 (a), the fourth reserved symbol from the left is variably displayed as a “push” symbol (notification reserved symbol), and the player presses (operates) the frame button 22 to display FIG. 109. It is variably displayed to the "Δ" symbol shown in (b). The detailed contents will be omitted because they are the same as those in the second embodiment described above. In the present embodiment, the variable display content (“△” symbol) of the reserved symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery game corresponding to the reserved symbol to be variably displayed, but the variable display is not limited to this. It may be decided based on the result of the lottery game corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed before and after the reserved symbol. When deciding in this way, it is preferable that the display content after the variable display is a display content that makes the player expect that there is a chance in the vicinity of the reserved symbol that is variably displayed, such as an “arrow” symbol.

Further, the reserved symbol once variably displayed may be configured to be variably displayed again after a certain period of time. By doing so, even if the content of the variable display does not have a sense of expectation, it may be displayed in a variable manner again and the content may change to a sense of expectation. Therefore, a lottery game corresponding to the reserved symbol. It is possible to give expectations to the player until is executed.

FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing eight pending effects during the period B of FIG. 107. FIG. 110A shows a state in which the eight reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are changed to the notification reserved symbols, and the player presses the frame button 22 ( By performing the operation), the number is changed in order from the notification hold symbol displayed on the left side (see FIG. 110 (b)). Since the detailed contents are the same as those in the second embodiment described above, they will be omitted. In the present embodiment, the notification hold symbol is changed in order from the left each time the frame button 22 is pressed once, but when the frame button is pressed once, a plurality of notification hold symbols are changed or displayed in a variable manner. The order may be set randomly. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a game-like operation (pressing the frame button 22) for changing the notification holding symbol.

FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing eight pending effects and additional effects during the period B of FIG. 107. FIG. 111A shows a state after all the notification hold symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are changed by the operation of the frame button 22. In the present embodiment, in the case of notifying that there is a hold memory in which the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit among the eight hold memories, the eight hold symbols are used to say "big hit !!!". It is set to be displayed, and the display of "Big hit !!!?" Shown in this figure informs that there is a possibility that there is a hold memory in which the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit among the eight hold memories. Is what you do.

FIG. 111 (b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing a state in which three reserved memories are digested and two new reserved memories are added from the state of FIG. 111 (a). As shown in FIG. 111 (a), "Big hit !!!?" Was displayed using eight reserved symbols, but since three reserved memories were digested, it corresponds to the digested reserved memories. The pending symbol ("big hit") that was displayed has disappeared from the display screen. Further, two reserved symbols displayed corresponding to the two newly generated reserved memories during this period are displayed in the sub-display area Ds as notification reserved symbols.

In this way, for the new hold memory that occurred while the hold symbol effect by the hold 8 effect is being performed, an additional prize that makes it appear that the hold 8 effect is continuing instead of the normal hold symbol effect. The production will be performed. Specifically, the notification hold symbol (“push” symbol) is displayed as the hold symbol corresponding to the new hold storage (see FIG. 111 (b)). Similar to the above-described eight-hold effect, the display mode of the hold symbol changes by operating the frame button 22. Specifically, for example, when one of the two newly stored hold memories has a hold memory for which the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, the notification hold symbol corresponding to the hold memory is displayed on the frame button 22. When it is changed by the operation, the last "?" Of the character string "Big hit !!!?" (See Fig. 111 (a)) displayed in the 8 hold productions is changed to "!", And the notification hold symbol is changed. It also changes to "!". In addition, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is lost for both of the two newly stored cards, the notification hold symbol is not changed without changing the character string of "Big hit !!!?" Displayed in the 8 hold productions. To "?". By doing so, it is possible to associate the hold symbol corresponding to the new hold memory generated during the hold 8 effect with the hold 8 effect, and the player can play while the hold 8 effect is being performed. It is possible to continuously launch the game ball in order to generate a more reserved ball.

Further, in the present embodiment, the notification mode (“?” Or “!”) Of the rightmost character (the character corresponding to the reserved symbol to be digested last) among the character strings displayed by the eight pending effects is used. Since it is configured to suggest the result of the hit / fail judgment, one character is changed by using the hold symbol corresponding to one hold memory even in the additional prize-winning effect. When adopting a notification mode that suggests a winning / failing judgment result by using a plurality of characters, a plurality of characters may be changed by using a hold symbol corresponding to one hold memory in the additional winning effect. A plurality of characters may be changed by using a hold symbol corresponding to the hold memory of.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed to a display mode of displaying a character string of 8 characters by the effect of 8 reserved symbols, that is, the variable display is performed in which the number of characters corresponding to the number of reserved symbols is changed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reserved symbols may be combined and variably displayed so as to form one notification mode by producing eight reserved symbols.

Further, in the eight-holding effect of the present embodiment, the notification mode suggesting the result of the winning / failing is displayed by the character corresponding to the last held-holding symbol among the eight holding symbols. , Not all the characters on the right side of the character string displayed by the 8 hold symbols (the characters corresponding to the hold symbols that are digested in the second half of the 8 hold symbols), not the hold symbol that is digested last. Alternatively, either one may be used to display the notification mode.

FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing a special continuation effect during the period C of FIG. 107. FIG. 112A shows a state in which the reserved symbol corresponding to the last reserved memory is digested out of the eight reserved memories used for the eight reserved effects, that is, the third symbol display device 81. The five "?" Displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the above are those displayed by the above-mentioned additional winning effect. In this state, if there are five or more reserved memories, "Press!" Is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device. When the player presses (operates) the frame button 22, the mode of the reserved symbol displayed as "???" changes again. Specifically, for example, when there is a judgment result in which the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit among the hold memories corresponding to the hold symbols displayed as "???????" in FIG. 112 (a). , As shown in FIG. 112 (b), it is changed to 5 characters of "Congratulations". In this way, when the number of reserved symbols (the number of displayed reserved symbols) at the time when the display of the reserved symbols by the eight pending effects is completed is a predetermined number (5 in the present embodiment) or more, it is more special. Since the hold symbol production is performed, it is possible to encourage the player to continuously shoot the game ball.

In this embodiment, since the special continuous effect is performed using a plurality of reserved symbols displayed as "?" By the additional prize effect, for example, a character indicating that the jackpot is confirmed by the additional prize effect is displayed. It is advisable to set a small percentage to be displayed and a large percentage to display characters indicating that the jackpot has been confirmed by the special continuous effect. By doing so, in the special continuation effect performed after the additional winning effect, it is displayed that the winning / failing determination result stored on hold includes the determination result that is a big hit (see FIG. 112 (b)). It is possible to increase the frequency of this, and it is possible to motivate the player to watch the special continuous production.

In addition, in the special continuous production, in addition to the character string (message) based on the judgment result of the hit / fail judgment result that is held and stored, information for acquiring a large amount of points accumulated by the player is displayed, or the current You may perform an effect of giving a privilege such as displaying the game state (probability change or normal) of. By doing so, it is possible to encourage the player to continuously shoot the game ball in order to receive a privilege other than the result of the hit / miss judgment.

At the timing of determining whether or not to perform the special continuous effect (the boundary between the period B and the period C in FIG. 107), the number of reserved memories (5 in the present embodiment) that is a condition for performing the special continuous effect is set. If it is stored on hold, the emphasized characters ("!", "Congratulations", etc.) that emphasize the character string ("Congratulations") changed by the special continuation effect on the reserved symbol corresponding to the surplus reserved memory. It is good to change to. By doing so, even if the number of retained memories of the surplus is indefinite, it is possible to perform an effect that does not change the display content displayed by the special continuous effect and does not give a sense of discomfort.

In addition, when performing a special continuous effect, the reserved symbol displayed as "???????" may be once changed to the notification reserved symbol before being performed. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the special continuous effect is a hold symbol effect using a plurality of hold symbols.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned additional winning effect is performed even while the special continuous effect is being performed, but the content of the effect is the same as the above-mentioned content and is omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal hold symbol is changed to the notification hold symbol that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22, and then the notification hold symbol is changed based on the operation of the frame button 22. , The hold symbol (result display hold symbol) that makes one meaning by a plurality of hold symbols is displayed based on the pass / fail judgment result included in the eight hold memories, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , The characters (“large”, “hit”, “ri”, etc.) displayed by changing the notification pending symbol may be displayed in another place of the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, even if the reserved symbol used for the eight-hold effect is digested as the game progresses, the character string displayed as a result of the eight-hold effect can be maintained. In this case, it is preferable that the character string displayed in another place is deleted at the timing when all the reserved symbols used for the eight pending effects are digested.

In addition, as a dynamic display of the third symbol, when an effect of temporarily stopping and then restarting during the fluctuation time (so-called pseudo-continuous effect or development effect to super reach) is performed, the frame button 22 has already been displayed. It is preferable to change the reserved symbol, which is the result display pending symbol, to the notification reserved symbol by the operation, and to perform the effect of eight pending symbols again. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a reserved symbol effect corresponding to the dynamic display effect of the third symbol that makes one lottery game appear as a plurality of lottery games.

In this way, when performing an effect of re-doing the hold symbol effect in conjunction with the dynamic display of the third symbol, the display content of the first result display hold symbol is added to the pass / fail judgment result included in the eight hold memories. On the other hand, the expectation of the jackpot is low, and the hold symbol corresponding to the hit / fail judgment result is displayed in the 8 hold productions to be performed again, or the result display is displayed in advance in the 8 hold productions to be performed again. It is advisable to set the display content of the reserved symbol to have a higher degree of expectation than the display content of the first result display reserved symbol. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the display content is changed to a display content having a lower expectation than the reserved symbol production of our office as a result of re-doing the reserved symbol production.

In addition, eight reserved symbols may be used to display a character string suggesting that the third symbol, such as "Keizoku !!!" or "Already !!", will be restarted. .. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player of the game content other than the hit / fail judgment result included in the eight hold memories by using the hold symbol, and it is possible to provide a game machine rich in game playability. It will be possible.

Furthermore, the result of the hit / fail judgment included in the eight reserved memories, the lottery result of the third symbol dynamically displayed at that time, and the effect of restarting the dynamically displayed third symbol at that time are displayed. "Chance !!!" or "Chance !!!" or "Chance !!!" or "Chance !!!" or "Chance !!!" It may be displayed as an abstract character string such as "Marine Chan!". By doing so, it becomes possible to provide a game machine rich in game playability.

In the present embodiment, the condition for performing the effect of eight reserved pieces is that the number of stored items on hold is eight, but it is sufficient as long as a predetermined number is stored, and seven pieces may be stored.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reserved symbol is indicated by the reserved symbol effect, and the reserved symbol is changed to the notification reserved symbol as a notification for prompting the player to operate the frame button 22, but the reserved symbol is displayed. It may be displayed differently without changing the mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the notification pending symbol is always set to the same display mode (“push” symbol) regardless of the result of holding and storing the notification pending symbol, and the result display pending symbol displayed by operating the frame button 22 is performed. The content of the display mode (“Big hit !!!”) is changed based on the winning / failing judgment result stored on hold. As a result, the player can see the effect suggesting the winning / failing determination result that is held and stored for the first time by operating the frame button 22, so that the player can actively participate in the game. , It is possible to prevent getting bored early. It should be noted that a plurality of notification pending symbols may be provided based on the winning / failing determination result stored on hold. By doing so, it is possible to easily provide a plurality of stages of expectation by combining the display mode of the notification reserved symbol and the display mode of the result display pending symbol.

Next, the details of the composite display effect described above in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 117. The description of the parts that overlap with the second embodiment described above will be omitted. FIG. 113 is a time chart for explaining the flow related to the composite display effect. A series of steps will be described for the variable display in which the composite display effect is used with reference to FIG. 113.

First, when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the frame button effect preparation period (for example, 10 seconds) is reached, and the frame button The player is notified that the effect of operating 22 is started (see FIG. 114 (a)). Then, after the third symbol is in the reach display mode, the frame button operation valid period (for example, 10 seconds) is set, and the player is displayed to operate the frame button 22 and the frame button 22 is displayed within the frame button operation valid period. Is pressed (operated) (see FIG. 114 (b)). If the frame button operation under a predetermined condition is performed within the frame button operation valid period after the frame button operation valid period has elapsed, the process shifts to the PUSH effect which is a composite display effect (see FIG. 115 (b)).

On the other hand, if the frame button operation under the predetermined conditions is not performed within the frame button operation valid period, the process shifts to the normal effect period in which the normal super reach effect is performed (see FIG. 115 (c)). Further, when the change this time is a reach loss, the third symbol is stopped in a detached mode without shifting to the composite display effect regardless of the content of the frame button operation within the frame button operation valid period.

The PUSH production is divided into the first half part (the period shown in FIG. 113 (d)) and the second half part (the period shown in FIG. 113 (e)), and the game collects the "push" symbols displayed on the display screen in the first half part. Perform (FIG. 116 (a)), display the compositely displayed "push" symbol corresponding to the "push" symbol collected in the latter half part (FIG. 116 (b)), and press the frame button 22 (operation). By doing so, the "push" symbol is changed to a numerical symbol. After that, the combination of the numerical symbols displayed on the display screen is temporarily stopped, and the symbols are fixed after a lapse of a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 113, the composite display effect in the present embodiment has the same variation time as other predetermined super reach effects. Further, the image data from the start of the fluctuation of the third symbol to the development of the super reach (image data used during the periods of FIGS. 113A and 113B) and the fluctuation of the third symbol from the temporary stop to the finalization. The image data (image data used in the period of FIG. 113 (f)) and other image data of a predetermined super reach effect can be diverted. By doing so, it is not necessary to prepare the image data used from the start of fluctuation to the finalization of the symbol for each super reach effect, and the amount of image data can be reduced. In addition, the image data used during the periods (a), (b), and (f) shown in FIG. 113 is used to perform a reach-out effect.

FIG. 114 (a) is a diagram illustrating a display screen during the period of FIG. 113 (a). This display screen is displayed during the frame button effect preparation period for notifying the player in advance that the effect of operating the frame button 22 will be performed, and the player forgets to operate the frame button 22. It is a display to prevent.

FIG. 114 (b) is a diagram illustrating the display screen of the period (b) shown in FIG. 113. This display screen is displayed during the frame button operation valid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid, and the display prompting the frame button 22 to be repeatedly hit, the continuous hit mission achievement condition "50", and the current display screen. A status display (“1/50”) indicating the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed “1” is displayed. In this embodiment, the frame button 22 has a function of increasing the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed for a predetermined time. The remaining time of the frame button operation valid period (continuous hitting mission period) may be displayed.

FIG. 115 (a) is a diagram illustrating the display screen of the period (c) shown in FIG. 113. This display screen is a screen displayed during the normal production period, which is a transition when the continuous striking mission cannot be achieved during the frame button operation valid period, and the content thereof is shown in FIG. 43 (a) of the second embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 115 (b) is a diagram illustrating the display screen of the period (d) shown in FIG. 113. Since the display contents of this display screen are the same as those in FIG. 43 (b) of the second embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted. Although not shown, values based on the "push" symbol acquired during this period (for example, 15 seconds) (number of acquisitions, points earned, expected value of jackpot) are displayed in colors and characters in a predetermined area of the display screen. ..

FIG. 116 (a) is a diagram illustrating the display screen of the latter half period of FIG. 113 (d). Since the display content of this display screen is the same as that of FIG. 44A of the second embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this figure, six "push" symbols are stopped and displayed, but the number of "push" symbols that are stopped and displayed is different due to the different stopping modes of the symbol rows. In this way, the number of "push" symbols that are stopped and displayed suggests the expectation of a jackpot in this variable display, and the greater the number of "push" symbols that are stopped and displayed, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Is preset. That is, a plurality of variation patterns for performing a composite display effect in which the number of stop-displayed "push" symbols is different are provided, and the stop-displayed "push" symbol is stopped and displayed rather than the variation pattern in which the number of stop-displayed "push" symbols is small. The fluctuation pattern with a large number of symbols is set so that the percentage of hit / fail judgment results is higher.

FIG. 116 (b) is a diagram illustrating the display screen of the period (e) shown in FIG. 113. Since the display contents of this display screen are the same as those in FIG. 44 (b) of the second embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the blank symbol is changed to a "push" symbol, and the "push" symbol is compositely displayed. However, the blank symbol is changed to various characters to correspond to the character. The text (message) may be configured to be displayed in a composite manner. With such a configuration, at the timing when the blank pattern is changed to various characters, it becomes possible for the player to combine the characters displayed and predict the text to be compositely displayed, which will be used in later games. It is possible to have a sense of expectation. In addition, when such a configuration is used, it is preferable to synthesize and display a sentence by using a part of the displayed characters, instead of using all the various characters to be displayed and displaying them in a composite manner. By doing so, it is possible to make the player predict sentences of various patterns. In addition, in order to make it possible to identify the characters that are always used, if the mode (color, size, etc.) of the characters that are always used is made different from other characters, the player can see the composite display. It becomes possible to give hints of the sentences to be created, and it becomes possible to make it more enjoyable to predict the sentences to be created in the composite display.

FIG. 117 is a display screen for the period (f) shown in FIG. 113. On this display screen, when the player presses the frame button 22, the composite display symbol is stopped at the combination of the third symbol (main symbol) indicating the winning / failing determination result. In this figure, the game is stopped at the combination of "777" indicating that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, and is confirmed and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. During the period (f) shown in FIG. 113, it is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped at "777" (a state of being slightly shaken), and is completely stopped at the timing when the period (f) shown in FIG. 113 ends. It will be in the state of

As described above, in the present embodiment, as a fluctuation pattern having the same fluctuation time, a fluctuation pattern in which the push effect is performed and a fluctuation pattern in which the push effect is not performed (normal super reach fluctuation pattern) are provided, and a continuous striking mission is performed. Based on the result of determining the achievement condition of the above, it is configured to set either a variation pattern in which the push effect is performed or a variation pattern in which the push effect is not performed. That is, since the push effect is provided as a variable pattern, it is easy to replace the subsequent effect according to the result of the continuous striking mission. In addition, since the player who wants to experience the push effect needs to complete the continuous hitting mission, the player actively participates in the game, and it becomes possible to increase the motivation of the game.

Next, the details of the time effect described above in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 121. The description of the parts that overlap with the second embodiment described above will be omitted. In this embodiment, it has a function that can set a period for performing time production. By providing this function, the time effect (synchronous effect) is intentionally performed while performing the conventional time effect (synchronous effect), which has been performed with a sense of unity by synchronizing the effects executed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10. It is possible to provide a player with a surprising effect by differentiating (extending) the period during which the synchronous effect) is performed.

FIG. 118 is a time chart for explaining the flow of time production. A series of flows related to time production will be described with reference to FIG. 118.

In the present embodiment, it has a function that can set the period for performing the time effect (details will be described later), whereas in FIG. 118 (a), the first time effect after the power is turned on is performed for 5 minutes. In FIG. 118 (b), the first time effect after the power is turned on is set to be performed for 8 minutes. Further, the 8-minute time effect shown in FIG. 118 (b) is divided into the first 5 minutes and the remaining 3 minutes, the first 5 minutes is set as the effect mode B which is the time effect period, and the remaining time effect is set. Three minutes is set as the production mode D, which is a special time production period. By setting in this way, during the first 5 minutes when the time production is performed, the production is performed as the same time production period (effect mode B) when the time production period is 5 minutes and 8 minutes. Is possible. Then, when the production mode B ends (when the time production elapses for 5 minutes), a fanning effect of whether or not to shift to the production mode C or the production mode D is inserted, and if the transition condition is satisfied, the production mode C And control to shift to the effect mode D.

In the time effect of the second embodiment described above, the condition of not shifting from the effect mode B to the effect mode A which is the normal game period, that is, the condition of shifting to the effect mode C is whether or not it is in the hold memory at the end of the effect mode B. The judgment result includes the judgment result of the jackpot, and among the game machines in which the effect mode B is executed, the number of game machines that shift to the effect mode D is extremely small, and the effect mode C is also included. The shift to is itself a notification that there is a big hit in the reserved memory, and there is a problem that the player is not interested in the variable display of the third symbol.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the technique described in the second embodiment described above, a condition for shifting to the effect mode D as a condition for not shifting from the effect mode B to the effect mode A which is a normal game period, That is, since the case where the time effect is performed in advance is set to 8 minutes is added, the number of game machines that shift from the effect mode B to other than the effect mode A can be increased. In addition, by unifying the contents of the production in the production mode C and the production mode D, when the player shifts from the production mode B to the production mode (C or D) other than the production mode A, the player will soon be a big hit. It will be possible to raise expectations.

FIG. 119 (a) is a diagram illustrating the display screen during the time effect period shown in FIG. 118, and shows a state in which two minutes have passed since the time effect was started. The "180 seconds remaining" displayed on the upper right of this screen is the number of seconds remaining from the start of the time effect to the elapse of 5 minutes. That is, the same display is displayed regardless of whether 5 minutes is selected as the time production period or 8 minutes is selected. Since the other contents are the same as those in FIG. 46 of the second embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram illustrating the display screen during the time effect period shown in FIG. 118, and shows a state in which 4 minutes and 57 seconds have passed since the time effect was started (3 seconds remaining). .. In addition, regardless of whether 5 minutes is selected or 8 minutes is selected as the time production period, the display mode is the same as that of FIG. 46 (b) of the second embodiment described above. Omits the description.

FIG. 120A is a diagram illustrating a display screen at the end of the time effect period shown in FIG. 118, and shows a state in which 5 minutes have passed since the time effect was started. In addition, regardless of whether 5 minutes is selected or 8 minutes is selected as the time production period, the display mode is the same as that of FIG. 47 (a) of the second embodiment described above. Omits the description.

FIG. 120 (b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen during the time effect extension period or the special extension effect period shown in FIG. 118. During the time production extension period, the super fish school time will continue until the variable display that becomes a big hit ends, and during the special extension production period, the super fish school time will continue for 3 minutes. Therefore, if the number of remaining seconds is displayed, the player can easily grasp whether the super fish school time this time is in the time production extension period or the special extension production period, so this screen. "Remaining? Seconds" is displayed in the upper right corner of. By displaying in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it may be a big hit every time the variable display performed during the super fish school time is performed. Since the other display contents are the same as those in FIG. 47 (b) of the second embodiment described above, the description of the display contents will be omitted.

In FIG. 121, at the end of the time effect period shown in FIG. 118 or at the end of the special extension effect period, a determination result that is a big hit in the hit / fail determination result with the reserved memory or the changing special symbol stored at that time It is a figure which illustrated the display screen when it is not set. In this way, since the image at the end of the super fish school time is shared regardless of the state after the end of the time production period or the end of the special extension production period, the capacity of the image data can be reduced. it can. Since the display content is the same as that of FIG. 48 of the second embodiment described above, the description of the display content will be omitted.

In the time production in the present embodiment, during the time production period (during the production mode B), the effect suggesting the transition to the production mode C or the production mode D at the end of the time production period is not performed until the end. We try to give the player expectations, but when the hit / fail judgment is made based on the information held and stored just before the end of the time production period, and the hit / fail judgment result is a jackpot holding memory, that is, the time production period When the time shift to the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is determined after the end and it is determined that a big hit is obtained, an effect suggesting that fact may be provided.

Further, when a time effect of 5 minutes or more is set in advance, that is, when the special extension effect period (effect mode D) is entered after the time effect period ends, an effect suggesting that fact may be provided. In this case, the content of the suggestion effect is a content that suggests that it will continue for 5 minutes or more, and preferably, the content of the suggestion that it is not possible to determine whether to shift to the effect mode C or the effect mode D is preferable. For that purpose, the timing of executing the suggestion effect is just before the end of the time effect period, that is, when the fluctuation stop timing of the third symbol whose hit / fail determination result corresponds to the hold memory of the jackpot passes the time effect period (for example, the jackpot). If the fluctuation time is 1 minute, the remaining time of the time production period is 59 seconds or less).

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. The difference in electrical configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 and a part of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113. The difference is that a part of ROM 234 (effect) in the display control device 114 has been changed (added) and that the RTC 292 is clearly connected to the voice lamp control device 113. It is the same in terms of points. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 122, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

This block diagram differs from the block diagram (FIG. 49) showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment described above in that the RTC 292 is clearly connected to the voice lamp control device 113. , Other points are the same, so the description will be omitted. As described above, this RTC292 is used as a timekeeping means for performing time production.

Other changes include the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control unit 110, a part of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113, and a part of ROM 234 in the display control device 114. It will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 to 148. Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 123 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110. ..

Since the ROM 202 in the present embodiment is the same as the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 of the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the RAM 203 in the present embodiment has at least a variation execution flag 203i and a variation order storage area 203j in addition to the RAM 203 in the second embodiment.

The variation execution flag 203i is a flag used to determine whether the variation is executed in the special figure 1 or the variation is executed in the special figure 2. The variation execution flag 203i is set in the variation execution determination process (S4004 in FIG. 127) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) (see S4105 and S4107 in FIG. 127). Then, it is referred to in the special symbol variation process 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) to determine the variation execution (see S4005 and S4010 in FIG. 126), and is turned off when the variation execution determination process (S4004 in FIG. 127) is executed. (See S4101 in FIG. 127).

The variable order storage area 203j is an area for storing the winning order for each of the reserved data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Eight storage areas are set in the variable order storage area 203j, and are stored in the previous storage area in the order of winning. The storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. The variable order storage area j stores the winning order in the starting winning process 2 (S121 in FIG. 130) (see S4407 and S4414 in FIG. 130). Then, it is referred to in the variation execution determination process (4004 in FIG. 126) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) (see S4102 to S4104 and S4106 in FIG. 127).

Next, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 124. The ROM 222 in the present embodiment has at least an effect time selection table 222b in addition to the ROM 222 in the second embodiment described above (see FIG. 124 (a)). In addition to the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, the RAM 223 in the present embodiment includes a special continuation effect flag 223t, an additional effect flag 223u, eight effect counters 223v, a special continuation effect counter 223w, and an identification number storage area 223x. It has at least an effect time storage area 223y and an activation flag 223α (see FIG. 124 (b)).

The effect time selection table 222b is a table that is referred to when selecting a period in which the synchronous effect (time effect) is performed, and is used in the effect time setting process (S4904 in FIG. 145). The effect time selection table 222b has a plurality of data having different periods (time effect period) in which the synchronous effect (time effect) is performed, and corresponds to the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x described later. By selecting the time production period, different time production periods are selected. Therefore, for example, by assigning the same identification number to adjacent game machines, it is possible to start the synchronization effect at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, by selecting a predetermined time production period from the plurality of time production periods of the production time selection table 222b based on the assigned identification number, all of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are subjected to. It is surprising that the synchronous production is executed at the same timing to execute the production with a sense of unity, or the timing at which the synchronous production is intentionally performed only for some pachinko machines 10 among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is different. It is possible to perform a certain production.

The special continuation effect flag 223t is turned on when the condition for performing the special continuation effect is satisfied in the setting process during the eight productions (S4806 in FIG. 143). Then, when the value of the special continuation effect counter described later becomes 0, the value is turned off (S4809 in FIG. 143). When this special continuation effect flag is turned on, a special continuation effect is performed on the reserved symbol (S4605 in FIG. 136).

The additional effect flag 223u is turned on when the condition for performing the additional effect is satisfied in the eight effect setting process (S1353 in FIG. 143) (S4802 in FIG. 143). Then, when the value of the eight effect counters described later becomes 0, the number of reserved items stored is 4 or less, and when the value of the special continuous effect counter becomes 0, the value is turned off (FIG. 143). S4810, S4812). When the additional effect flag 223u is turned on, an additional effect is performed on the reserved symbol (S4607 in FIG. 136).

When the eight effect flags 223i are turned on, the eight effect counter 223v is set to the value of the counter (S1553 in FIG. 139). Then, when the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S1352 in FIG. 140), the value of the counter is decremented by 1 (S1654 in FIG. 140). The eight effect counter 223v determines the period during which the eight effects are performed. In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the counter is set to 8, and the value is subtracted by 1 when a new fluctuation is started. However, by determining that the value of the counter becomes 0, it is configured to determine whether or not all the reserved symbols (8) corresponding to the eight effects have been digested.

In the present embodiment, the effect (8 effects) is performed using 8 reserved symbols, but when the effect is performed using a reserved symbol other than 8 (for example, 7), the counter is used. The value may be set to 7.

The value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is set to 5 when the special continuation effect flag 223t is turned on in the setting process during eight productions (S4807 in FIG. 143). Then, when the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on in the fluctuation display setting process 2, the value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (S1655 in FIG. 140). The special continuation effect counter 223w determines the period during which the special continuation effect is performed. In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the counter is set to 5, and the value is subtracted by 1 when a new fluctuation is started. However, by determining that the value of the counter becomes 0, it is configured to determine whether or not all the reserved symbols (5) corresponding to the special continuous effect have been digested.

In the present embodiment, the effect (special continuation effect) is performed using five reserved symbols, but when the effect (special continuation effect) is performed using other than five (for example, six) reserved symbols. May set the value of this counter to 6.

The identification number storage area 223x stores the identification number input in the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S1351 in FIG. 134) (S4506 in FIG. 135). ). Then, the identification number stored in the start-up process 2 is cleared (S1209 in FIG. 131). The identification number storage area 223x is for storing the identification number operated and input by the operator in the identification number input process for setting the period (time) in which the time effect (synchronous effect) is performed using the RTC292. It is used. If the identification number is not input by the operator, the initial value stored in the identification number storage area 223x is used in the initial setting process of the RAM 223 (S1210 in FIG. 131).

In the present embodiment, an identification number can be assigned to each game machine by operating the frame button 22 for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. Then, the time effect (synchronous effect) using the RTC292 is performed by reading the effect time (time during which the synchronous effect is performed) corresponding to the assigned identification number from the effect time selection table 222b stored in the ROM 222. It is possible to set the period.

When reading the production time from the production time selection table 222b, the production time is read based on two parameters of the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x and the time data (date, day of the week, etc.) acquired from the RTC292. It is good to do so. By doing so, even if the identification number is the same, it is possible to change the period during which the synchronization effect is performed by changing the date, and it is possible to reduce the work of assigning the identification number.

The effect time storage area 223y stores the effect time selected in the effect time setting process (S4905 in FIG. 145). Then, the effect time stored in the start-up process 2 is cleared (S4504 in FIG. 135). The effect time storage area 223y is used to store the effect time, which is the period during which the synchronous effect is performed based on the RTC292, and the synchronous effect (time effect) is performed based on the effect time stored in the storage area. It will be done.

The activation flag 223α is set on by the time setting process 2 executed in the activation process 2 of the voice lamp control device (S1262 in FIG. 132). Then, by the identification number input process, it is set to off when a predetermined time (20 minutes) has elapsed since the activation flag was turned on or when the identification number input operation is performed (S4504 in FIG. 135). This activation flag 223α is used to perform a process (identification number input process) that enables operation only within a predetermined time after the power of the game machine is activated, and the activation flag 223α is turned on. The identification number can be entered only when there is.

Next, the effect time selection table 222b stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 (a) schematically shows the effect time selection table 222b, and FIG. 125 (b) schematically shows the effect time timetable selected by the effect time selection table 222b. Is.

The effect time selection table 222b is used when setting specific effect time data from a plurality of effect time data stored in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. In the present embodiment, the effect time selection table 222b is used. A specific effect time data is set by using the identification number that can be set and input by the operator and the day of the week data that is the time information acquired from RTC292 as parameters.

In addition, the day of the week data includes items for event 1 and event 2 separately from the days of the week from Sunday to Saturday. This is an item for special days such as holidays and anniversaries. The date of the date corresponding to this event 1 or event 2 is set so that the event item is used with priority over the item of the day of the week (Sun to Saturday).

Next, a timetable for each effect time will be described with reference to FIG. 125 (b). FIG. 125 (b) shows a timetable of each effect time selected by the effect time selection table 222b. Different timetables are set for the production time from "I" to "XI". "A", "B", and "D" described on the timetable are the effect modes set in the period, and indicate the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode D, respectively. .. The numbers below it are the hours (minutes) that indicate the period.

Of each effect mode, the effect mode A is a period during which a normal effect is performed, and the effect mode B and the effect mode D are periods during which a time effect (synchronous effect) is performed. In particular, the effect mode D is set so that the transition frequency is lower than that of the effect mode B, and during the period of the effect mode D, an effect that provides information that may be advantageous to the player is executed. Therefore, when the time effect (synchronous effect) is started, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the effect mode D may be entered.

The effect mode C is an effect mode that shifts only when there is a big hit in the hold storage at the end of the effect mode B and the effect mode D, that is, whether or not the effect mode shifts according to the game lottery result. Although the description is omitted in FIG. 125 (b), both the production mode A and the production mode C are actually set after the production mode B and the production mode D, and the game lottery is performed. The effect mode is set so as to be appropriately selected according to the result.

In the present embodiment, "I" to "VIII" are selected as the production time selected using the normal items (Sunday to Saturday) in the day of the week data, and special items (event 1, event 2) in the day of the week data. ) Is used, "X" and "XI" are assigned as the effect time selected.

Here, the production time "I" will be described. The effect time "I" is a timetable in which the effect mode A (normal period) is executed for 55 minutes, then the effect mode B (time effect (synchronous effect)) is executed for 5 minutes, and the process is repeated.

Next, the production time "II" will be described. In the production time "II", after the production mode A (normal period) is executed for 55 minutes, the production mode B (time production (synchronous production)) is 5 minutes and the production mode D (time production (synchronous production)) is 3. Minutes, that is, time effects (synchronous effects) are executed for a total of 8 minutes. Then, after the effect mode A is executed for 52 minutes, the effect mode B is executed again for 5 minutes.

The production time "I" and the production time "II" are set so that the time during which the time production (synchronous production) is performed is different. Similarly, the effect times "I" to "VIII" are set so that the period during which the time effect (synchronous effect) is performed is different (some parts are the same). However, no matter which effect time is selected, the timing at which the time effect (synchronous effect) is started is set to be the same. The period of the production mode A is different between the production time "I" and the production time "II" described above so that the time production (synchronous production) is started 55 minutes and 115 minutes after the start. .. With this configuration, even if various production times are selected, a sense of unity can be achieved by matching the timing at which the time production (synchronous production) is started (the timing at which the production mode A is switched to the production mode B). You can perform a certain effect. In addition, since the player cannot grasp whether the time production is set to 5 minutes or 8 minutes at the timing when the time production is started, whether the time production is extended or not. You can watch the time production while enjoying whether or not it is, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the production time "X" and "XI", which are the production times selected only when a special item such as "event 1" or "event 2" is referred to as the day of the week data, are provided. .. As shown in FIG. 125 (b), these two production times "X" and "XI" are set so as to be clearly different from the other production times, and the time production ( Synchronous production) occupies half of the total time, and in the production time "XI", all the time is defined as time production (synchronous production).

In this way, when a normal item (from Sunday to Saturday) is used as the day of the week data, the player does not notice the difference in the period during which the time production is performed as much as possible (the player does not notice at the start of the time production). However, when special items (event 1 and event 2) are used as the day of the week data, the production time is set so that the period during which the time production is performed can be clarified.

In the present embodiment, the effect time is set as described above, but another method may be used as the method for setting the effect time. For example, the effect time corresponding to the identification number may be selected without using the day of the week data in the effect time selection table. When such a configuration is used, the time information acquired from RTC292 is referred to, and when it is determined that the date has changed, the content of the effect time given corresponding to the identification number is changed. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the present embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the identification number is not set by the operator, the identification number "I" stored as the initial value in the identification number storage area 223x of the RAM 223 is used, but the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is obtained. When it is determined that the date has changed by reference, the identification number stored as the initial value in the identification number area 223x may be changed. By doing so, it is possible to change the period during which the time effect is performed without performing the operation of inputting the identification number, and the work of the operator can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the synchronous effect is configured by referring to the time information acquired from the RTC292. However, any configuration can be used as long as the period for performing the synchronous effect can be set, and a different configuration is used instead of the RTC292. You may use it.

As another configuration, for example, a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the time when the power is turned on is provided, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is possible to set to enter a predetermined period in which the synchronous effect can be executed, or a frame button 22. It is conceivable that a predetermined information is input by operating the above, and the synchronization effect is entered into a predetermined period in which the synchronous effect can be executed based on the input predetermined information.

Specifically, in order to display the effect mode (the effect mode stored on hold) scheduled to be executed by the specific pachinko machine 10 in synchronization with the other pachinko machine 10, the specific pachinko machine 10 The third symbol display device 81 outputs the effect information including the information indicating the effect mode stored on hold as a password that can be input to the pachinko machine 10. By inputting the password into the other pachinko machine 10, the player sets a specific effect mode based on the effect information included in the input password in the other pachinko machine 10. Then, when the player executes the effect mode set at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to synchronize with the effect mode executed by the specific pachinko machine 10.

When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to use RTC292 to include information indicating the time when the effect mode stored on hold is actually executed in the effect information described above. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the effect mode synchronized between the specific pachinko machine 10 and the other pachinko machine 10 at that time simply by inputting the password into the other pachinko machine 10.

Further, the effect information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be a two-dimensional information code which is information that can be acquired by an external device (mobile terminal) instead of a password. With this configuration, it is possible to acquire the effect information on the mobile terminal and transmit the effect information to a distant player by communication to execute the effect mode synchronized between the distant pachinko machines.

It should be noted that what is synchronized in this way is not limited to the effect mode that is reserved and stored, and may be an effect mode during a big hit. Further, in the production mode of the pachinko machine 10 (main pachinko machine) that is the source of synchronization and the pachinko machine 10 (slave pachinko machine) on the synchronization side, the secondary pachinko machine is synchronized only when the game is not being played. This may be possible, or the display area of the third symbol display device 81 may be divided and displayed even during the special symbol game.

By using such a configuration, the player can set a predetermined period during which the synchronous effect can be executed. Therefore, for example, the player can arbitrarily experience the synchronous effect, and it is possible to alleviate the tiredness of the game. It becomes.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control unit in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 130. In the fourth embodiment, the order in which the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 are digested is different from that of the second embodiment described above. That is, in the above-described second embodiment, the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is controlled to be preferentially digested with respect to the reserved ball of the special symbol 1, but in the present embodiment, the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 1 are controlled. Control is performed to digest the reserved balls of symbol 2 in the order of winning. Since the other points are the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S120). This special symbol variation process 2 (S120) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing 2, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S4001). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S4001: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S4001: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S4002), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not fluctuating (S4002: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e (variation display in the special symbol) Acquires the number of holds N2) (S4003). Next, it is determined whether the holding ball of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1) or the holding ball of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) is used for the fluctuation execution. The variation execution determination process for setting the flag 203i is executed (S4004). The variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127.

It is determined whether the variation execution flag 203i set by the variation execution determination process (S4004) is the variation execution in the special figure 1 (S4005), and if it is not the variation execution in the special figure 1 (S4005: No), the variation It is determined whether the execution flag 203i is the variable execution of the special figure 2 (S4010), and if it is not the variable execution of the special figure 2 (S4010: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the variable execution flag 203i is variable execution in the special figure 1 (S4005: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S4006), and the special symbol changed by the calculation is performed. 1 A hold ball number command indicating the value of the hold ball number counter 203d is set (S4007). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S4007, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S4008). In the process of S4008, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting the variation display (S4009). The special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.

In the processing of S4005, if the variation execution flag 203i is not the variation execution of the special figure 1 (S4005: No), it is determined whether the variation execution flag 203i is the variation execution of the special figure 2 (S4010), and the variation execution flag If 203i is the variable execution of special figure 2 (S4010: Yes), the same processing as that for the holding ball of special drawing 1 described above is performed for the holding ball of special drawing 2.

Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S4011), and a reserved ball command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S4012). By the reserved ball number command set here, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 is updated. After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S4012, the data stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is shifted (S4013), and the special symbol for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37. 2 The fluctuation start process is executed (S4014). The special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 129.

In the process of S4002, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S4015). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S4015: No) has not elapsed, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S4016), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4015, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S4015: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4017). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol 1 variation start process (S4009) described later with reference to FIG. 128 or the special symbol 2 variation start process (S4014) described later with reference to FIG. 129. When this special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing or special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. More specifically, in the case of the jackpot of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the jackpot is A or the jackpot B according to the value of the first hit type counter C2, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is determined. In the case of, it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is obtained according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S4017 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol (the result of this lottery) performed by the special symbol variation start processing is special. It is determined whether or not the symbol is a big hit (S4018). Then, if the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S4018: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S4019), and the process proceeds to S4022.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4018, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S4018: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is larger than 0 (S4020), and the time saving medium counter 203g If it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S4020: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S4021), and the process proceeds to S4022. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 0 (S4020: No), the processing of S4021 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4022.

In the process of S4022 executed after the process of S4019, S4020, or S4021, the LED lighting and the third symbol display device 81, which are the display modes of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S4017, are displayed. A stop command is set to synchronize the fluctuation stop of (S4022).

Next, the variation execution determination process (S4004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S4004). This variation execution determination process (S4004) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 126) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and is the process executed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. The effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the display device 81 is set to the value of various counters stored in either the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b. It is a process for determining whether to execute based on.

In the variation execution determination process, first, by setting the variation execution flag 203i to 0, initialization is performed (S4101), and data in the variation order storage area 203j is acquired (S4102). After that, the data in the variable order storage area 203j is shifted (S4103). In the process of S4103, the data stored in the first area to the eighth area of the variable order storage area 203j is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → hold 3rd area, 5th area → 4th area, 6th area → The data in each area is shifted in the order of 5th area, 7th area → 6th area on hold, 8th area → 7th area on hold, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (S4104).

When it is determined in the process of S4104 that the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (S4104: Yes), the variable execution flag 203i is set to the variable execution in the special figure 1 (S4105), and this process is terminated. , Return to the special symbol variation process 2.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the special figure 1 (S4104: No), it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is the special figure 2 (S4106). When it is determined in the process of S4106 that the data in the execution area is the special figure 2 (S4106: Yes), the variable execution flag 203i is set to the variable execution in the special figure 2 (S4107), and this process is terminated. , Return to the special symbol variation process 2.

When it is determined in the process of S4106 that the data in the execution area is not the special figure 2 (S4106: No), since there is no reserved ball for variable execution, the present process is terminated with the variable execution flag 203i in the initial state. , Return to special symbol change processing.

Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S4009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S4009). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S4009) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 126) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of.

In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing, first, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection of the first special symbol stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Each value of the counter C3 is acquired (S4201), and it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S4202). Specifically, when the probability change counter 203g is larger than 0, it is determined that the probability change is in progress, and when the probability change counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the probability change is not in progress. When it is determined in the processing of S4202 that the probability is changing (S4202: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S4203), and the processing of S4205. Move to. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value (FIG. 52 (a)) at the time of high probability in the first random number table 202a. Judgment is made by comparing the values (winning values) that have been set one by one (S4203). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit, and if it is in the range of "10 to 399", it is determined to be out of range (see FIG. 52 (a)). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability is not changing (S4202: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value at the low probability of the special symbol big hit random number table 202a (S4204), and the processing of S4205 is performed. Move on to. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first hit random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value (FIG. 52 (a)) at the time of high probability in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing the values (winning values) that have been set one by one (S4204). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is "7", it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 6" or "8 to 399", it is determined that it is out of the range (FIG. 52 (a)). )reference).

Next, a winning information command including the lottery result is set (S4205), and the process proceeds to S4206. In the process of S4206, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S4203 or S4204 is a big hit. When it is determined that the lottery result acquired in the processing of S4203 or S4204 is a big hit (S4206: Yes), the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 is based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S4201. The display mode is set (S4207), and the process proceeds to S4208.

More specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202b, and the jackpots (big hit A, jackpot B) of two types of special symbols are compared. Of these, determine which type of jackpot is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "60 to 99", it is a jackpot. It is determined to be B (16R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 52 (b)).

In the process of S4207, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S4208). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S4208, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (d)). Specifically, in the case of a big hit, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach (30 seconds), and if it is in the range of "51 to 179", it is super reach (60 seconds). , If it is in the range of "180 to 198", it becomes a fluctuation pattern of special reach (90 seconds) (see FIG. 53 (b)).

In the process of S4206, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S4206: No), the display mode of the outlier is set (S4209). In the process of S4209, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the above, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. For example, as the stop type, "front and rear out reach", "reach other than front and back out", "complete off" and the like are specified.

Next, the deviation pattern is determined (S4210). It is determined based on the deviation (normal) selection table 202d2 at the time of normal (when the probability change counter 203 is 0), and based on the deviation (probability) selection table 202d3 at the time of probability change (when the probability change counter 203g is larger than 0). It is determined. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S4208 and S4210, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Determine the fluctuation time of. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (d)). Specifically, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 98", it is a short deviation (7 seconds), and if it is in the range of "99 to 198", if it is completely out of the range during the probability change. If it is a long deviation (10 seconds), if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", it is a normal reach (30 seconds), and if it is in the range of "150 to 197", it is a super reach (60). Seconds), and if it is "198", it is a special reach (90 seconds).

When the processing of S4208 and S4210 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S4208 and S4210 is set (S4211). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processes of S4208 and S4210 is set (S4212). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 67). Will be sent. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S4212 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (S4014) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (S4014). This special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S4014) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 59) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and is a process of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area.

In this special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing, similarly to the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S4009), the first hit random number counter C1 of the second special symbol and the determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a are set by the processing of S4301. Obtain the lottery result based on. Except for the processing of S4307 and S4309, the same processing as the processing of S4009 is performed on the data of the execution area in the reserved ball storage area of the second special symbol, and therefore the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The process of S4307 is executed when the lottery result acquired in the process of S4303 or S4304 is a big hit (S4306: Yes). In the process of S4307, the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is determined based on the selection table 202e2 for special figure 2 (FIG. 54 (c)) (S4307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S4307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the time saving variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54 (a) to 54 (c)). Specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the entire range of values), the fluctuation pattern is B (0.5 seconds) per time reduction (see FIG. 54 (c)).

Further, the process of S4309 is executed when the lottery result acquired in the process of S4303 or S4304 is out of order (S4306: No). In the process of S4309, the deviation pattern is determined based on the special figure 2 time saving fluctuation pattern table 202e2 (FIG. 54 (c)) (S4309). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S4309, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the time saving variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54 (a) to 54 (c)). Specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the entire range of values), the fluctuation pattern is B (0.5 seconds), which is out of time (see FIG. 54 (c)).

Next, the start winning process 2 (S121) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S121). This start winning process 2 (S121) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 63a, and when there is a starting winning, This is a process for holding the value indicated by various random number counters.

When the start winning process 2 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 63a (S4401). Here, the incoming ball of the first starting port 63a is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 63a (S4401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S4402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S4403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first starting port 63a (S4401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first starting port 63a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first starting port 63a (S4401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S4403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is added by 1 (S4404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S4405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S4405, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to a special symbol. 1 The reserved ball storage area 203a is stored (S4406), the special figure 1 is stored in the first area of the variable order storage area 203j (S4407), and the process proceeds to S4408. In the process of S4407, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e are referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is set, if the value is 3, the third area is set, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is set as the first area. By discriminating the value set in the variation order storage area 203j by the variation execution determination process (S4004) described above, the starting port changes the first special symbol as in the present embodiment, and the second special symbol. Even if there are two types of fluctuations, one that changes the design, the fluctuations can be started in the order in which the starting ports are won.

In the process of S4408, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second starting port 63b (starting winning) (S4408). When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 63b (S4408: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subjected to the same processing as when the ball has won the first starting port 63a.

More specifically, if the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S4409) and the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) ( S4410: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is added by 1 (S4411), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S4412). Then, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b (S4413), and the first area of the variable order storage area 203j is stored. Special figure 2 is set (S4414), and the process proceeds to S4415. The determination of the first area in S4414 is performed in the same manner as the process in S4407.

If there is no prize in the second starting port 63b (S4408: No), or even if there is a prize in the second starting port 63b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not less than 4. (S4410: No), the look-ahead process is executed (S4415), and the main process is terminated as it is.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 146. In the fourth embodiment, the contents of the eight hold effect, the composite display effect, and the time effect (synchronous effect) are different from those of the second embodiment described above. The other parts are the same, and the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the start-up process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the start-up process 2. This start-up process 2 is a process performed when the power of the voice lamp control device 113 is turned on, as in the second embodiment described above. In the start-up process 2, the processes S1201 to S1211 are executed as in the second embodiment. After that, the time setting process 2 (S1251 in FIG. 132) is executed, and the process proceeds to the main process 2.

Here, the time setting process 2 (S1251) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the time setting process 2 (S1251). This time setting process 2 (S1251) is a process executed in the start-up process 2, and sets the time (time) at the time of power-on (power-on) based on the time information acquired from RTC292, and starts the power. This is a process for setting the activation flag 223α to turn on the process for executing the process performed only from the time to the predetermined time.

In the time setting process 2, the time information is acquired from the RTC292, which is a timekeeping means, as in the second embodiment described above (S1221). After that, based on the acquired time information, the start-up time is set in the set time storage area 223j (S1261), and the start-up flag 223α is set to ON (S1262).

By executing this process and setting the start flag 223α to ON, it is possible to perform a process (identification number input process (see FIG. 135)) that can be operated only for a predetermined time after the power is turned on.

Next, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the main process 2. This main process 2 is executed after the start-up process 2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed. The main process 2 executes the processes S1301 to S1306 as in the second embodiment described above. After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 is executed (S1351). The frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1351) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 134.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1351) is executed, the processes S1308 to S1312 are executed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above. After that, the variable display setting process 2 (S1352) is executed. The variable display setting process 2 (S1352) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 139. After the variable display setting process 2 (S1352) is executed, the processing is executed in the order of the eight effect setting process (S1353) and the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354). Then, after that, the processes of S1317 to S1321 are executed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above. The details of the eight effect setting process (S1353) will be described later with reference to FIG. 136, and the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354) with reference to FIG. 144.

Here, the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2. This frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S1351) is executed in the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S1351) of the second embodiment described above is performed. In addition to the same contents as in S1307) of FIG. 80, this is a process for inputting an identification number used for setting a period (time effect period) for performing the synchronization effect described later.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2, first, the identification number input processing (S1851) is executed.

Here, the identification number input process will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the identification number input process (S1851).

In the identification number input process (S1851), first, it is determined whether or not the symbol is changing (S4501). If it is determined that the symbol is changing (S4501: Yes), this process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol is not changing (S4501: No), it is determined whether or not the activation flag 223α is set to ON (S4502). If the activation flag 223α is not set to ON (S4501: Yes), this process is completed.

On the other hand, when the start flag 223α is set to ON (S4501: No), it is determined whether or not 20 minutes have passed since the start (S4503). This determination is made by comparing the start-up time set in the set time storage area (S1261 in FIG. 132) with the current time information acquired from the RTC292. Then, if 20 minutes have passed since the start-up, the start-up flag is set to off (S4504), and this process is completed. On the other hand, if 20 minutes have not passed since the start-up, it is determined whether or not there is an identification number input operation (S4504).

Here, the identification number input operation will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute a predetermined input operation using the frame button 22, and is within a predetermined time (within 20 minutes in the present embodiment) and a third after the power is turned on. When the symbol is not changed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 (for example, while the demo screen is being displayed), pressing the frame button 22 once displays the identification number input screen. After inputting the desired identification number on the identification number input screen, the identification number can be input by selecting "input complete" displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a method of inputting the identification number, a plurality of input numbers are displayed on the display screen, and one of them may be selected, or a plurality of numbers from 0 to 9 displayed on the display screen may be input. You can also enter the identification number by selecting it, or you can display "random" on the display screen and select "random" to automatically select a predetermined identification number from multiple identification numbers. It may be a method.

Further, in this embodiment, the predetermined time after the power supply is started is set to 20 minutes, which is the time during which the identification numbers can be input to all the pachinko machines 10 even if the power supplies of the pachinko machines 10 are started at the same time. It is set as, and the time may be set as appropriate.

Further, in this embodiment, the period during which the identification number can be input is set as a predetermined time after the power is turned on, but this is intended to prevent the player during the game from inputting the identification number. Therefore, other methods may be adopted as long as the present purpose can be achieved, for example, by pressing a switch provided at a position where the player cannot operate (for example, the back surface of the game machine). , The identification number input operation screen is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, or it is determined that the time information measured by the RTC292 is outside the business hours, and only the hours outside the business hours are determined. The identification number input operation screen may be displayed. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to prevent the player from inputting the identification number.

Return to FIG. 135 to continue the description. If the identification number input operation has not been performed in S4505, this process ends. That is, if the identification number input operation is not performed in a state where the predetermined time has not elapsed since the power was turned on, the identification number input operation may be performed before the predetermined time elapses. This discrimination is repeated until the elapse of.

On the other hand, when the identification number input operation is performed (S4505: Yes), the input identification number is stored in the identification number storage area 223x (S4506), the activation flag 223α is set to off (S4504), and this process is performed. To finish.

In the identification number input process described above, the identification number, which is a parameter necessary for setting the period (time effect period) in which the synchronization effect described later is performed, is set within a limited time within a predetermined time after the power is turned on. Only can be set, and the period during which the synchronization effect is performed is changed based on the identification number set by this process. Therefore, the identification number can be easily input to the store side, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily inputting the identification number. Therefore, the store side intentionally assigns the same identification number to the adjacent units. , When an attempt is made to perform a related synchronous effect between adjacent units, the identification number set by the store side is not changed by the player, and the desired synchronous effect can be reliably performed.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 134. After the identification number input process (S1851) is executed, the processes from S1811 to S1813 are performed in the same manner as the process performed in the second embodiment described above, and the hold effect flag is set to ON in S1813. If this is not the case, the eight hold effect processing described later (see S1852 in FIG. 136) is executed, and then the button effect process described later (see S1853 in FIG. 137) is executed. On the other hand, when the hold effect flag is set to ON, the processes of S1814 and S1815 are executed in the same manner as the processes performed in the second embodiment described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, eight hold effect processing (S1852) will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the eight hold effect processing (S1852). In this eight-piece hold effect process (S1852), eight effects are performed when eight reserved balls are accumulated, a special continuation effect is continuously performed after that, and eight effects and a special continuation effect are performed. This is a process of executing the effect when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) while the additional effect is executed while the pending symbol is "push" (notification pending symbol). This is a process for producing an effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 that is operated when it is displayed.

In the eight-piece hold effect process (S1852), first, it is determined whether or not the eight-piece effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4601). If the eight effect flags 223i are not set on (S4601: No), then it is determined whether or not the special continuation effect flag 223t is set on (S4602). If the special continuous effect flag 223t is not set to on (S4602: No), then it is determined whether or not the additional effect flag is set to on (S4603). If the additional effect flag is not set to ON (S4603: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when the eight effect flags 223i are set to on (S4601: Yes), the corresponding eight effect on hold is executed (S4604), and the process proceeds to S4603. It should be noted that the timing when the notification pending symbol is not displayed during the eight productions, that is, the notification pending symbol (the "push" symbol shown in FIG. 110 (a)) is already displayed as a result display by the operation of the frame button 22. If the frame button 22 is operated at the timing after changing to the symbol (“Big hit !!!?” Symbol shown in FIG. 111 (a)), the effect is expected by voice instead of executing the effect on the reserved symbol. A so-called fanning effect is performed, such as expressing the degree or changing the color of the reserved pattern (for example, "big hit !!!?") That has already been changed by the eight effects.

If the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON in S4602 (S4602: Yes), the corresponding pending special continuation effect is executed (S4605), and the process proceeds to S4603. If the special continuation effect is being produced (while the special continuation effect flag 223t is on) and the reserved symbol has already been changed by the operation of the frame button 22, the operation input of the frame button 22 is performed, as described above. Similar to the eight productions, the fanning effect is performed based on the operation of the frame button.

In S4603, when the additional effect flag 223u is set to on (S4603: Yes), the corresponding additional effect flag 223u on hold is set to off (S4606), and the corresponding additional effect on hold is executed (S4603). S4607).

As described above, in the eight hold effect (S1852) executed during the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S1351 in FIG. 134), various flags (eight effects) at the timing when the frame button 22 is operated Since the effects to be executed are different based on the setting status of the flag 223i, the special continuous effect flag 223t, and the additional effect flag 223u), the player can experience various effects just by performing the same operation. It becomes.

Next, the button effect processing (S1853) will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the button effect processing (S1853). This button effect processing (S1853) is a process for setting a display effect when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) during the composite display effect, and is based on the button repeated hitting mission displayed in FIG. 114 (b). This is a process corresponding to the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 and the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 based on the “push” symbol displayed in FIG. 116 (b).

In the button effect processing (S1853), first, it is determined whether or not the button effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4701). If the button effect flag 223r is not set to ON (S4701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the button effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4701: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the button effect stop symbol (“push” symbol in FIG. 116 (b)) has been stopped. Determine (S4702).

Here, the button effect flag 223r will be described. The button effect flag 223r is a flag set to be turned on by the button effect selection process 2 (see FIG. 142) described later, and is turned on when the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the composite display effect. It is set.

In S4702, when the button effect stop symbol is stopped (S4702: Yes), a display command indicating a composite effect mode corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S4703). That is, it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 this time is to operate the "Push" symbol displayed in FIG. 116 (b), and the "Push" symbol is changed to a numerical symbol. Set the display command.

On the other hand, when the button effect stop symbol is not after the stop (S4702: No), it is determined whether the button operation valid period has elapsed (S4705). The button operation valid period is the period shown by (b) in FIG. 113, and is measured by a counter (not shown). Here, when the button operation valid period has elapsed (S4705: Yes), it is determined whether or not the button pressing condition is satisfied (S4706). In this embodiment, the button pressing condition is that the button is pressed 50 times (see FIG. 114 (b)).

If the button pressing condition is not satisfied (S4706: No), the button effect flag is set to off (S4704), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the button pressing condition is satisfied (S4706: Yes), this process ends as it is. That is, if the button pressing condition is not satisfied when the button operation valid period elapses, the composite display effect is not continued, and after the period (b) of FIG. In order to shift to c), the button effect flag is set to off so that the button effect process is not performed.

Here, the process returns to S4705 to continue the description. If the button operation valid period has not elapsed in S4705 (S4705: No), the number of button presses is accumulated (S4707), and this process ends.

The button effect processing has been described above, but in this process, when the composite display effect is selected by the button effect selection process 2 (see FIG. 142), the button operation valid period before the stop symbol stop for the button effect is stopped. It is determined whether or not the button has been pressed a sufficient number of times to achieve the button pressing condition (during the button repeated pressing mission), and further, the button pressing is performed after the button effect stop symbol (“push” symbol) is stopped. When this is done, a process of setting a display command for changing the stop symbol for button effect to a numerical symbol is performed. Further, when the button pressing condition cannot be achieved, the button effect flag is set to off, so that the normal effect pattern (see FIG. 115 (a)) is displayed without stopping the button effect stop symbol. Will be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the advance notice selection process 2 (S1454) executed by the command determination process (S1312) in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. ) Will be explained. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process 2 (S1454). The advance notice selection process 2 (S1454) is a process of setting a display advance notice command based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 and the effect mode set by the synchronous effect management process 2 (see FIG. 144) described later.

In the advance notice selection process 2 (S1454), first, the processes S1501 to S1507 are executed in the same manner as the advance notice selection process executed in the second embodiment described above. Here, when it is determined in the process of S1505 that the effect mode C is not set, it is determined whether the effect mode D is set (S1541). If the effect mode D is not set (S1541: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the effect mode D is set (S1541: Yes), the game state advance notice effect is selected (S1542) based on the hit / fail determination result and the effect counter, and a display notice command indicating the selected advance notice effect is displayed. Is set (S1543). Then, this process ends.

Here, the display advance notice command that is set when the effect mode D is set will be described. The effect mode D is set only when the period during which the synchronous effect (time effect) is performed is set longer than usual (5 minutes) by the effect time setting process (see FIG. 145) (8 minutes). The mode. In such an effect mode D, a notice effect that can be advantageous to the player is performed so that the player is satisfied with entering the effect mode D. For example, a notice effect that notifies that the current game situation is changing, a notice effect that does not appear in another effect mode, or a notice effect that does not appear in another effect mode, or a direct game result, but is accumulated by the player. Information that can acquire a large amount of points (points for raising the level of the character) and information that can acquire privileged images (information display that can be read by a mobile phone) can be considered.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the winning command receiving process 2 (S1312) executed in the command determination process (S1312) in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 133). S1461) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the winning command receiving process 2 (S1461). The winning command receiving process 2 (S1461) is a process performed when a winning command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received.

In the winning command receiving process 2 (S1461), first, the processes of S1511 and S1512 are executed in the same manner as the winning command receiving process (S1411 of FIG. 73) executed in the second embodiment described above, and the additional effect is achieved. It is determined whether the flag is set to on (S1551). When the additional effect flag is not set to ON (S1551: No), the processes S1514 to S1522 are executed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above.

On the other hand, if the additional effect flag is set to on (S1551: Yes), the additional effect is set (S1552), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the variation display setting process 2 (S1352) executed by the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 2 (S1352).

In the variation display setting process 2 (S1352), first, the processes of S1601 and S1602 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process (S1313 in FIG. 74) executed in the second embodiment described above. Then, the variation pattern selection process 2 is executed (S1651).

Here, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651) will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651). The fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1651) is based on the current effect mode and the acquired effect counter value, as in the variation pattern selection process (S1603 in FIG. 75) executed in the second embodiment described above. This is a process of selecting and setting a fluctuation pattern.

In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651), first, the processes of S1611 and S1612 are executed in the same manner as the variation pattern selection process (S1603) executed in the second embodiment described above. If the effect mode A is set in S1612 (S1612: Yes), the button effect selection process 2 is executed (S1661). The button effect selection process 2 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 142.

On the other hand, when the effect mode A is not set in S1612, S1614 and S1615 are executed in the same manner as the variation pattern selection process (S1603) executed in the second embodiment described above. Then, in S1614, if the effect mode B is not set (S1614: No), then it is determined whether the effect mode C is set (S1662).

When it is determined that the effect mode C is set (S1662: Yes), the variation pattern is selected and set from the variation pattern selection table of the corresponding time effect extension period. On the other hand, when the effect mode C is not set (S1662: No), the current effect mode is D, so the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table of the special extension effect period corresponding to the effect mode D. Set.

Here, the button effect selection process 2 (S1661) will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the button effect selection process 2 (S1661).

In the button effect selection process 2, first, the processes of S1621 and S1622 are executed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above. Then, in the process of S1622, when the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern selection table is a button effect, the number of button presses is set (S1671). The number of times the button is pressed is the number of times the button is pressed in order to achieve the button repeated hitting mission (see FIG. 114 (b)) performed during the composite display effect, and is set to 50 times in the present embodiment. .. In the present embodiment, the number of button presses is set to 50 times, which is a condition for achieving the mission during the composite display effect. However, as a mission (condition setting for reaching the Push effect) imposed during the composite display effect, the number of button presses is increased or decreased. It may be set, or it may be a condition that the frame button is operated at a predetermined timing.

Then, after executing the processes of S1623 and S1624 in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above, this process ends.

As described above, the button effect selection process 2 is a push effect performed during the composite display effect in addition to the process of the button effect selection process (S1613 in FIG. 76) executed in the second embodiment described above. The number of button presses is set as a condition setting for reaching. By setting this condition, even if the button effect is selected as the variation pattern, the player operates the frame button 22 and shifts to the push effect unless the set condition (pressing the button 50 times) is achieved. Since there is no such thing, the player actively operates the frame button 22 to see the special effect and participates in the game machine, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be enjoyed.

Also, when the player wants to see a normal production, he does not have to press the button. It is possible to select a later production depending on the mood of the player.

In the present embodiment, the number of button presses is set to 50, but it is preferable that the number of button presses can be changed each time the button effect is selected as the variation pattern. In addition, even if the number of button presses set as the condition setting is achieved, the push production is not always performed. For example, when the lottery result of the game is a big hit, the push production is always performed, but the lottery result of the game is lost. In that case, the push effect may be shifted only with a predetermined probability (30%). By doing so, it is possible to raise the expectation for the big hit just by shifting to the push effect, and the player can more actively participate in the game using the operation of the frame button 22.

In addition, by making it possible to change the number of times the button is pressed, which is set as a condition setting, the lottery result is lost for the player, so it may not have shifted to the push effect, or the condition has not been achieved, so the push effect is used. It can be difficult to know if the transition did not occur. Further, by setting the number of button presses set as the condition setting to one, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

When setting the number of times the button is pressed, for example, it is preferable to set the number of times to be set only when the lottery result of the game is a big hit. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the result of the game is a big hit at a display timing different from the usual effect, and he / she will pay attention to the effect of the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), the blank symbol is changed to the "push" symbol, and the "push" symbol is compositely displayed, but the blank symbol is changed to various characters. It may be changed so that a sentence (message) corresponding to the character is displayed in a composite manner. With such a configuration, at the timing when the blank pattern is changed to various characters, it becomes possible for the player to combine the characters displayed and predict the text to be compositely displayed, which will be used in later games. It is possible to have a sense of expectation. In addition, when such a configuration is used, it is preferable to synthesize and display a sentence by using a part of the displayed characters, instead of using all the various characters to be displayed and displaying them in a composite manner. By doing so, it is possible to make the player predict sentences of various patterns. In addition, in order to make it possible to identify the characters that are always used, if the mode (color, size, etc.) of the characters that are always used is made different from other characters, the player can see the composite display. It becomes possible to give hints of the sentences to be created, and it becomes possible to make it more enjoyable to predict the sentences to be created in the composite display.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, eight production setting processes (S1353) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the setting process (S1353) during the production of eight pieces. The eight production during production setting process (S1353) is a process for performing various settings related to the reserved symbol effect (see FIGS. 110 to 112) performed based on the number of reserved symbols (number of stored symbols).

In the eight-piece effect setting process (S1353), first, it is determined whether or not the eight-piece effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4801). When the eight effect flags 223i are set to on (S4801: Yes), the additional effect flag 223u is set to on (S4802). As described above, the additional effect flag 223u is a flag used when determining whether or not to execute the additional winning effect. Then, it is determined whether the value of the eight effect counters 223v is larger than 0 (S4803). As described above, the eight effect counter 223v is a counter that counts the number of symbol fluctuations since the execution of the eight effects using the reserved symbols, and if the value is larger than 0, the eight effects continue. Represents the state of being.

When the value of the eight effect counter 223v is larger than 0, that is, when the eight effect continues (S4803: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the 8-effect counter 223v is not larger than 0, that is, when the value of the 8-effect counter 223v is 0 (S4803: No), the 8-effect flag 223i is set to off (S4804). Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved items is more than 4 (S4805).

If the number of pending items is more than 4 (S4805: Yes), the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to on (S4806), then the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is set to 5 (S4807), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when the number of reserved items is not more than 4 (4 or less) (S4805: No), the additional effect flag 223u is set to off (s4811), and this process is terminated.

Returning to S4801, the explanation is continued. When the eight effect flags 223i are not on (S4801: No), it is determined whether the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to on (S4808). If the special continuation effect flag 223t is not set to ON (S4808: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4808: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is larger than 0 (S4809).

If the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is greater than 0 (S4809: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is not larger than 0 (when the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is 0) (S4809: No), the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to off (S4810). The additional effect flag 223u is set to off (S4811). Then, this process ends.

As described above, in this eight-piece effect setting process, when determining whether to perform the eight-piece effect, the special continuous effect, and the additional prize-winning effect, which are performed based on the number of reserved symbols (number of stored memories). Various flags to be referred to are set.

Next, the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354). The synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354) is a process of setting the effect mode (A to D) based on the time information acquired from RTC292, and is the synchronous effect management process executed in the second embodiment described above. One effect mode to be set is added to (S1314).

In the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354), the effect time setting process (S1751) is first executed. This effect time setting process (S1751) is a time setting process 2 (S1251 in FIG. 132) executed in the start-up process 2 (FIG. 131) executed after the power is turned on by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Using the activation flag 223α set to be turned on in, and the identification number stored in the identification number storage area in the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. , It is a process of setting the production time.

Here, the effect time setting process (S1751) will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the effect time setting process (S1751).

In the production time setting process, first. It is determined whether the production time has already been set (S4901). If the effect time has already been set (S4901: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if the effect time is not set (S4901: No), then it is determined whether the activation flag is set to ON (S4902). If the start flag is set to on (S4902: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if the start flag is not set to ON (S4902: No), the process proceeds to S4903, which will be described later.

That is, in S4902, it is possible to determine that the period during which the pachinko machine 10 can be assigned an identification number has elapsed by looking at the state of the activation flag 223α, and to assign the identification number to the pachinko machine 10. The production time is set after a certain period of time has passed. If the activation flag is turned off without the identification number being input in the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135), the identification number stored as the initial setting in the identification number storage area 223x is used.

After it is determined in S4902 that the activation flag is not set to ON, the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x is acquired (S4903), and the effect time corresponding to the identification number is selected in the effect time selection table. Select from (222b). Then, the selected effect time is stored in the effect time storage area 223y (S4905), and the present process is terminated.

The effect time selection table (222b) used in S4904 is a day of the week created based on the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x and the time information acquired from RTC292, as described above in FIG. 125. It is configured so that the production time can be selected by referring to the data. By using such an effect time selection table 222b, the time provided with the effect time is changed only by changing the day of the week, so that if the effect time is to be changed every day, it is not necessary to change the identification number every day. It is possible to reduce the change work.

In addition to the normal day of the week data, two event days are set based on the time information acquired from RTC292, but the parameters are not limited to this and can be created based on the time information acquired by RTC292. Other parameters may be referenced. As other parameters, a parameter for separating even-numbered days and odd-numbered days, a parameter for identifying holidays, a parameter for identifying dates with the same month and day (doublet), and the like can be considered.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect time is set with reference to two parameters of the day of the week data and the identification number, but the effect time may be set with reference to three or more parameters. By doing so, more complex combinations can be easily provided.

In this embodiment, by making it possible to input an identification number as a parameter that can be set by the operator, a synchronous effect (time) is performed for a plurality of predetermined machines (for example, adjacent pachinko machines 10) at the same timing. Although it is possible to execute the effect), other parameters that can be set by the operator may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the parameter (day of the week data) based on the time information acquired from the RTC292 is used as the parameter set by the pachinko machine 10, but other parameters may be provided. For example, it is advisable to set parameters based on the game information (number of big hits and number of balls) on the previous day of the pachinko machine 10. It is good to do. By configuring in this way,
In addition to the frame button 22, input means such as a touch panel type input means and a selection button (cross button) for selecting information displayed on the display screen are used as a means for the operator to set and input parameters. It may be provided in the machine 10. By providing such an input means, it is possible to easily operate complicated setting input. Further, such an input means may be used for the display effect of the pachinko machine 10.

Return to FIG. 144 to continue the description. After executing the effect time setting process (S1751 in FIG. 145), the processes S1701 to S1705 are performed in the same manner as the synchronous effect management process (S1314 in FIG. 77) executed in the second embodiment described above, and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when the effect mode is not set to the effect mode A in S1702, it is determined whether the effect mode is set to the effect mode B or the effect mode D (S1752).

If it is determined that the mode is not the effect mode B or the effect mode D (S1752: No), the processes S1709 and S1710 are performed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined to be the effect mode B or the effect mode D (S1752: Yes), whether or not the time information (data) acquired from the RTC292 is the time information 4 minutes 57 seconds after the start of the time effect. Is determined (S1753).

As a determination of S1753, the elapsed time may be calculated by comparing the time when the time production is started with the current time, or 4 minutes 57 in advance in the timetable of the production time (see FIG. 125 (b)). A timing after a second may be set so as to determine whether the timing (time) has passed. Further, a timer may be provided to start the time counting from the timing when the time production is started without acquiring the time information from the RTC 292, and the timer may be used to measure 4 minutes 57 seconds.

If the time information acquired from RTC292 does not elapse 4 minutes 57 seconds from the start of the time production (S1753: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the time information acquired from RTC292 has passed 4 minutes 57 seconds from the start of the time production (S1753: Yes), it is determined whether the time production period this time is 5 minutes (S1754).

When the time effect period is 5 minutes (S1754: Yes), that is, when the effect mode is the effect mode C, the process of S1708 is performed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the time effect period is not 5 minutes (S1754: No), that is, when the effect mode is the effect mode D, the extension effect setting process 2 is executed (S1755), and this process ends.

Next, the extension effect setting process 2 (S1755) will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the extension effect setting process 2 (S1755). This extension effect setting process 2 is a process executed when the time effect period is not 5 minutes, that is, when the time effect period is 8 minutes, and in order to extend the time effect period of 5 minutes. This is a process for making necessary settings.

In the extension effect setting process 2 (S1755), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S5001). When it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S5001: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S5002), the effect mode is set to the effect mode A (S5003), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S5001: No), it is determined whether the time effect period (synchronous effect period) has ended (S5004). If the time production period has not ended (S5004: No), it is determined whether or not 5 minutes have passed since the time production was started (S5005). If 5 minutes have not passed since the time effect was started (S5005: No), the revariation effect is set (S5008), and this process ends.

That is, in S5008, it is determined in S1753 of FIG. 144 that 4 minutes 57 seconds have passed since the time production was started, and in S5005 of FIG. 146, 5 minutes have passed since the time production was started. This is a process performed when it is determined that the time is not present, and is a process for setting a revariation effect performed between 4 minutes 57 seconds and 5 minutes after the time effect is started.

Since the re-variation effect is the same as that of the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 5 minutes have passed since the time production was started in S5005 (S5005: Yes), the extension production flag is set to ON (S5006), and then the production mode is set to the production mode D. Is set to (S5007), and this process ends.

Return to S5004 and continue the explanation. When it is determined in S5004 that the time effect period has ended (S5004: Yes), the normal period flag 223 m is set to ON (S5009), and then the effect mode is set to the effect mode A (S5010). Next, it is determined whether or not there is hit information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011).

In the winning information storage area 223a, the winning / failing determination result that is stored on hold and the winning / failing determination result that is currently changing are stored, and a maximum of nine determination results are stored.

If there is no jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011: Yes), the time until the end of the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot is calculated, and that time is used as the extended production time in the extended production time storage area 223q. Set (S5012).

After that, the re-variation effect is set (S5013), the extension effect flag 223p is set to ON (S5014), and the effect mode is set to the effect mode C (S5015). Then, this process ends.

The synchronous effect management process 2 described above is the synchronous effect management executed in the second embodiment described above in that the extended effect setting process 2 is performed as the process related to the effect mode D newly added in the present embodiment. It is different from the process (S1314 in FIG. 77), and the other processes are the same.

In the present embodiment, the effect mode D, that is, even if the time effect period is 8 minutes, as in the other effect modes, when the time effect approaches 5 minutes (after 4 minutes 57 seconds have elapsed), FIG. 120 As shown in (a), a precursor display mode in which the effect symbol is displayed with a slight tremor for 3 seconds (up to the elapse of 5 minutes) is displayed. Therefore, when the time effect period elapses for 5 minutes, the effect can be the same as that of the other pachinko machine 10 in which the effect mode B is set, and the sense of unity of the effect can be enhanced. Further, after the plurality of pachinko machines 10 perform the re-variation effect at the same timing, only the pachinko machine 10 for which the effect mode C or the effect mode D is selected will perform the extended effect, so that the effect mode C or the effect A player playing a pachinko machine 10 in which mode D is selected can feel the feeling that his / her pachinko machine 10 has been selected and can immerse himself in a sense of superiority.

In the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment described above, the time information acquired from the RTC292 can be used in the control related to the synchronous effect so that the plurality of pachinko machines 10 can produce a unified effect. However, for example, in the case of enjoying a synchronized effect with only two adjacent units, the predetermined operation is executed by simultaneously performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 without using the RTC292. The time production may be started from. With such a configuration, it is possible to enjoy the time production at a desired timing and suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect data (display mode) dedicated to the time effect is used, but the effect data for the time effect is set from the effect data (effect data in the normal state) used outside the time effect period. May be used. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of production data. When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to provide a means for limiting the effect data set as the effect data for the time effect so as not to be displayed outside the time effect period (normal state). In addition, the synchronization methods of the above-mentioned production modes may be combined.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148, among the controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the second embodiment described above are different. The points will be described. In the present embodiment, the hold command process 2 (S2461 in FIG. 147) receives a command related to the special continuous effect or the additional effect, and the effect command process 2 (S2463 in FIG. 148) produces eight effects. , The difference is that the processing when the effect command related to the special continuous effect or the additional effect is received is added. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as the controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the second embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the hold command process 2 (S2461) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the hold command process 2 (S2461).

When the hold command process 2 (S2461) is executed, the processes S2801 to S2807 are executed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above. Then, when it is determined in S2805 that the number of received commands is not eight (S2805: No), it is determined whether the received command is a special continuous effect (S2851). When the reception command is determined to be the special continuation effect (S2851: Yes), the corresponding reserved symbol is changed to the special continuation effect symbol and set in the display data table (S2852).

On the other hand, when the received command is not a special continuous effect (S2851: No), it is determined whether the received command is an additional effect (S2853). If it is determined that the reception command is not an additional effect (S2853: No), other hold display settings are executed (S2807), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when the reception command is an additional effect (S2853: Yes), the corresponding reserved symbol is changed to the additional effect symbol and set in the display data table (S2854). Then, other hold display settings are executed (S2807), and this process ends. The change to the additional effect symbol means to change to the "?" Symbol shown in FIG. 111 (b).

The hold command process 2 in the present embodiment is configured to process and set the receive command related to the number of holds and the receive command related to the effect using the hold symbol at different timings. That is, even if both the command related to the reserved number and the command related to the effect using the reserved symbol are stored in the command buffer area, the command related to the reserved number is first processed, and then the command determination process (S2302 in FIG. 86). Is looped, and then the command related to the effect using the reserved symbol is processed. With this configuration, when the reserved symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the normal reserved symbol is once displayed, and then the displayed reserved symbol is the effect symbol. It is possible to reliably perform a display that changes to. Therefore, the player can visually grasp that the number of reserved symbols has increased and the increased reserved symbols have changed to the effect symbols.

By executing the above configuration with the eight effects performed in the present embodiment, it is possible to further exert the effect. That is, the eight effects performed in the present embodiment are effects that can be executed when the number of reserved characters reaches eight, and one effect mode (character string) is displayed using the eight reserved symbols. (Fig. 111 (a)). When performing such a hold symbol effect, if the process of displaying the 8th hold symbol and the process of displaying the 8 effect are performed at the same time, 7 hold symbols are displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol. There was a risk that the display would suddenly switch to eight productions. If the hold display is changed in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize that the eighth hold symbol has occurred. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, even if both the command related to the reserved number and the command related to the effect using the reserved symbol are stored in the command buffer area, the command related to the reserved number is first processed and then processed. By looping the command determination process (S2302 in FIG. 86) and then processing the command related to the effect using the reserved symbol, there is a time lag between the process of the command related to the number of pending symbols and the processing of the command related to the effect using the reserved symbol. Can be provided, and the above-mentioned problems can be prevented.

The period for displaying the 8th reserved symbol may be such that the player can recognize the increased display of the reserved symbol (20 milliseconds or more), and if necessary, the 8th reserved symbol is displayed. A process may be provided in which a time grace is provided (the timing of displaying the eight effects is delayed) between the display and the display of the eight effects.

Further, it is preferable to include the display data in which eight normal reserved symbols are displayed at the beginning of the display data related to the eight effect symbols set in the display data table in S2806 of FIG. 147. By doing so, when the command related to the eight effects is processed and displayed, it is possible to reliably display eight normal reserved symbols.

Next, the effect command process 2 (S2463) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the effect command process 2 (S2463). This effect command process 2 is a point in which processes corresponding to commands of eight effects, a special continuous effect, and an additional effect are added to the effect command process (S2413 in FIG. 90) executed in the second embodiment described above. Since the differences are the same and the other parts are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the effect command process 2 (S2463) is executed, the same as the effect command process (S2413) executed in the second embodiment described above. The processes of S2901 to S2904 are executed. Then, when it is determined in S2903 that it is not a pseudo extension effect (S2903: No), it is determined whether the received command is any of eight effects, a special continuous effect, or an additional effect (S2951). .. If it is neither an eight effect, a special continuous effect, or an additional effect (S2951: No), the processes S2907 to S2912 are executed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2951 that the received command is either an eight effect, a special continuation effect, or an additional effect (S2951: Yes), the eight command corresponding to the command, the special continuation effect Or, set the display data table of the additional effect in the display data table buffer.

In the present embodiment, the technique of setting various effect displays related to the fluctuation of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 has been described, but the voice and lamp control Only may be performed based on the time information acquired from RTC292. By doing so, the player concentrates on playing the game in order to feel a slight sense of discomfort, and the motivation for the game can be increased.

In addition to the effect display related to the variation of the third symbol, various effect displays may be set based on the time information acquired from RTC292. For example, in the production related to the jackpot game, the start timing of the jackpot video and the jackpot voice to be executed may be controlled by the time information acquired from RTC292. Specifically, a privilege game executed when the result of the determination performed based on the ball entering the winning opening (entry entrance) is the determination result of providing a predetermined privilege (big hit). In, the timing at which the privilege production (big hit video, jackpot audio (BGM), etc.) provided as the privilege game is started is set to a predetermined timing (for example, 00 seconds per minute) based on the time information acquired from the timekeeping means (RTC292). It is controlled so that the timing becomes). With this configuration, even if the adjacent pachinko machines 10 become big hits with a slight time difference (for example, a time difference of about 30 seconds), the big hit effects (video and audio) executed during the big hit game are synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to provide a cohesive effect even during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, by synchronizing the timing of the effect of notifying the game state after the big hit game (the effect of notifying whether or not the probable change state is reached after the end of the big hit game) performed during the big hit game, a more unified effect can be achieved. It will be possible to provide.

Further, in the case of synchronizing the production during the jackpot game based on the time information acquired from RTC292 in this way, even if the contents of the production (video and audio) during the jackpot game are different between the adjacent pachinko machines 10. Good. For example, by providing a female pattern and a male pattern as the voice during the jackpot game, it is possible to combine different contents of the production depending on the synchronized production during the jackpot game to provide a more integrated effect.

In the present embodiment, a technique based on the time information acquired from RTC292 is used in order to perform a unified effect on the adjacent pachinko machine 10, but other techniques may be adopted. For example, the pachinko machine 10 is identifiablely displaying information such as a notification unit (information during a jackpot game or a determination result in which a winning / failing determination result is a jackpot is held and stored) that informs the pachinko machine 10 of information based on the game in an identifiable manner. A display unit) and a detection unit (light detection sensor) that detects the notification mode of the notification unit are provided, and the information notified to the notification unit by the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 adjacent to the pachinko machine 10. Even if the detection unit detects, the information based on the game of the adjacent pachinko machines 10 can be discriminated, and based on the discriminating result, the effect of synchronizing the adjacent pachinko machines 10 can be executed. Good. With this configuration, for example, on the adjacent pachinko machines 10, it is possible to synchronize and execute an effect such as a big hit on one of them.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 159. In the fifth embodiment, the display control in which the configuration of the distribution unit 1164 is related to the fourth embodiment described above and the third symbol display device 81 (main screen) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) is the third embodiment. It is different from the embodiment, and other configurations are the same as those of the above-described embodiments. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

To elaborate on the differences between the configuration of the distribution unit 1164 of the fifth embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the configuration in which the balls entering the distribution unit 1164 are distributed in three directions and the through gate 67 (1067) Is different in that is provided in the distribution unit 1164.

Further, to elaborate the difference between the display control of the fifth embodiment and the third embodiment, a pseudo variable display is displayed on the sub liquid crystal based on the determination result of the hit / miss determination result stored in the hold. The difference is that the display is controlled and the display content can be switched between the main liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal.

FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 149, a distribution unit 1164 in which a ball can enter is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 provided on the front surface of the game board 13. The ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 is configured to be distributed to the first winning opening 1964a, the left second winning opening 1964b, or the through gate 1067, which will be described later.

Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 1164 will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIGS. 150A and 150B are views showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 1164. The structures of the two distribution members 1900 and 1950 provided inside the distribution unit 1164 are the same as those of the distribution member 900 used in the fourth embodiment described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. For convenience of explaining the present embodiment, different reference numerals are given.

First, the flow when a ball enters the sorting unit 1164 will be described with reference to FIG. 150 (a). The ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 passes through the ball entry sensor 1164, and the ball is accommodated in the accommodating portion 1900c of the first distribution member 1900 provided in the upper part of the distribution unit 1164, and the distribution member is accommodated by the weight of the game ball. The 1900 is rotated clockwise and flows down, guided by the guiding member 1900z2, and accommodated in the accommodating portion 1950c of the second sorting member 1950.

The ball housed in the accommodating portion 1950c of the second distribution member 1950 flows down while rotating the second distribution member 1950 clockwise due to its own weight, and enters the first winning opening 1964a. Next, the ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 is housed in the accommodating portion 1900a of the first distribution member, flows down while rotating the first distribution member 1900 counterclockwise, is guided by the guidance member 1900z1, and causes the through gate 1067. pass. The ball that has passed through the through gate 1067 passes through a hole (not shown) provided on the surface of the game board 13 and flows down to the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 is housed in the accommodating portion 1900c of the first distribution member, flows down while rotating the first distribution member 1900 clockwise, is guided by the guidance member 1900z2, and is second distributed. It is housed in the housing part 1950a of the member 1950.

The ball housed in the accommodating portion 1950a of the second distribution member 1950 flows down while rotating the second distribution member 1950 counterclockwise due to its own weight, and enters the left second winning opening 1964b. Then, the ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 next passes through the through gate 1067 by following the same path as the flow passing through the through gate 1067 described above.

As described above, in the distribution unit 1164 used in the present embodiment, the ball that has entered is repeatedly distributed in the order of the first winning opening 1964a → through gate 1067 → left second winning opening 1964b → through gate 1067. It is configured as follows.

In this way, by providing a plurality of winning openings and through gates in one distribution unit 1164, it is possible to make the installation space of various devices (winning openings, through gates, etc.) provided on the game board surface compact. Further, by decorating and directing the vacant space on the surface of the game board, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that further enhances the interest of the game.

Further, in the distribution unit 1164 of the present embodiment, the balls are distributed in three directions by providing two distribution members having the same configuration as the distribution member 900 used in the distribution unit 1064 of the fourth embodiment described above. Therefore, depending on the playability of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to use the same sorting member in the case where the balls are sorted in the sorting unit in two directions and in the case where the balls are sorted in three directions, thereby reducing the cost. It becomes possible.

The distribution unit 1164 in the present embodiment uses a configuration in which the distribution destination of the sphere is changed by the weight of the flowing sphere, but a configuration in which the distribution destination of the sphere is changed by using an electric drive source is also used. Good.

Further, in the distribution unit 1164 of the present embodiment, the ratio of distribution to the first winning opening 1964a, the left second winning opening 1964b, and the through gate 1067 is determined. Although it is 1: 1: 2, a configuration may be used in which distribution is evenly distributed to all.

Further, in the present embodiment, a ball entry detection sensor 1164 that detects a ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 is provided. This is used for the control of detecting the ball clogging in the distribution unit 1164, and the ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 within a predetermined time is the through gate 1067, the first winning opening 1964a, or the left second winning opening. This control is performed by determining whether the ball has entered any of 1964b. Each of the through gate 1067, the first winning opening 1964a, and the left second winning opening 1964b is provided with a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the ball has entered (passed).

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to discover an act of illegally operating the distribution members 1900 and 1950 provided in the distribution unit 1164 to guide the ball entering the distribution unit 1164 to a specific location, the through gate 1067 , The order of entering (passing) the first winning opening 1964a or the left second winning opening 1964b is memorized and compared with the order of entering balls mechanically distributed by the distribution unit 1164 to see if any fraudulent activity has been performed. It is discriminating.

If a detection sensor is provided to collectively detect the balls that have entered the left second winning opening 1964b and the right second winning opening 640, the ball can enter the right second winning opening 640. In the game state (during a short time, during a probability change, etc.), it is controlled not to discriminate the above-mentioned fraudulent activity. By doing so, it is possible to regulate the rotation of the sorting members 1900 and 1950 and easily find the act of continuously entering the game ball into a specific place (for example, the left second winning opening 1964b). it can.

Further, in order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent activity, it is preferable to configure the distribution members 1900 and 1950 so that the ball can flow down only after the rotation. Specifically, in the distribution unit 1164 shown in FIG. 150A, a portion is formed in which the distance between the top of the wall surface constituting the accommodating portion of the distribution member and the internal wall of the distribution unit 1164 is less than one sphere. The distribution unit 1164 may be configured as described above. With this configuration, the ball cannot flow down in the distribution unit 1164 unless the distribution member rotates. Therefore, the act of causing the ball to flow down to a specific location while the rotation of the distribution member is restricted. Can be prevented.

Next, the effect control displayed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 151 is a time chart for explaining a flow related to a special symbol variation effect performed by using the third symbol display device 81 (main screen) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen), which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 151, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shows that the fluctuation is displayed in conjunction with the fluctuation of the special symbol (variation based on the fluctuation pattern command) and that the game ball has won a prize at the entrance. It is configured to be feasible with pre-pseudo fluctuations that are variable and displayed based on the winning command shown.

First, the fluctuation period of the special symbol shown in FIG. 151 is a period during which the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The fluctuation period of the special symbol corresponding to each of the prizes 1 to 5 described later is shown as the fluctuation 1 to the fluctuation 5. The number of reserved balls of the special symbol is the number of reserved balls of the judgment result of the special symbol, and the ball wins the first or second entrance when the special symbol is fluctuating or during the jackpot game. It will increase by doing so, and will decrease when a new special symbol change is started.

The winning is indicating whether or not the ball has won a prize at the first entrance or the second entrance. In FIG. 151, for convenience of explanation, the ball that won the first prize is shown as winning 1, the following winning 2, winning 3, winning 4, and winning 5.

It should be noted that the first entrance or the second entrance is configured to determine whether or not the jackpot game is successful when the ball enters, and to pay out the prize ball. Is not performed when the number of balls entered exceeds the number of reserved memories. On the other hand, the payout of prize balls is executed for all incoming balls. Here, a ball that enters each entrance and can receive a prize ball is indicated as a ball, and a ball that enters each entrance and can receive a winning / failing judgment of a jackpot game is awarded. The explanation will be continued below.

Below the time chart of FIG. 151, there is a third symbol variation 1 which is a variation display of the third symbol dynamically displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (main screen) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen). The third symbol variation 5 is shown from.

The third symbol variation is composed of a main variation corresponding to the variation of the special symbol and a preliminary pseudo variation corresponding to the reception timing of the winning command, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the main variation as a spherical liquid crystal device. At 670, the pre-pseudo-variation can be executed.

The pre-pseudo-variation is the period before the start of this fluctuation (the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in which the fluctuation has already started), and the fluctuation content of the third symbol is determined based on the information contained in the winning command. The third symbol is changed in a pseudo manner by using (a period in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the reserved symbol previously stored) is used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the winning of the ball and the fluctuation timing of the third symbol will be described. First, when winning 1 occurs when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0, the fluctuation of the special symbol (variation 1) is started, and the main fluctuation of the third symbol is started by the third symbol display device 81. (The main variation of the third symbol variation 1). Then, if the winning 2 is generated while the fluctuation 1 is being performed, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is increased to 1. Based on the occurrence of winning 2, the pre-pseudo-variation of the third symbol variation 2 is started on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen). After that, when the winning 3 occurs, the number of special symbol reserved balls increases to 2, and the pre-pseudo variation of the third symbol variation 3 is generated, but the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) continues to have the third symbol variation 2. Pre-pseudo variation is displayed.

In the present embodiment, when the pre-pseudo-variations occur in duplicate, the pre-pseudo-variations corresponding to the reserved symbols selected by the player are displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and when the player does not select the reserved symbols. Next, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is configured to display the pre-pseudo-variation corresponding to the reserved symbol on which the main variation is started. In this figure, the case where the player does not select the reserved symbol will be described. Therefore, even at the timing when the winning 3 occurs, the pre-pseudo-variation of the third symbol variation 2 based on the winning 2 at which the main variation is started is displayed.

The method of displaying the pre-pseudo-variations on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen) is not limited to the display method of the present embodiment, and for example, even if a plurality of all pre-pseudo-variations can be displayed at the same time. Alternatively, the player may display the one selected by the player from the plurality of pre-pseudo-variations displayed at the same time. Further, the pre-pseudo-variation display may be displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) only when the player selects the pre-pseudo-variation display, or when the player does not select the pre-pseudo-variation display. , The pre-pseudo-variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol on which the effect with high expectation of big hit (look-ahead effect) is executed may be displayed.

Then, when the variation 1 of the special symbol ends and the variation 2 starts, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol decreases by one, and the third symbol variation 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (main screen). This variation is started, and the pre-pseudo variation of the third symbol variation 3 is started on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen). At this timing, the third symbol variation 2 is switched from the pre-pseudo variation performed by the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) to the main variation performed by the third symbol display device. In order to eliminate the sense of incongruity in this display switching, the variation display of the pre-pseudo-variation fades out at the timing when the pre-pseudo-variation is completed (the timing when the previous main variation stops). By doing so, it is possible to continue the effect of the pre-pseudo-variation performed by the spherical liquid crystal device 670 and the effect of the main variation performed by the third symbol display device without discomfort. In addition, the discomfort is eliminated by making the background in which the third symbol change is performed the same for the pre-pseudo change and the main change. After that, the same processing is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153, a display screen on which the pre-pseudo-variation and the main variation of the third symbol variation are performed will be described. FIG. 152 (a) is a schematic view showing a state in which the main fluctuation is performed on the third symbol display device 81, which is the main screen, and the preliminary pseudo fluctuation is performed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670, which is the sub screen.

The third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as a main screen) performs variable display of the third symbol in the main display area Dm and displays the reserved symbol in the sub display area Ds as in the second embodiment described above. Etc., and the explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

On the main screen of the present embodiment, a mark (black circle) for identifiablely displaying the reserved symbol corresponding to the pre-pseudo-variation currently being performed is displayed on the reserved symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds. There is. In FIG. 152 (a), it is shown that the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (hereinafter referred to as a sub screen) is performing the pre-pseudo-variation corresponding to the reserved symbol “1”. By using such a configuration, the player can easily grasp which of the reserved symbols corresponds to the pre-pseudo-variation from the plurality of reserved symbols. Further, the reserved symbol "3" is displayed in a mode different from that of other reserved symbols, indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high.

Further, on the right side of the sub-display area Ds, "screen switching push" is displayed. This is a display for notifying the player that the display contents of the main screen and the sub screen can be switched. The configuration for switching the display between the main screen and the sub screen will be described later.

FIG. 152B is a schematic view showing a state in which the pre-pseudo-variation is performed on the main screen and the main fluctuation is performed on the sub-screen. FIG. 152 (b) is displayed on the image displayed on the main symbol and the sub symbol by operating the frame button 22 and executing the screen switching operation in the state where FIG. 152 (a) is displayed. The image is switched. Specifically, the image data displayed in the main display area Dm of the main screen and the image data displayed in the sub screen are switched, and as shown in the figure, the display of the sub display area Ds is shown in FIG. 152 (a). ) Is the same. In this way, by switching the contents displayed on the main screen and the sub screen by the operation of the player, the player can select the effect that he / she is interested in and see the effect on the main screen. Will be.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, the main screen has a size about 6 times that of the sub screen, and the variable display displayed on the main screen is overwhelmingly more powerful. Can be provided. In pachinko machines equipped with screens of different sizes in this way, by using this configuration, variations that are of interest to the player from among multiple variation displays (main variation and pre-pseudo variation) that are executed simultaneously. Since the display can be selected and the selected variable display can be displayed on the main screen, it is possible to provide the player with a desired effect on a more powerful screen.

FIG. 153 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the pre-pseudo-variation is performed on the main screen and the main fluctuation is performed on the sub-screen. FIG. 153 (a) shows the player changing the target of the pre-pseudo-variation from the reserved symbol “1” to the reserved symbol “3” in the state where FIG. 152 (b) is displayed. The reserved symbol that is the target of the prior pseudo-variation is configured to be selectable by the player operating the frame button 22, and a mark (black circle) is placed on the reserved symbol "3" selected by the player. Is attached.

Then, on the main screen, the pre-pseudo-variation corresponding to the reserved symbol "3" is displayed, and the mode "chance!" Is displayed, which indicates that the expectation of the jackpot is high.

FIG. 153 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the main fluctuation is performed on the main screen using the reserved symbol that is the target of the prior pseudo-variation selected in FIG. 153 (a). As shown in this figure, each change is displayed on the main screen when the main change using the reserved symbol selected as the target of the pre-pseudo change is started and the pre-pseudo change ends. It is configured to automatically switch the display contents of the display screen. In addition, the mode "chance!", Which is displayed from the pre-pseudo-variation display and indicates that the expectation of the jackpot is high, is continuously displayed in this variation display. With this configuration, even if the pre-pseudo fluctuation is changed to the main fluctuation, it is possible to provide a continuous effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. ..

In this figure, since the reserved symbol does not exist, the pre-pseudo-variation display is not performed on the sub screen. When the pre-pseudo-variation display is not performed in this way, it is preferable to use the sub screen as the effect of the main variation display displayed on the main screen.

The pre-variation display and the main variation display executed by the main screen and the sub screen have been described above using the schematic diagram of each screen, but the following can be considered as the effects displayed on each screen. ..

First, even if the display time of this variation display is set short, that is, even if the variation time of the special symbol is set short, it is necessary to sufficiently encourage the player whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. In order to make it possible, in the pre-pseudo-variation effect, an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol (for example, a comment display effect suggesting a stop symbol of the third symbol, or a character equipment is selected and decided. In this variable effect, the result display effect is performed as an effect of displaying the lottery result (an effect of only stopping the third symbol or an effect of the character attacking the enemy). ..

By performing such an effect, even if the main fluctuation time is set short in order to improve the efficiency of the game, the player can obtain the lottery result of the special symbol by performing the expectation suggestion effect by the pre-pseudo-variation effect. You can wait while enjoying being displayed.

Secondly, when the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed on the third display device 81 is selected so that the player can experience the effect desired by the player for as long as possible. By setting the display mode (for example, displaying a plurality of characters) to suggest the content of the pre-pseudo-variation to be displayed and selecting the desired reserved symbol by the player, the character displayed in the selected reserved symbol appears. The effect to be performed is displayed by pre-pseudo-variation.

By performing such an effect, the player can enjoy the desired effect as a pre-pseudo-variable effect while performing a lottery game with a special symbol as before. Further, since the desired effect is provided by using the pre-pseudo-variation effect instead of the main variation effect, the desired effect can be experienced for a long time.

In addition, by setting the characters that appeared in the pre-pseudo-variation effect to appear in the main variation effect using the reserved symbol corresponding to the pre-pseudo-variation effect, it is possible to achieve even more effects. Become.

Although the pre-pseudo-variation effect of the present embodiment has been described above, a configuration other than the above-described configuration may be adopted as long as the configuration has the same effect.

For example, in the present embodiment, the display of the sub-display area Ds is displayed on the main screen without switching so that the player is not confused, but the display of the sub-display area Ds may also be switched. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the generation of image data in the display control device 114.

The prior pseudo-variation used in the present embodiment includes not only the variation of the third symbol but also the mode displayed in the main display area Dm with the variation of the third symbol, for example, of the character. It also includes story development and changes in the background image.

Further, the operation of switching between the main screen and the sub screen may be configured to be effective only within a specified period. For example, it is preferable to enable screen switching only while the third symbol corresponding to this fluctuation is performing high-speed fluctuation. By doing so, it is not necessary to switch the screen during the period in which the processing related to the game is concentrated (the period in which the processing related to the stop display of the third symbol is performed), and the processing load of the control device can be reduced.

Further, in the state where the pre-pseudo-variation is executed on the sub screen, the reserved symbol to be the target of the pre-pseudo-variation may be configured to be selectable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-pseudo-variation effect corresponding to the reserved symbol of the special symbol is executed on the sub screen, but for example, the pre-pseudo-variation effect corresponding to the reserved symbol of the normal symbol may be performed. In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which the start prize of the special symbol and the start prize of the normal symbol are regularly distributed like the distribution unit 1164 described in the present embodiment, the reserved symbol of the normal symbol is used. Since it is possible to maintain a predetermined number, it is possible to enjoy the pre-pseudo-variation effect.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. In the present embodiment, it is clearly shown that the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is connected to the display control device 114, and the contents of the RAM 233 of the display control device 114 are changed with respect to the third embodiment described above. Is different. Since the other points are the same as those of the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 154, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 154 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

The present embodiment is different from the third embodiment described above in that it is clearly shown that the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is connected to the display control device 114. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball entry sensor 1164a shown in FIG. 150 is newly provided, but it will be handled as a part of various switches 208.

FIG. 155 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. The present embodiment differs from the above-described third embodiment in that the switching flag 233o is provided in the RAM 233 of the display control device 114.

The switching flag 233o is a flag used when determining whether to switch the display between the main screen (third symbol display device 81) and the sub screen (spherical liquid crystal device 670), and is a command performed by the display control device 114. When it is determined that there is a switching command in the determination process 2, it is set to ON (S2556 in FIG. 158), and in the same command determination process 2, an identification number corresponding to the pre-pseudo-variation effect is assigned for display. When it is determined that there is a variation pattern command, it is set to off (S2554 in FIG. 158).

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157. The fifth embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment described above in that the pre-pseudo-variation setting process is executed in the main process. Since the other points are the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 3 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the main process 3 in the fifth embodiment. The main process 3 executes the processes S1301 to S1354 in the same manner as the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) in the fourth embodiment described above, and then performs the pre-pseudo-variation setting process (S1355) added in the present embodiment. Execute. Then, in the same manner as the main process 2 described above, the processes S1317 to S1321 are executed, and this process is repeated.

Next, the pre-pseudo-variation setting process (S1355) will be described with reference to FIG. 157. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the pre-pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1355). This pre-pseudo-variation setting process (S1355) is a process of setting the pre-pseudo-variation to be displayed on the main screen and the sub screen based on the winning command and the operation of the player.

When the pre-pseudo-variation setting process (S1355) is set, it is first determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received (S5101). If the winning command for the special symbol has not been received (S5101: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the winning command of the special symbol is received (S5101: Yes), the pre-pseudo-variation effect is selected based on the winning command (S5102).

In S5102, it is analyzed whether the information included in the winning command is a jackpot, a missed super reach, or a missed, and a predetermined variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a based on the analysis result. In the variation pattern selection table 222 of the present embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns of the pre-pseudo variation effect are also stored. Then, the selected fluctuation pattern is temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a selection of the reserved symbol (S5103). This is to determine whether the player is selecting the reserved symbol from which the player wants to execute the pre-pseudo-variation effect from the plurality of reserved symbols, and the selection is possible by operating the frame button 22. doing.

When it is determined in S5103 that the reserved symbol is not selected (S5103: No), the identification information corresponding to the oldest reserved symbol and the pre-pseudo-variation effect are set (S5107). The oldest reserved symbol is the reserved symbol corresponding to the oldest reserved symbol in the information stored on hold, that is, the special symbol whose fluctuation is started after the special symbol currently changing is stopped. It is a reserved symbol corresponding to the symbol.

In addition, the identification information is given so that individual winning information can be identified, and information that enables associating various commands created based on one ball winning a prize in the entrance. It is attached to the header part of each command. Based on this identification information, a command (holding ball number command, winning command) created in the start winning process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 60). ), Such as a command (variation pattern command, stop type command), which has different transmission timings, can be linked by the MPU 211 of the voice lamp control device 113.

On the other hand, in S5103, when it is determined that the reserved symbol has been selected (S5103: Yes), the identification information and the pre-pseudo-variation effect corresponding to the selected reserved symbol are set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the switching operation has been performed (S5105). This is to determine whether or not an operation for switching the display contents between the main screen and the sub screen has been performed. If it is determined that there is no switching operation (S5105: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a switching operation (S5105: Yes), a switching command is set (S5106), and this process ends.

Next, the command determination process 2 (S2352) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 158. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S2352). The command determination process 2 (S2352) is a process executed in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114, but the V interrupt process has the same contents as the second embodiment described above. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the processes from S2404 to S2417 executed in the command determination process are executed in the other command process (S2553) in the command determination process 2, and the description of the contents thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S2352) is executed, the processes S2401 to S2403 are performed in the same manner as the command determination process executed in the second embodiment described above. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command to which the identification information corresponding to the pre-pseudo variation effect is given (S2551). When it is determined that there is no variation pattern command to which the identification information corresponding to the pre-pseudo variation effect is given (S2551: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a switching command (S2552). If there is no switching command (S2552: No), other command processing is executed (S2553), and this processing is looped.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2551 that there is a display variation pattern command to which identification information corresponding to the pre-pseudo variation effect is given (S2552: Yes), the switching flag 233o is set to off (S2554). ), The pre-pseudo-variation effect is completed (S2555). Then, it shifts to S2552.

If it is determined in S2552 that there is a switching command (S2552: Yes), the switching flag 233o is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2553.

By setting the switching flag 233o by the command determination process 2 described above, it is possible to switch the display contents between the main screen and the sub screen in the drawing process described later. In addition, since the pre-pseudo-variation effect is terminated using the identification information given to the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the variation time of the special symbol changes depending on the number of reserved symbols at the start of the variation. Even if there is, it is possible to execute the pre-pseudo fluctuation until just before the start of this fluctuation.

Next, the drawing process 2 (S2356) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the drawing process 2 (S2356). The drawing process 2 (S2356) is a process performed to switch the display contents between the main screen and the sub screen.

In the drawing process 2 (S2356), the first drawing list is first generated (S3901). The first drawing list is a drawing list related to the variation display (main variation display) of the third symbol performed in response to the variation of the special symbol. Then, a second drawing list is generated (S3902). The second drawing list is a drawing list related to the variation display (pre-pseudo variation display) of the third symbol set based on the winning command of the special symbol.

Then, it is determined whether or not the switching flag 233o is set to ON (S3903). When the switching flag 233o is set to ON (S3903: Yes), the first drawing list and the drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller (S3904) with the output destination as the sub screen. Then, the second drawing list and the drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller with the output destination as the main screen (S3905). That is, when the player operates the frame button 22 to switch the display contents between the main screen and the sub screen, the switching flag is set to on, and the image based on the first drawing list generated in S3901 is the sub screen. The image based on the second drawing list generated in S3902 is displayed on the main screen.

After that, the drawing target buffer flag is updated (S3906), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the switching flag 233o is not set to ON (S3903: No), the first drawing list and the drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller (S3907) with the output destination as the main screen. Then, the second drawing list and the drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller (S3908) with the output destination as the sub screen, and the process proceeds to S3906.

By using the prior pseudo-variation described above, it is possible to solve the problems of the prior art described below.

Conventionally, there has been an effect of changing the mode of the reserved symbol based on the information included in the winning command. By using this conventional technique, it is possible to notify the player that some of the reserved symbols stored in the hold have a high expectation that the judgment result of the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit. It was necessary to keep watching the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the other special symbols until the variation of the special symbol based on the hold memory, which is a big hit and has a high expectation, is started. Further, in recent years, pachinko machines that can receive a large number of hit / fail judgments by shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol have appeared, but such a pachinko machine has a third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol. There was a problem that the fluctuation display of the game was shortened and the game was not interesting.

In response to the above-mentioned problem, in the present embodiment, the pre-pseudo-variation is performed before the start of the change corresponding to the winning command based on the information contained in the winning command. Display the pre-pseudo-variation created based on the information contained in the winning command from the time when the winning command corresponding to the high hold memory is received until the main fluctuation corresponding to the winning command is started. The player can see the variation display of the third symbol based on the hold memory, which has a high expectation of a jackpot, while the main variation of the third symbol based on the other hold memory is being performed. Then, it becomes possible to be interested in the variable display of the third symbol. Furthermore, even if the main fluctuation time of the third symbol is shortened by setting the fluctuation time of the special symbol short, the fluctuation time of the third symbol based on one prize is lengthened by providing the preliminary pseudo variation. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for displaying a variable display of a sequence of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Further, the configuration of each of the above embodiments may be configured to be implemented in whole or in combination.

Each of the above-described embodiments and a part or all of the modifications thereof may be combined and configured. Further, although it is composed of a plurality of control devices, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single integrated control device may be used.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Concept of the invention using the protruding operation unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a driving means that generates a driving force and a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force generated by the driving force, the displacement member is rotatably formed between a retracted position and a rotating position. Relatively formed so as to be displaceable between the base-side displacement member and the reference position and the overhanging position protruding outward from the base-side displacement member from the reference position. A first operation comprising a displacement member and rotating the base displacement member between the retracted position and the rotating position, and the relative displacement member at the reference position and the overhang position with respect to the base displacement member. A game machine A1 characterized in that a second operation of being displaced between the two is feasible.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine that produces an effect by rotating a displacement member around a base end side that is rotatably supported by an axis (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-92634 For example, paragraphs 0175 to 0189, see FIG. 83)). According to this gaming machine, by rotating the displacement member in one direction, the tip end side of the displacement member is placed at a predetermined position on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, while the displacement member is placed in the direction opposite to the one direction. By rotating in the other direction, the displacement member is retracted outside the display area (retract position) of the liquid crystal display device. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, if the outer shape of the displacement member is small, it becomes difficult for the player to sufficiently visually recognize the displacement member at a predetermined position on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, and the effect is sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, if the outer shape of the displacement member is large, there is a problem that a large space is required outside the display area (retracted position). The game machine A1 is designed to solve the above-exemplified problems, and allows the player to sufficiently visually recognize the displacement member at a predetermined position while suppressing the space required for the retracted position. The purpose is to provide a game machine.

That is, according to the game machine A1, the displacement members are arranged on the base-side displacement member rotatably formed between the retracted position and the rotation position, the base-side displacement member, and the reference position and the reference position thereof. The first operation of rotating the base displacement member between the retracted position and the rotating position is provided with a relative displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the overhanging positions protruding outward from the base displacement member. Since the second operation of displace the relative displacement member between the reference position and the overhang position with respect to the base displacement member can be executed respectively, the base displacement member in the retracted position is rotated by the first operation. When arranging the relative displacement member at the position, the relative displacement member at the reference position is arranged at the overhanging position by the second operation, so that the relative displacement member can be extended outward from the base displacement member. Therefore, since the displacement member can be made larger as a whole, the displacement member can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player at the rotation position, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exerted.

On the other hand, when the base-side displacement member in the rotational position is placed in the retracted position by the first operation, the relative displacement member by the overhanging position is placed in the reference position by the second operation, so that the base of the relative displacement member It is possible to suppress the outward protrusion from the side displacement member. Therefore, since the displacement member can be made smaller as a whole, the space required for accommodating the displacement member can be suppressed at the retracted position. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other parts and devices.

The second operation may be performed at least until it is placed in the retracted position (that is, until the first operation is completed). Therefore, at least a part of the first operation and at least a part of the second operation may be executed in duplicate.

The game machine A1 includes a front member arranged in front of the moving plane of the displacement member to form an opening, and when the base displacement member 440 is arranged in a rotational position by the first operation, the relative displacement When at least a part of the member is made visible to the player through the opening of the front member and the relative displacement member is arranged at the overhang position by the second operation, the front member of the relative displacement member The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the area visible to the player is expanded through the opening.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the relative displacement member retracted to the retracted position is first made to appear in the opening of the front member by a rotational motion (first operation), and the relative displacement thereof. A player is made to visually recognize only a part of the member, and then, a linear motion (second motion) is performed to expand the visible area of the relative displacement member through the opening of the front member. Can be done.

In the game machine A2, the relative displacement member is arranged so as to be slidably displaceable on the base displacement member, and in the second operation, the relative displacement member is placed at the reference position and overhangs with respect to the base displacement member. A game machine A3 characterized by sliding displacement between positions.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the relative displacement member is disposed on the base displacement member so as to be slidable, and the second operation is to move the relative displacement member to the base displacement member. Since the slide displacement is performed between the reference position and the overhang position, the relative displacement member is stretched from the reference position as compared with the case where the second operation is, for example, the mode in which the relative displacement member is rotated with respect to the base displacement member. The space required for displacement to the protruding position can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other parts and devices can be secured accordingly. Further, since the mode of displacement of the relative displacement member by the second operation can be different from the mode of displacement of the base displacement member by the first operation, the effect of performing the first operation and the second operation is produced. Can be enhanced.

In the game machine A3, the relative displacement members are arranged in a posture in which the base displacement members are aligned with each other in the longitudinal direction, and the direction of the slide displacement is set to be the direction along the longitudinal direction of each other. A game machine A4 characterized by this.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the relative displacement members are arranged in a posture in which the base displacement members are aligned with each other in the longitudinal direction, and the directions of their slide displacements are different from each other. Since the direction is along the longitudinal direction, the displacement member can be expanded and contracted as a whole by the slide displacement along the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member with respect to the base displacement member. Therefore, at the rotation position, by enlarging the displacement member as a whole by stretching, the player can sufficiently visually recognize the displacement member, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, in the retracted position, by reducing the displacement member as a whole by shortening, the space required for accommodating the displacement member can be suppressed, and a space for arranging other parts and devices can be secured. can do.

Further, according to the game machine A4, the relative displacement member retracted to the retracted position is first made to appear from the side in the opening of the front member by a rotational motion (first operation), and a part of the relative displacement member. The player is made to visually recognize only the relative displacement member, and then the relative displacement member is projected toward the inside of the opening of the front member by a linear motion (second movement) to expand the area visible to the player. be able to. Therefore, the visible area of the relative displacement member can be expanded by a motion form (linear motion) different from the motion form (rotary motion) at the time of appearance, and the visible area is expanded by the unexpectedness due to the change in the motion form and the linear motion. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of speed due to being performed and a sense of unity of the combined motion due to the combination of these being performed continuously. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that cannot be achieved in a form in which the relative displacement member appears and disappears with respect to the opening of the front member only by a linear motion (a form in which the retracted position and the extended position reciprocate).

The game machine A4 includes a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmitting means is arranged at a position overlapping the displacement member arranged at the retracted position in front view. A game machine A5 characterized by this.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is provided, and the transmission means is provided in front view with the displacement member arranged at the retracted position. Since it is arranged at the overlapping position, the dead space formed on the back surface side of the displacement member arranged at the retracted position can be effectively utilized as the arrangement space of the transmission means.

In the game machine A5, a holding member for holding the driving means, the transmitting means, and the displacement member is provided, the driving means and the displacement member are arranged on one surface side of the holding member, and the displacement member is in the longitudinal direction thereof. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the driving means is positioned on an extension line of the above and is arranged at the retracted position.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5, the drive means and the displacement member are arranged on one side of the holding member. Therefore, for example, the holding member is sandwiched and driven to one side and the other side. Compared with the case where the means and the displacement member are respectively arranged, the dimensions in the direction connecting the one surface side and the other surface side of the holding member can be reduced. Further, since the displacement member is arranged at the retracted position in a posture in which the drive means is located on the extension line in the longitudinal direction, the displacement member and the drive means can be arranged linearly. Therefore, the space required as the evacuation position can be efficiently suppressed.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member and a holding member for holding the transmitting means are provided, and the transmitting member drives the driving means. A predetermined position between one side position and the other side position is pivotally supported at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and the rotating member that is rotated by receiving a force, and the one side position is rotated by the holding member. When the rotating member is rotated between the first rotation position and the intermediate rotation position, the link member is provided so as to be pivotally supported and the other side position is connected to the relative displacement member of the displacement member. When the base displacement member is rotated through the relative displacement member of the displacement member with the displacement of the link member, the first operation is executed, and the rotating member moves between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that, when rotated between the two, the relative displacement member of the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base displacement member with the displacement of the link member, and the second operation is executed.

According to the game machine A7, the link member pivotally supports a predetermined position between the one-sided position and the other-sided position at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member, and the one-sided position can be rotated by the holding member. Since the other side position is connected to the relative displacement member of the displacement member, the rotation of the rotating member is transferred to the relative displacement member of the displacement member via the link member by rotating the rotating member by the driving force of the driving means. Can be communicated. In this case, when the rotating member is rotated between the first rotation position and the intermediate rotation position, the base displacement member can be rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member as the link member is displaced. Can perform actions. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position, the relative displacement member of the displacement member can be displaced with respect to the base displacement member with the displacement of the link member, and the second operation. Can be executed. That is, according to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, two different operations of the first operation and the second operation can be performed by one driving means, so that the component cost is reduced. It can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the transmission means may have a structure in which a gear is provided at one side of the link member and a gear provided on the outer periphery of the rotating member is meshed with the gear to displace the link member. However, in such a structure, rotation is possible. The space required for arranging the member and the link member increases. On the other hand, in the game machine A6, since the rotating member pivotally supports a predetermined position between the one-side position and the other-side position of the link member, the rotating member and the link member can be arranged in an overlapping state in the front view. Due to the overlap, the space required for arranging the rotating member and the link member can be suppressed.

Further, since the relative displacement member and the holding member are connected via the transmission member, the shaking of the relative displacement member can be suppressed by utilizing the rigidity of the holding member.

In any of the game machines A1 to A7, at least a part of the displacement locus of the displacement member when the base displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation is arranged at a position where it overlaps in the front view. A game machine A8 characterized by being provided with decorative members.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A7, when the base displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation, at least the displacement member and the decorative member are in front view. It can be crossed in part, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the game machine A8, one side of the displacement member in the longitudinal direction is the center of rotation in the first operation, and the relative displacement members are in the longitudinal direction of each other on the front side of the base displacement member. The second operation is to slide-displace the relative displacement member between the reference position and the overhang position with respect to the base-side displacement member, and the decorative member is arranged so as to be slidable. When the base side displacement member is rotated by the first operation, at least a part of the displacement locus on the rotation tip side of the displacement member is arranged at a position where it overlaps in front view, and the base is arranged by the first operation. When the side displacement member is arranged at the rotation position, the overlap with the displacement member in the front view is not formed, and the relative displacement member has a shape in which the rotation center side is located on the front side rather than the rotation tip side. A game machine A9 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A8, the relative displacement member arranged on the front side of the base side displacement member has a shape in which the rotation center side is located on the front side rather than the rotation tip side, that is, Since the shape is such that the rotation tip side is recessed toward the back surface side, it is possible to prevent the relative displacement member from coming into contact with the decorative member when the base displacement member is rotated by the first operation. In this case, since one side of the displacement member in the longitudinal direction is the center of rotation in the first operation, the tip side of the rotation, which is the free end, easily swings back and forth during the first operation and comes into contact with the decorative member. Is likely to occur. Therefore, the configuration of the game machine A9 is particularly effective.

On the other hand, when the relative displacement member is slidably displaced from the reference position to the overhanging position by the second operation, the relative displacement member arranged on the front side of the base side displacement member is in front of the rotation center side rather than the rotation tip side. By making the shape located on the side, the relative displacement member can be arranged further forward (the side closer to the player) to increase the force.

In the game machine A9, the shape in which the rotation center side of the relative displacement member is located on the front side of the rotation tip side of the relative displacement member is arbitrary, for example, the shape between the rotation tip side and the rotation center side. , It may change stepwise, or it may change gradually in a straight line or a curved line.

In any of the game machines A6 to A9, the pin member provided on one of the base displacement member or the relative displacement member and the pin member provided on the other of the base displacement member or the relative displacement member can be slidably displaced. A slide groove that accepts and enables slide displacement of the relative displacement member with respect to the base displacement member is provided, and the position where the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is relative to the pin member. The gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is on the tip side of the displacement member in the sliding direction.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A6 to A9, the position where the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is closer to the tip side of the relative displacement member in the slide direction than the pin member. Therefore, the position where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be brought closer to the tip side of the relative displacement member in the slide direction. In other words, the portion where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be kept away from the portion where the base displacement member is pivotally supported by the holding member. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the relative displacement member from swinging in the front-rear direction.

<Concept of the invention using the combined operation unit 500 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a driving means that generates a driving force, a driven member that is driven and displaced by the driving force generated by the driving force, and a holding member that holds the driven member in a displaceable manner. A driven member that is displaceably connected to the driven member and a displacement defining means that regulates the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member are provided, and the displacement defining means causes the displacement of the driven member to the holding member. By being defined, the gaming machine B1 is characterized in that when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the driven member is displaced relative to the driven member.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display is performed from an overhanging position on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device and the overhanging position by a driving force from a driving means. There is known a gaming machine that produces an effect by displacing a displacement member with and from a retracted position retracted in a direction outside the display area of the device (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-209450 (for example, paragraph 0995, FIG. 11 to 15)). According to this gaming machine, by switching the output direction of the driving means or by making the output intermittent, the displacement mode of the displacement member is changed. However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the control becomes complicated because the output of the driving means is changed, while the displacement member is displaced according to the change of the output of the driving means. Since the velocity is only changed and the displacement direction remains constant, there is a problem that a sufficient change is not given to the displacement mode. The game machine B1 was made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the game machine B1 is to provide a game machine capable of imparting a change in the displacement mode of the displacement member while keeping the output of the driving means constant. To do.

That is, according to the game machine B1, when the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, the displacement defining means defines the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member, so that the driven member is displaced. Along with this, the driven member can be driven while being relatively displaced with respect to the driven member. That is, even when the driven member is displaced on a constant trajectory such as a linear or arc shape, the driven member can be displaced on a trajectory different from that of the driven member. Further, since the change in the mode of such displacement is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member, even if the driven member is displaced at a constant speed, it is different from the driven member. The driven member can be displaced on the track. Therefore, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member while keeping the output of the driving means constant.

In the game machine B1, the displacement defining means is guided along a first groove portion formed in a groove shape on one of the driven member or the holding member, and the other of the driven member or the holding member while being guided along the first groove portion. A gaming machine B2, characterized in that it includes a first guided portion formed on the vehicle.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the displacement defining means includes the first groove portion and the first guided portion, and the first guided portion is guided along the first groove portion. The displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member can be specified. Therefore, the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, so that the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the contour (shape) of the first groove portion. That is, by setting the contour (shape) of the first groove portion, the mode of relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. In this way, since the displacement defining means is composed of the groove-shaped portion (first groove portion) and the portion guided to the portion (first guided portion), the structure is simplified and the product cost is reduced. At the same time, it is possible to improve the reliability and durability of the movable part.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state.

According to the game machine B3, in the game machine B1 or B2, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a state of at least rotatable. Therefore, when the driven member is relatively displaced with the displacement of the driven member, , The relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be changed, and the player can be made to recognize a change in a strong impression as a change in the mode of displacement.

In the game machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a state in which the driven member can be rotated and slidably displaced.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slide-displaceable state, so that the driven member is relative to the driven member as the driven member is displaced. At the time of displacement, not only the relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be changed by rotation, but also the relative positions of both can be changed by slide displacement at the same time. The variation of changes that can be given can be increased.

In the game machine B4, the displacement defining means is guided along a second groove portion formed in a groove shape on one of the driven member or the holding member, and the other of the driven member or the holding member. A gaming machine B5, characterized in that it includes a second guided portion formed on the surface.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the displacement defining means includes the second groove portion and the second guided portion, and the second guided portion is guided along the second groove portion. The displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member can be specified. Therefore, since the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the contour (shape) of the second groove portion. That is, by setting the contour (shape) of the second groove portion, the mode of relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. In particular, when the driven member is rotatably and slidably connected to the driven member, the guide structure by the combination of the first groove portion and the first guided portion and the combination of the second groove portion and the second guided portion are used. By providing both the guide structure and the guide structure, it is possible not only to increase the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode, but also to provide two such displacements even when the driven member can be displaced with respect to the driven member in multiple directions. Since it can be guided by the guide structure, it is possible to suppress the displacement from becoming unstable and improve the reliability as a movable member.

In the game machine B5 as well, as in the case described above, the displacement defining means is formed by the groove-shaped portion (second groove portion) and the portion guided to the portion (second guided portion), and thus has a structure. It is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability and durability of the movable member.

In the game machine B5, the second groove portion is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, and the driven member has the second guided portion rotatable and slide displacement. A groove-shaped connecting groove portion to be inserted in a possible state is provided, and by inserting the second guided portion into the connecting groove portion, the driven member is rotatable and slidably displaceable in the driven member. A game machine B6 characterized by being connected.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the second groove portion is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, and the second guided portion is the driven member. By being inserted into the connecting groove portion, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slide-displaceable state. Therefore, the driven member is held by being guided to the second guided portion and the second groove portion. It is possible to have both the role of defining the displacement with respect to the member and the role of connecting the driven member to the driven member so as to be relatively displaceable by being inserted into the connecting groove portion. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the product cost can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and the reliability and durability of the movable member can be improved.

In the game machine B6, at least a portion of the holding member in which the second groove portion is formed is interposed between the driven member and the driven member, and the driven member is the second groove portion of the holding member. The gaming machine B7 is provided with a contact portion that is brought into contact with the peripheral edge of the machine, and the contact portion is formed in a concentric circle on the second guided portion.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6, the driven member includes a contact portion that is brought into contact with the peripheral edge of the second groove portion of the holding member, and the contact portion is the second guided portion. Since the driven members are formed in a concentric circle, the contact area between the contact portion and the holding portion (periphery of the second groove portion) even when the driven member is rotated with respect to the holding member (second groove portion). Can be suppressed from changing the supporting reaction force. As a result, the driven member can be displaced in a stable state.

In any of the game machines B1 to B7, the holding member can be displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the driven member can be displaced by the displacement of the driven member. The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member are formed so as to be able to be held in such a state.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B7, the holding member is capable of being displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the driven member is displaced. Since the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member are formed so as to be able to be held in a state where the driven member is displaceable, one device in which the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member are held by the holding member. Can be unitized as. As a result, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost when assembling the unit itself and the manufacturing cost when assembling the unit to the game machine main body and assembling the game machine.

In the game machine B8, the game machine B9 is characterized in that the first groove portion is formed in the holding member and the first guided portion is formed in the driven member.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of the game machine B8, the first groove portion is formed on the holding member and the first guided portion is formed on the driven member, so that the first groove portion can be formed. It can be easy to secure space. That is, a space for forming the first groove portion is provided by utilizing the dead space of the holding member that must be formed in a relatively large outer shape in order to hold and unitize the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member. Can be secured. As a result, the degree of freedom in the contour (shape) and the extension length of the first groove portion can be increased, and the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased accordingly.

In the game machine B9, the displacement defining means includes a second groove portion formed in a groove shape on the holding member, and a second guided portion formed along the second groove portion and formed on the driven member. The holding member includes a first facing portion and a second facing portion that face each other with the driven member interposed therebetween, and the first groove portion is formed on one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the second groove portion is formed on the other side of the first facing portion or the second facing portion.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of the game machine B9, a first groove portion is formed in one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion of the holding member facing the driven member, and the other. Since the second groove portion is formed in the above, the first groove portion and the second groove portion can be formed without considering the formation position of the partner. That is, when both the first groove portion and the second groove portion are formed in one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion, it is necessary to form the first groove portion and the second groove portion so as not to intersect with each other. , The degree of freedom is limited. On the other hand, according to the game machine B10, the contour (shape) and the extension length of both the first groove portion and the second groove portion can be set without considering the positional relationship with the other party. The degree of freedom can be increased, and the variation of changes that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased accordingly.

In any of the game machines B5 to B7, at least one of the first groove and the second groove is characterized in that the radius at the start end or the end is made larger than the reference value.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B5 to B7, the load is reduced and the drive is smooth at the initial stage when the drive means of the driven member in the stopped state is started. Can be started.

In any of the game machines B5 to B7, a shielding member for invisible shielding the driven member is provided, and at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a part of the driven member outside the region of the shielding member. The gaming machine B12 is characterized in that the radius in the corresponding region is made smaller than the reference value from the time when the entire driven member is exposed to the outside of the region of the shielding member.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B5 to B7, the driven member can move faster in the range where a part of the driven member of the shielding member is shielded, so that the shielding member drives. It is possible to perform an effect in which a member suddenly appears or an effect in which a driven member is quickly hidden by a shielding member.

<Concept of the invention using the rotary operation unit 600 as an example>
It is provided with a holding member, a first rotating body and a second rotating body rotatably arranged on the holding member, and a driving means for applying a rotational driving force to the first rotating body and the second rotating body. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape and is concentrically fitted to the first rotating body.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that produces an effect by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies (see, for example, paragraph 0162, FIGS. 42 to 46). According to this game machine, a plurality of rotating bodies arranged apart from each other on the left and right are rotated in the same direction in synchronization with each other to give a unified feeling to the production. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since a plurality of rotating bodies are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, it is difficult to associate the rotations with each other and make the player recognize them, and by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies. There was a problem that the effect of the production could not be fully exhibited. The game machine C1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and is produced by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies by associating the rotations of the plurality of rotating bodies with each other to make it easier for the player to recognize them. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of fully exerting the effect of.

That is, according to the game machine C1, the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape and is concentrically fitted to the first rotating body. Therefore, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are combined. Can be rotated concentrically. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the rotation of the first rotating body and the rotation of the second rotating body in association with each other, and as a result, the effect of the effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies can be fully exhibited. Can be done.

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the first rotating body is formed in a tubular shape.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, since the first rotating body is formed in a tubular shape, an effect member or the like can be arranged on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating the first rotating body that surrounds the periphery of the effect member and the second rotating body that further surrounds the periphery of the first rotating body around the effect member. As a result, it is possible to more effectively perform the effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body includes a main body portion inserted into the holding member, a one-side flange portion extending outward in a flange shape on one side in the axial direction of the main body portion, and one of the main body portions. The second rotating body includes a flange portion on the other side in the axial direction opposite to the flange portion on the side, and a flange portion on the other side facing the flange portion on one side with the holding member interposed therebetween. The gaming machine C3, which is fitted onto the main body of the first rotating body and is disposed between the one-side flange portion of the first rotating body and the holding member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body is formed and held on one side and the other side in the axial direction of the main body portion inserted into the holding member and the main body portion, respectively. It is provided with a one-sided flange portion and another side flange portion facing each other with a member sandwiched between them, and the second rotating body is fitted onto the main body portion of the first rotating body, and the one-side flange portion and the holding member of the first rotating body are provided. Since it is arranged between and, the holding structure of the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the holding member can be simplified.

That is, according to the above configuration, since the main body of the first rotating body is inserted into the holding member, the first rotating body can be rotatably held by the holding member. Further, by contacting the other side flange portion of the first rotating body with the holding member, the displacement of the first rotating body in one axial direction can be regulated, and the one side flange portion of the first rotating body rotates in the second rotation. The displacement of the first rotating body to the other in the axial direction can be regulated by being brought into contact with the body and the second rotating body being brought into contact with the holding member.

Further, since the second rotating body is fitted onto the main body of the first rotating body, the second rotating body can be rotatably held by the holding member via the main body of the first rotating body. Further, the second rotating body is brought into contact with the one side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body is brought into contact with the holding member, so that the second rotating body is in axial direction. The displacement to the other can be regulated, and the displacement of the second rotating body to the other in the axial direction can be regulated by contacting the second rotating body with the holding member.

The game machine C3 includes a first gear and a second gear that are arranged on the holding member and transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, and the first rotation. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that gears to which the first gear and the second gear are meshed are engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the body and the second rotating body, respectively.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, the first gear and the second gear which are arranged on the holding member and transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. A gear is provided, and gears to which the first gear and the second gear are meshed are engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, so that the first gear and the second gear are used. The structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be simplified. In particular, when the main body of the first rotating body is formed into a tubular shape and an effect member or the like is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the main body, the first gear is formed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. And the structure that meshes with the second gear is effective.

In the game machine C4, the second gear is arranged on one side of the holding member, and the first gear is arranged on the other side opposite to the one side of the holding member. Is meshed with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the other side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the second gear is meshed with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body. A game machine C5 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the second gear is arranged on one side of the holding member and the first gear is arranged on the other side opposite to the one side of the holding member. The first gear is meshed with the gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the other side flange of the first rotating body, and the second gear is fitted with the gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body. Since they are meshed, for example, the first gear and the second gear are compared with the case where both the first gear and the second gear are meshed with the first rotating body and the second rotating body on one side of the holding member. The structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body via the gears can be simplified.

Further, the first gear and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body to which the first gear is meshed are arranged, the one side flange portion of the first rotating body, the main body portion, and the second rotating body are arranged. By being arranged on the other side opposite to one side of the holding member, the first gear and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body can be provided to the player who looks at one side of the holding member in front. It can be shielded by a holding member. That is, the structure that invisiblely shields the first gear and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body can be simplified by using the holding member.

In either the game machine C4 or C5, a first transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first gear and a second transmitting means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the second gear. A game machine C6 characterized by being provided with.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine C4 or C5, the first transmission means and the second transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the first gear and the second gear, respectively, are provided. The 1-rotating body and the 2nd rotating body can be rotated by the driving means of 1. In this case, the rotational driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the first gear by the first transmission means and to the second gear by the second transmission means by different transmission paths. Therefore, for each transmission path, for example, by setting the number of gears and the reduction ratio, even when the two rotating bodies are rotated by the one driving means, the two rotating bodies (first rotation). The rotation mode of the body and the second rotating body) can be different. As a result, it is possible to more effectively perform the effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies.

In any of the game machines C4 to C6, the holding member is provided with a tubular portion that is formed in a tubular shape and protrudes to one side, and the first holding member is on the inner peripheral side of the tubular portion of the holding member. The gaming machine C7, wherein the main body of the rotating body is rotatably arranged with the second rotating body on the outer peripheral side of the tubular portion of the holding member.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C4 to C6, the holding member is formed in a tubular shape and has a tubular portion protruding to one side, and the holding member has a tubular shape. Since the main body of the first rotating body is rotatably arranged on the inner peripheral side of the portion and the second rotating body is rotatably arranged on the outer peripheral side of the tubular portion of the holding member, the second rotating body is rotatably arranged on the holding member. It can be externally fitted to the main body of the first rotating body via the tubular portion. That is, not only the first rotating body but also the second rotating body can be held by the holding member. As a result, the arrangement positions of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be defined with the holding member as a reference, so that the gears engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be used. The positional relationship between the first gear and the second gear arranged on the holding member can be defined with reference to the holding member. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the meshing of the gears engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body with the first gear and the second gear. As a result, uneven wear of the gear can be suppressed and drive resistance can be suppressed.

In the game machine C7, the first rotating body is projected from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion, extends in the axial direction of the main body portion, and has a plurality of protruding portions scattered in the circumferential direction at predetermined intervals. A game machine C8 characterized by being provided.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of the game machine C7, the main body portion of the first rotating body is projected from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion and is extended in the axial direction of the main body portion, and at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. Since a plurality of protruding portions scattered apart from each other are provided, the contact area between the main body portion of the first rotating body and the tubular portion of the holding member is limited to the protruding portions, and the main body portion of the first rotating body is limited. It can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the tubular portion of the holding member.

It is preferable that the protruding portion is curved in an arc shape in which the shape of the cross section cut in a plane orthogonal to the axial direction of the main body portion is convex outward. This is because the contact area between the tubular portion of the holding member and the inner peripheral surface of the tubular portion can be suppressed, and the main body portion of the first rotating body can be rotated more smoothly on the inner peripheral side of the tubular portion of the holding member. Is.

In the game machine C8, the main body portion of the first rotating body is formed in a tubular shape, and the first rotating body is projected from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion and extends in the axial direction of the main body portion. The game machine C9 is provided with a plurality of inner protrusions arranged at positions in phase with the protrusions.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of the game machine C8, the main body portion of the first rotating body is formed in a tubular shape, and the first rotating body is projected from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion in the axial direction of the main body portion. Since it is provided with a plurality of inner protrusions that are extended to and arranged at positions that are in phase with the protrusions (that is, the back surface side of the region where the protrusions are formed), the main body of the first rotating body can be used. When molding with a resin mold, the shape of the main body of the first rotating body can be made uniform (symmetrical shape) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side to ensure the moldability. ..

In the game machine C9, in the first rotating body, the main body portion is divided in the axial direction, and the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are fastened at positions corresponding to the protruding portions. A game machine C10 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect of the game machine C9, in the first rotating body, the main body portion is divided in the axial direction, and the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are projected portions. Since the protruding portion also serves as the screw fastening portion for fastening the screw at the position corresponding to the above, the strength of the screw fastening portion can be ensured.

In any of the game machines C1 to C10, it is arranged on one side of the holding member and overlaps with at least one rotation locus of the first rotating body or the second rotating body in a front view, and is formed so as to be capable of emitting light. A game machine C11 comprising a light emitting means to be generated.

According to the game machine C11, in any of the game machines C1 to C10, it is arranged at a position on one side of the holding member and overlapping the rotation locus of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in the front view. Since the light emitting means is provided, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated concentrically, light emission by the light emitting means is played on at least one rotation locus of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. It can be visually recognized by a person. That is, it is possible to perform the effect of rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, at a position overlapping with the light emitted by the light emitting means, and as a result, the effect of rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies is more effective. It can be carried out.

In the game machine C11, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has a first portion and the first portion in which the light emitting means is visibly formed in a region where the rotation locus overlaps the light emitting means in front view. The gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the second portion in which the light emitting means is formed invisible is arranged alternately in the circumferential direction.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effect of the game machine C11, the light emitting means can be visually recognized in at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a region where the rotation locus overlaps the light emitting means in the front view. Since the first portion to be formed and the second portion to which the light emitting means is formed invisible are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated, the first portion is formed. By alternately passing the portion and the second portion in front of the light emitting means, the light emission of the light emitting means can be intermittently visually recognized by the player. That is, while rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body, it is possible to associate the rotation with the intermittent light emission of the light emitting means, and as a result, the effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies respectively. Can be done more effectively.

<Characteristic D group> 8 pieces on hold (exciting time)
The acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the determination condition. Based on this, a hit / fail determination means for executing the hit / miss determination, a display means for displaying the identification symbol corresponding to the information 1 stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied, and a predetermined opportunity. , The symbol variable means for changing the display mode of the identification symbol, the variable determination means for determining the identification symbol which can be varied by the symbol variable means, and the variable determination means for determining the identification symbol. It has a variable notification means for notifying the identification symbol, and the variable determination means is based on the fact that the number of the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined number or more. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the identification symbol different from the normal time is determined as the identification symbol that can be changed by the symbol variable means.

Here, in a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at the starting port, and a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Then, when a prize is won in the starting opening, a game machine that stores the right of the lottery up to a certain number and notifies the number by a symbol has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-13528). However, in this type of pachinko machine, if the lottery content stored on hold is first determined and notified, the willingness to win a prize at the starting port is reduced thereafter, and the game is stopped and the lottery result is waited for. There was a problem that the game was played and the player was bored. The game machine D1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the game machine D1 is to provide a game machine capable of reducing a problem that a player gets tired of a game at an early stage.

According to the game machine D1, the information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the pass / fail determination is executed by the pass / fail determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. The identification symbol corresponding to the information 1 stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied is displayed by the display means. Based on a predetermined opportunity, the display mode of the identification symbol is changed by the symbol variable means. The identification symbol that can be changed by the symbol variable means is determined by the variable determining means. The identification symbol determined to be variable by the variable determination means is notified by the variable notification means. The variable determination means is different from the normal identification as an identification symbol that can be changed by the symbol variable means based on the number of information stored in the storage means being a predetermined number or more. The symbol is determined by the variable determination means. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game so that the information is stored up to a predetermined number or more. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The game machine D1 has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that determines that the operation means has been operated, and the operation determination means causes the operation means to determine that the operation means has been operated. The gaming machine D2, characterized in that it is determined that the operation has been performed.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, it is determined by the operation determining means that the operating means that can be operated by the player has been operated. When it is determined by the operation determining means that the operating means has been operated, it is set as a predetermined trigger. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of operating the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the variable determination means variably determines for a plurality of the identification symbols based on the number of the information being a predetermined number or more. The featured game machine D3.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the number of information is variably determined for a plurality of identification symbols based on a predetermined number or more. Since it is determined, there is an effect that the player can be encouraged to play a game so as to store a predetermined number or more of information.

In the game machine D3, when a plurality of the identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determination means, a predetermined order is determined based on the determination that the operation is determined by the operation determination means. The gaming machine D4, wherein the identification symbol of 1 is variably displayed by the symbol variable means.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, when it is variably determined for a plurality of identification symbols by the variable determination means, it is determined that the operation is performed by the operation determination means. Based on this, since the identification symbols 1 are variably displayed by the symbol variable means in a predetermined order, there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the game machines D1 to D4, the symbol variable means has a preliminary hit / fail determination means for executing a hit / fail judgment based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the information corresponding to the variable identification symbol is variably displayed in a notification mode based on the result of the hit / miss determination by the advance hit / miss determination means.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D4, the following effect is played. That is, the pass / fail determination is executed by the advance pass / fail determination means based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied. The information corresponding to the variable identification symbol is variably displayed by the symbol variable means in a notification mode based on the result of the hit / fail determination by the prior hit / miss determination means. As a result, the hit / miss judgment result can be notified to the player before the hit / miss judgment result is notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with interest in the display mode changed by the symbol variable means.

In the game machine D5, when a plurality of the identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determination means, any one of the information corresponding to the variably determined identification symbols is described. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that it is variably displayed by the symbol variable means in a notification mode based on the determination result determined by the prior hit / miss determination means.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, when a plurality of identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determination means, the information corresponding to the variably determined identification symbols is obtained. Of these, since any information is variably displayed by the symbol variable means in a notification mode based on the determination result determined by the prior hit / fail determination means, the hit / fail determination result is known before being displayed by the identification symbol. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine D6, when a plurality of the identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determination means, one notification mode is displayed by variably displaying the plurality of identification symbols. A game machine D7 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, when a plurality of identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determination means, the plurality of identification symbols are variably displayed by displaying 1 Since the notification mode of the above is displayed, there is an effect that the notification mode can be diversified to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic D'group> 8 pieces Hold production 2 (exciting time)
Based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the acquisition means capable of acquiring the information, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied. A determination means for executing a determination based on the determination means, and a display means for displaying at least an identification symbol corresponding to the information before the determination is executed by the determination means among the information stored in the storage means. When the number of the information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means is executed is equal to or more than a predetermined number of the information stored in the storage means, the display means D'1 is a gaming machine D'1 comprising: a symbol variable means for varying the display mode of at least the predetermined number of the identification symbols displayed in the display mode to a predetermined display mode.

Here, in a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at the starting port, and a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Then, when a prize is won in the starting opening, a game machine that stores the right of the lottery up to a certain number and notifies the number by a symbol has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-13528). However, in this type of pachinko machine, if the lottery content stored on hold is first determined and notified, the willingness to win a prize at the starting port is reduced thereafter, and the game is stopped and the lottery result is waited for. There was a problem that the game was played and the player was bored. The game machine D'1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the game machine D'1 is to provide a game machine capable of reducing a problem that a player gets tired of a game at an early stage. ..

According to the game machine D'1, information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. When the determination condition is satisfied, the determination means executes the determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. The display means displays at least an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means is executed. When the number of information stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of pieces of information stored in the storage means before the determination is executed by the determination means, the display means is used by the symbol variable means. The display mode of at least a predetermined number of displayed identification symbols is changed to a predetermined display mode.

As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game so that the information is stored up to a predetermined number or more. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The game machine D'1 has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that determines that the operation means has been operated, and the predetermined opportunity is the operation by the operation determination means. The gaming machine D'2, characterized in that it is determined that the means has been operated.

According to the game machine D'2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D'1, the following effects are played. That is, it is determined by the operation determining means that the operating means that can be operated by the player has been operated. Then, the case where it is determined that the operation means has been operated by the operation determination means is set as a predetermined trigger. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of operating the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

In the game machine D'2, a variable identification symbol whose display mode changes when it is determined by the operation determination means that the operation means has been operated is identifiable before the operation means is operated. A game machine D'3 characterized by being provided with a notification means.

According to the game machine D'3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D'2, the variable notification means provides an identification symbol whose display mode changes when it is determined that the operation means has been operated by the variable notification means. Since the operating means is identifiable before being operated, the player can operate the operating means while grasping which identification symbol display mode is variable, and it is fun to operate the operating means. Can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

In the game machine D'3, the variable notification means changes the display mode of the identification symbol to the variable notification mode, and when it is determined that the operation means has been operated by the operation determination means, the display mode is displayed. The gaming machine D'4 is characterized in that the identification symbol in which the number is variable is notified so as to be identifiable before the operating means is operated.

According to the game machine D'4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D'3, the variable notification means notifies by changing the identification symbol itself to the variable notification mode, so that the player can display which identification symbol. It has the effect of being able to easily grasp whether or not is variable.

In the game machine D'4, when a plurality of the identification symbols are changed to the variable notification mode by the variable notification means, it is determined in advance based on the determination that the operation determination means has operated. The gaming machine D'5, wherein the identification symbol 1 is displayed in a variable order by the symbol variable means.

According to the game machine D'5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D'4, when a plurality of identification symbols are changed to the variable notification mode by the variable notification means, it is determined that the operation is performed by the operation determination means. Based on this, since the identification symbols 1 are variably displayed in a predetermined order, there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the game machines D'1 to D'5, there is a pre-determination means for executing the determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination is executed by the determination means. The game machine D'is characterized in that the symbol variable means changes the display mode of the identification symbol to a predetermined display mode in a notification mode based on a determination result determined by the pre-determination means. 6.

According to the game machine D'6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D'1 to D'5, the following effect is played. That is, before the determination based on the determination condition is executed, the determination is executed by the pre-determination means based on the information stored in the storage means. Then, the display mode of the identification symbol is changed to a predetermined display mode and displayed in the notification mode based on the determination result by the pre-determination means. As a result, the determination result of the pre-determination means can be notified to the player before the determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with interest in the display mode changed by the symbol variable means.

In the game machine D'6, the predetermined order is the order in which the information corresponding to the identification symbol is stored in the storage means, and the symbol variable means is one of the display modes of the identification symbol. The gaming machine D'7 is characterized in that the display mode of the identification symbol corresponding to the latter half of the order is changed to the notification mode.

According to the game machine D'7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D'6, the following effects are played. That is, the order in which the display mode of the identification symbol is changed by the symbol variable means is set as the order stored in the storage means, and the display mode of the identification symbol corresponding to the latter half of the order is changed to the notification mode. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of operating the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

In any of the game machines D'1 to D'7, the storage means is newly stored while the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol variable means is displayed on the display means. The gaming machine D'8 is characterized in that the display mode of the identification symbol corresponding to the information is also provided with an additional symbol variable means for changing the display mode to the predetermined display mode based on the predetermined trigger.

According to the game machine D'8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D'1 to D'7, the following effect is played. That is, based on a predetermined opportunity, the display mode of the identification symbol corresponding to the information newly stored by the storage means while the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol variable means is displayed on the display means. , It is changed to a predetermined display mode by the additional symbol changing means. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game even after the information is stored up to a predetermined number or more. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines D'1 to D'8, when all the information corresponding to the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol variable means is executed by the determination means, the determination is performed. Among the information stored in the storage means, when the number of the information before the determination by the determination means is executed is equal to or more than a predetermined second predetermined number, the information is described based on a predetermined opportunity. The gaming machine D'9 is provided with a second symbol variable means that changes the display mode of at least the second predetermined number of the identification symbols displayed on the display means to a predetermined second mode.

According to the game machine D'9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D'1 to D'8, the following effect is played. That is, when all the information corresponding to the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol variable means is determined by the determination means, among the information stored in the storage means, the determination is executed by the determination means. When the number of pieces of information before being performed is equal to or greater than a predetermined second predetermined number, at least a second predetermined number of identification symbols displayed on the display means by the second symbol variable means based on a predetermined opportunity. The display mode of is changed to a predetermined second mode. As a result, after the player plays the game so that the information is stored up to a predetermined number or more, the player can be prompted to play the game again so that the information is stored up to the second predetermined number or more. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines D'1 to D'9, the predetermined display mode is a game machine D'which combines the display modes of the plurality of identification symbols into one display mode. 10.

According to the game machine D'10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D'1 to D'9, the display modes of a plurality of identification symbols are combined to form one display mode. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game by giving the display mode of.

<Characteristic E group> A blank symbol is displayed as a push button notice. A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions and a lottery result by the lottery means are displayed between a plurality of different main symbols and the main symbols. By displaying a plurality of symbol rows composed of sub-symbols different from the symbols side by side, a display means that can be displayed in a stop-displayed combination of the main symbols of each symbol row and a lottery result specific to the display means. Based on the fact that the combination of the main symbols indicating the above is displayed, the game machine having the privilege granting means for granting the privilege advantageous to the player, and the game machine having the above-mentioned stop. Whether or not to display in a composite display mode in which the sub-symbol variable means for varying the display mode of the sub-symbol of the displayed symbol sequence and the sub-symbols variably displayed by the sub-symbol variable means are combined. A synthetic display mode in which the synthetic display mode is displayed on the display means based on a synthetic determination means determined based on the lottery result by the lottery means and the synthetic display mode determined to be displayed by the synthetic display mode. The gaming machine E1 characterized by having a display means.

Here, in a conventional pachinko machine or the like, a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. Are known. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. Among these types of pachinko machines, a game machine is proposed in which the game machine is provided with an operation means (switch, etc.) that can be operated by the player, and the player operates the operation means to change the production of the game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In such a pachinko machine, for example, there is a machine that executes a lottery to change the effect of the game when the operation means is operated in order to execute various effects when the player operates the operation means. .. However, in this type of pachinko machine, the production of the game changes at a certain timing or the like due to the operation of the player, and the player has a monotonous impression of the game, and the player gets tired of the game early. There was a problem that it would end up. The game machine E1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the game machine E1 is to provide a game machine capable of preventing a player from getting tired of a game at an early stage.

According to the game machine E1, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. By displaying the lottery result by the lottery means by arranging a plurality of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different main symbols and sub-symbols different from the main symbols between the symbols, the main symbols of each symbol row are stopped and displayed. It is displayed by the display means in combination. Based on the fact that a combination of main symbols indicating a specific lottery result is displayed on the display means, a privilege advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means. Based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display mode of the sub-symbols of the stopped-displayed symbol sequence is changed by the sub-symbol variable means. Whether or not to display the sub-symbols variably displayed by the sub-symbol variable means in a composite display mode is determined by the synthetic determination means based on the lottery result by the lottery means. Based on the fact that the synthetic display mode is determined to be displayed by the synthetic display mode, the synthetic display mode is displayed on the display means by the synthetic display mode display means. As a result, the synthetic display mode is displayed, so that the player can be provided with a fresh effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be reduced.

In the game machine E1, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation determination means that determines that the operation means has been operated, and the sub-symbol variable means when it is determined that the operation determination means has been operated. The gaming machine E2 is characterized by having an operation variable display means for variably displaying the display mode of the sub-symbol according to a specific display mode.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the following effects are played. That is, it is determined by the operation determining means that the operating means that can be operated by the player has been operated. When it is determined that the operation is performed by the operation determining means, if the display mode of the sub symbol is changed and displayed by the sub symbol variable means, the display mode is changed to a specific display mode by the operation variable display means. Is displayed. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the player operating the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.

In the game machine E2, the operation variable display means changes the display mode of the sub-symbol to one of the specific display modes among the plurality of specific display modes based on the lottery result by the lottery means. A game machine E3 characterized in that it is to be displayed.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the display mode of the sub-design is variable to one specific display mode among the plurality of specific display modes based on the lottery result by the lottery means. Since it is displayed by the operation variable display means, it is possible to diversify the display mode of the sub-symbol, and there is an effect that a fresh effect can be provided to the player.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the symbol sequence is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period, and then stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, and two or more symbols are displayed by the symbol sequence stopping means. It has a dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the symbol string when the column is stopped and displayed and one or more symbol columns are dynamically displayed, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. If this is the case, the game machine E4 is characterized in that the dynamic display period determining means determines a specific dynamic display period different from the normal time.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, the following effect is played. That is, after the symbol sequence is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period, it is stopped and displayed by the symbol column stopping means in a predetermined order. When two or more symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the symbol row stop means and one or more symbol rows are dynamically displayed, the dynamic display period of the symbol row is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. To. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the dynamic display period determining means determines a specific dynamic display period different from the normal time by the dynamic display period determining means.

Thereby, it can be determined that the sub-design is variably displayed according to a specific dynamic display period. Therefore, the player can play the game with interest even in the dynamic display period. Therefore, there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets tired of the game can be reduced.

In any of the game machines E1 to E4, the synthesis determining means is configured to easily determine the synthetic display mode when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. The featured game machine E5.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machines E1 to E4, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the synthetic display mode is easily determined by the synthetic determination means. The game can be performed with the expectation that the composite display mode will be displayed, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

Based on the lottery result by the lottery means based on the fact that when the synthetic display mode is displayed in any of the game machines E1 to E5, it is determined that the operation means has been operated by the operation determination means. The gaming machine E6 is characterized by having a synthetic variable means for displaying the synthetic display mode which is variably displayed in a specific display mode.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E5, when the composite display mode is displayed, it is determined that the operation means has been operated by the operation determination means. Since the composite display mode is variably displayed by the synthetic variable means in a specific display mode based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the player can intervene in the game and reduce the problem of getting bored with the game early. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine E6, when it is determined by the synthesis determining means to display in the composite display mode, the operation means operates the display mode variably displayed by the sub-symbol variable means by the operation determination means. The gaming machine E7 is characterized by having a prohibiting means for prohibiting variable display even if it is determined that the game has been performed.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E6, when it is determined by the synthesis determining means to display in the composite display mode, the display mode variably displayed by the sub-symbol variable means is determined by the operation. Even if it is determined that the operating means has been operated by the means, variable display is prohibited by the prohibited means. Therefore, by operating the operating means before the composite display mode is displayed, the composite display mode is displayed. It has the effect of being able to determine whether or not it is done.

<Characteristic E'group> The blank pattern is changed to a push button notice and displayed 2
A determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a symbol sequence in which a plurality of different main symbols and sub-symbols different from the main symbol are provided as identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means are displayed. Display means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the symbol string on the display means, a dynamic display period determining means for determining a period for dynamically displaying the symbol string by the dynamic display means, and the above. When the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a predetermined condition is satisfied in the gaming machine having the first privilege giving means for giving the first privilege advantageous to the player. When the sub-symbol variable means for changing the display mode of the sub-symbol during the dynamic display period and the sub-symbol variable means change the sub-symbol to a specific display mode and display the sub-symbols. The gaming machine E'1 is characterized by having a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect according to the remaining period of the dynamic display period.

Here, in a conventional pachinko machine or the like, a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. Are known. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. Among these types of pachinko machines, a game machine is proposed in which the game machine is provided with an operation means (switch, etc.) that can be operated by the player, and the player operates the operation means to change the production of the game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In such a pachinko machine, for example, in order to execute various effects when the player operates the operating means, a lottery is executed to change the effect of the game when the operating means are operated. is there. However, in this type of pachinko machine, the production of the game changes at a certain timing or the like due to the operation of the player, and the player has a monotonous impression of the game, and the player gets tired of the game early. There was a problem that it would end up. The game machine E'1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the game machine E'1 is to provide a game machine capable of preventing a player from getting tired of a game at an early stage.

According to the game machine E'1, the determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. As the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, a symbol sequence in which a plurality of different main symbols and sub-symbols different from the main symbol are provided is displayed on the display means. The symbol string is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The period for dynamically displaying the symbol string by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. When the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the first privilege is given to the player by the first privilege giving means. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display mode of the sub symbol is changed during the dynamic display period by the sub symbol variable means. When the sub-design is displayed in a specific display mode, the specific effect execution means executes a specific effect for the remaining period of the dynamic display period. As a result, it is possible to provide a fresh effect using the sub-design. Therefore, there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be reduced.

In the game machine E'1, the specific effect is a composite display mode in which a plurality of sub-symbols that have become the specific display mode are combined after being changed to the specific display mode by the sub-symbol variable means. A game machine E'2 characterized by being a display effect.

According to the game machine E'2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E'1, a composite display mode in which a plurality of sub-designs in a specific display mode are combined as a specific effect is displayed, so that the player has a fresh taste. It has the effect of being able to provide a certain effect and reducing the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The game machine E'1 or E'2 has an operating means that can be operated by the player and a predetermined condition determining means for determining the establishment of the predetermined condition based on the operation of the operating means. The featured game machine E'3.

According to the game machine E'3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E'1 or E'2, the establishment of the predetermined condition is determined by the predetermined condition determining means based on the operation of the operating means that can be operated by the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the player operating the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.

In the game machine E'3, the sub-symbol variable means is displayed in the specific display mode based on the operation of the operation means when the sub-symbol is displayed in the specific display mode. The gaming machine E'4, characterized in that the sub-design is variably displayed in the composite display mode.

According to the game machine E'4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E'3, the sub-design is variably displayed from a specific display mode to a composite display mode based on the operation of the operating means. In order to execute a specific effect, the player must positively operate the operating means, and the player can be prompted to operate the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.

In any of the game machines E'1 to E'4, the display means displays a plurality of the symbol strings as identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and displays the plurality of symbol sequences for a predetermined period. During the period, after the dynamic display, the design sequence stop means for stopping and displaying in a predetermined order based on the determination result by the determination means, and the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect. If so, the gaming machine E'5 is characterized in that the number of sub-symbols to be stopped and displayed is different based on the determination result by the determination means.

According to the game machine E'5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E'1 to E'4, the following effect is played. That is, a plurality of symbol strings as identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means are displayed by the display means. After dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol rows for a predetermined period, the symbol row stopping means stops and displays them in a predetermined order based on the determination result by the determination means. When a specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, the number of sub-symbols to be stopped and displayed is different based on the determination result by the determination means. As a result, a specific effect using the sub-symbol can be made into an effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and a fresh effect using the sub-symbol can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be reduced.

When the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, or when the determination result of the determination means is likely to be a specific determination result, the number of sub-symbols stopped and displayed by the symbol sequence stop means is increased. You should do it. By doing so, the higher the number of sub-designs, the higher the expectation of a big hit, and the player can be interested in a specific production. Therefore, there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be reduced.

In any of the game machines E'1 to E'5, the sub-symbol variable means changes the sub-symbol to the specific display mode when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result. A game machine E'6 characterized in that it is configured to be easy to display.

According to the game machine E'6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E'1 to E'5, the sub-symbol variable means sets the sub-symbol when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. Since it is configured to be variable to a specific display mode and easily displayed, the game can be performed with the expectation that the specific display mode will be displayed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines E'2 to E'6, the specific display mode is a display mode in which the display mode of the sub-design is changed into characters, and the synthetic effect mode is the specific display mode. It is a character string obtained by synthesizing a plurality of sub-designs in the display mode, and the specific effect displays the composite effect mode by combining at least a part of the characters displayed as the specific display mode. A game machine E'7 characterized by this.

According to the game machine E'7, in addition to the effects played by the game machines E'2 to E'6, the following effects are played. That is, the character string as the composite effect mode is displayed by synthesizing a plurality of displayed sub-designs that are changed into characters as a specific display mode. A composite effect mode in which at least a part of characters displayed as a specific display mode is combined is displayed as a specific effect. As a result, the player can predict the character string displayed as the composite display mode by looking at the plurality of characters displayed as the specific display mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh effect, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In addition, among the characters displayed as a specific display mode, it may be possible to partially notify that the character string displayed as the composite effect mode is used before the composite effect mode is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to provide a hint for predicting the character string displayed as the composite display mode, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

From the effect storage means for storing a plurality of effects executed when the dynamic display is performed in any of the game machines E'3 to E'7, and the effects stored in the effect storage means, the above When it is determined by the predetermined condition establishment determination means that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first effect including the specific effect is selected, and the predetermined condition establishment determination means satisfies the predetermined condition. The gaming machine E'8 is characterized by having an effect selection means for selecting a second effect that does not include the specific effect when it is not determined.

According to the game machine E'8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E'3 to E'7, the following effect is played. That is, a plurality of effects to be executed when the dynamic display is performed by the effect storage means are stored. The first effect or the second effect is selected by the effect selection means based on the determination result of the predetermined condition establishment determination means. As a result, different effects are selected based on the determination result of the predetermined condition establishment determination means while the dynamic display is being performed. Therefore, since it is possible to change only the effect while the dynamic display is being performed based on the determination result of the predetermined condition establishment determination means, there is an effect that the amount of data related to the dynamic display can be reduced.

<Characteristic F group> A display means capable of displaying an effect mode for executing an extension effect at the end of SPGT, and a time measuring means capable of measuring even in a power failure state in which the power supplied to the game machine is equal to or less than a predetermined voltage value. And the acquisition means for acquiring the time information from the timekeeping means, the elapsed time determining means for determining the elapsed time based on the time information acquired from the acquiring means, and the elapsed time determining means for determining the elapsed time. When it is determined that the effect has been achieved, the switching display means for switching and displaying the effect mode displayed on the display means until the predetermined period elapses, and the predetermined condition when the predetermined period elapses. The game machine F1 is characterized by having an extension period setting means for setting an extension period for displaying the specific effect mode by extending the period when it is determined that the effect has been established. ..

Here, in a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, an RTC (real-time clock) is provided in the game machine, and the same effect is executed between a plurality of game machines at the same timing based on the time data measured by the RTC. A gaming machine configured to change the display mode or the display mode is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31695). In such a pachinko machine, the display mode is changed when the RTC reaches a preset time. However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that when the period in which the display mode is changed ends, the player's willingness to play is reduced and the player gets tired of the game. The game machine F1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the game machine F1 is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of a game at an early stage.

According to the game machine F1, the effect mode is displayed by the display means. Even when the power supplied to the game machine is equal to or less than a predetermined voltage value, the time is measured by the time measuring means. Time information is acquired by the acquisition means from the timekeeping means. Based on the time information acquired from the acquisition means, the elapsed time is determined by the elapsed time determining means. When it is determined by the elapsed time determining means that a predetermined elapsed time has elapsed, the effect mode displayed on the display means is switched to a specific effect mode and displayed by the switching display means until the predetermined period elapses. When a predetermined period elapses and it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the extension period for displaying the specific effect mode is set by the extension period setting means. As a result, the case where the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed is extended and the case where the period is not extended changes depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game machine F1, the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The lottery is executed based on the lottery means for executing the lottery, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means before the lottery condition is satisfied. The pre-lottery means is provided, and the predetermined condition is configured so as to be easily satisfied when the information determined to be a specific lottery result by the pre-lottery means is stored. The featured game machine F2.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F1, the following effects are played. That is, the information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, a lottery is executed for the information by the lottery means. Identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. The lottery is executed by the pre-lottery means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means before the lottery conditions are satisfied. When the information determined to be a specific lottery result is stored by the pre-lottery means, the predetermined condition is easily satisfied. As a result, it can be expected that the result will be a specific lottery result by extending the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed will be extended.

The game machine F2 has a dynamic display period determining means for determining a period for dynamically displaying the identification information, and the elapsed time is before the period determined by the dynamic display period determining means elapses. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed when the above-mentioned is passed.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F2, the following effects are played. That is, the period for dynamically displaying the identification information is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. If the elapsed time elapses before the period determined by the dynamic display period determining means elapses, the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed. As a result, the dynamic display can be temporarily stopped at the end timing of the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily determine the end timing.

The game machine F3 is characterized in that the identification information is displayed in a specific dynamic display mode in a predetermined period until the elapsed time elapses.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the identification information is displayed in a specific dynamic display mode in a predetermined period until the elapsed time elapses, so that it is specified that the elapsed time elapses. There is an effect that it can be discriminated by the dynamic display mode of.

<Characteristic F'group> Execute extension effect at the end of SPGT 2
A display means capable of displaying an effect mode, a predetermined period setting means capable of setting a predetermined period, a predetermined period determining means for determining whether the predetermined period is set by the predetermined period setting means, and the predetermined period determining means. When it is determined that the predetermined period is reached, the switching display means for switching the effect mode displayed on the display means to a specific effect mode and displaying the effect mode, and the predetermined period have passed and the predetermined conditions are satisfied. The gaming machine F'1 is characterized by having an extension period setting means for setting an extension period for displaying the specific effect mode by extending the period when it is determined to be.

Here, in a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game machine configured to execute the same effect at the same timing or change the display mode among a plurality of game machines has been known ( For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31695). Such a pachinko machine is equipped with, for example, an RTC (real-time clock), and is configured to change the display mode when the time information acquired from the RTC reaches a preset time. However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that when the period in which the display mode is changed ends, the player's willingness to play is reduced and the player gets tired of the game. The game machine F'1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the game machine F'1 is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of a game at an early stage.

According to the game machine F'1, the effect mode is displayed on the display means. The predetermined period determining means determines whether or not the predetermined period is set by the predetermined period setting means. When it is determined that the period is a predetermined period, the effect mode displayed on the display means by the switching display means is switched to a specific effect mode and displayed. When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined period elapses, the extension period setting means extends the period for displaying the specific effect mode. As a result, the period during which the specific effect mode is displayed changes depending on the establishment of the predetermined condition, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game machine F'1, the elapsed time determination for determining the elapsed time based on the timing means capable of timing, the acquisition means for acquiring the time information from the timing means, and the time information acquired from the acquisition means. The predetermined period setting means sets the predetermined period based on the time information acquired from the time measuring means, and the predetermined period determining means sets the time information acquired from the time measuring means. The game machine F'2, which determines whether or not the predetermined period is based on the above.

According to the game machine F'2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F'1, the following effects are played. That is, the time information is acquired from the time measuring means by the acquisition means, and the elapsed time determining means discriminates the elapsed time based on the time information. A predetermined period is set by the predetermined period setting means based on the time information acquired from the time measuring means, and whether or not the predetermined period is determined by the predetermined period determining means based on the time information acquired from the time measuring means. As a result, a specific effect mode is displayed based on the time information, so that it is possible to display the effect mode with a sense of unity on a plurality of pachinko machines. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game machine F'2, the information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the determination condition based on the establishment of the determination condition. The predetermined condition includes a determination means for executing a determination on information and a pre-determination means for executing a determination based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means before the determination condition is satisfied. The gaming machine F'3 is characterized in that it is easily established when the information determined as a specific determination result by the prior determination means is stored.

According to the game machine F'3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F'2, the following effects are produced. That is, the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the determination means executes the determination on the information based on the establishment of the determination condition. Before the determination condition is satisfied by the pre-determination means, the determination is executed based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means. When the information determined to be a specific determination result is stored by the prior determination means, the predetermined condition is easily satisfied. As a result, it can be expected that a specific determination result will be obtained by extending the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed will be extended.

The game machine F'2 or F'3 has an information input means capable of inputting specific information, and the predetermined period setting means is obtained from the specific information input by the information input means and the timekeeping means. Based on the acquired time information, the period for performing the specific effect mode is set to at least a first predetermined period which is the predetermined period and a second predetermined period different from the predetermined period. The game machine F'4.

According to the game machine F'4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F'2 or F'3, the following effects are played. That is, specific information is input by the information input means. The predetermined period setting means sets a period in which a specific effect mode is performed based on the specific information input by the information input means and the time information acquired from the timekeeping means. Thereby, it is possible to set a period in which a specific effect mode is performed based on two pieces of information, inputtable information and time information. Therefore, by combining the two pieces of information, it is possible to set a plurality of patterns for a period during which a specific effect mode is performed, so that there is an effect that an unexpected effect can be provided. Further, there is an effect that the period for performing a specific effect mode can be changed by changing the time information without changing the information that can be input.

In the game machine F'4, the game machine F'5 is characterized in that the predetermined period setting means sets a period longer than the first predetermined period as the second predetermined period.

According to the game machine F'5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F'4, the second predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means is set as a period longer than the first predetermined period, so that it is specific. When the production mode continues longer than the first predetermined period, the player is made to imagine whether it is an extension period based on the establishment of the predetermined condition or a period set as the second predetermined period. However, it has the effect of suppressing the problem of getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines F'3 to F'5, the dynamic display period determining means for determining the period for dynamically displaying the identification information is provided, and the period determined by the dynamic display period determining means elapses. The gaming machine F'6 is characterized by having a temporary stop display means for temporarily stopping and displaying the identification information when the elapsed time has elapsed.

According to the game machine F'6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F'3 to F'5, the following effect is played. That is, the period for dynamically displaying the identification information is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. If the elapsed time elapses before the period determined by the dynamic display period determining means elapses, the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed. As a result, the dynamic display can be temporarily stopped at the end timing of the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily determine the end timing.

In the game machine F'6, when the temporary stop is displayed by the temporary stop display means and the extension period is set by the extension period setting means, a specific effect is produced after the predetermined period has elapsed. The gaming machine F'7 is characterized by having a specific effect display means for displaying a display mode on the display means.

According to the game machine F'7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F'6, the following effects are played. That is, when the temporary stop display means temporarily stops and the display is performed and the extension period is set by the extension period setting means, the specific effect display mode is displayed by the specific effect display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. To display. As a result, the player for whom the extension period is set is displayed in the specific effect display mode from the state in which the temporary stop is displayed, so that the player from the same temporary stop display as the surrounding players is displayed with the surrounding players. Is displayed in a different specific effect display mode, so that a sense of superiority can be felt. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine F'7 is characterized by having a suggestion effect display means for causing the display means to display a suggestion effect suggesting that the extension period is set during the predetermined period. F'8.

According to the game machine F'8, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F'7, a suggestion effect suggesting that an extension period is set by the suggestion effect display means is displayed on the display means during a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

A game characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F'2 to F'8, the timekeeping means is configured to be capable of timekeeping even when power is not supplied to the game machine. Machine F'9.

According to the game machine F'9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F'2 to F'8, it is possible to time the time even when the power is not supplied to the game machine. It is possible to keep time regardless of the power-on state of the game machine, and there is an effect that a specific effect mode can be accurately executed based on the time information.

A game machine F'10, wherein in any of the game machines F'2 to F'9, the timekeeping means has a correction means capable of correcting the current time.

According to the game machine F'10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F'2 to F'9, the timekeeping means can correct the current time by the correction means, and thus is based on the time information. This has the effect of being able to accurately execute a specific effect mode.

In any of the game machines F'4 to F'10, the information input means is characterized in that an input enable period during which information can be input is set.

According to the game machine F'11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F'4 to F'10, the period during which information can be input is set by the information input means. Therefore, for example, the business period is input. By setting it outside the possible period, the period during which the specific effect mode is displayed is not changed during business, and there is an effect that the specific effect mode can be executed at a desired timing.

In the game machine F'11, the acquisition means acquires the day of the week information as the time information, and the predetermined period setting means has a different period for displaying the specific effect mode due to the difference in the day of the week information. The game machine F'12, which is characterized in that it is set to be.

According to the game machine F'12, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F'11, the day of the week information is acquired by the acquisition means, and the acquired day of the week information is different, so that a specific effect mode is displayed by the predetermined period setting means. Since the period for performing is set to be different, there is an effect that the period for performing a specific production mode can be changed by changing the day of the week information without changing the information that can be input.

In any of the game machines F'4 to F'12, the predetermined period setting means can set a plurality of periods for displaying the specific effect mode in time series. Machine F'13.

According to the game machine F'13, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F'4 to F'12, a plurality of periods for displaying a specific effect mode are set in chronological order by a predetermined period setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the work of setting the period for performing a specific effect mode can be simplified.

In the game machine F'13, the acquisition means acquires time information as the time information, and the predetermined period setting means can set a period for displaying the specific effect mode from a plurality of different periods. Even if the period for displaying the specific effect mode is different by the predetermined period setting means, the timing for executing the display of the specific effect mode is unified based on the time information. A game machine F'14 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine F'14, in addition to the effects of the game machine F'13, the following effects are produced. That is, the acquisition means acquires the time information. The predetermined period setting means makes it possible to set the period for displaying a specific effect mode from a plurality of different periods, and even if different periods are set, the timing for executing the display of the specific effect mode is unified based on the time information. To do. As a result, even if the period for displaying the specific effect mode is different, the timing at which the display of the specific effect mode is executed can be unified, so that the player executes the display of the specific effect mode. It is not possible to grasp the length of the period in which a specific effect mode is displayed depending on the timing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play while being interested in whether or not the period in which the specific production mode is displayed exceeds the predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. effective.

In the game machines F'1 to F'14, the display timing for setting the timing for executing the display of the effect mode displayed on the display means at a predetermined interval within the predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means. The setting means, the effect mode executing means for executing the effect mode based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the execution of the effect mode by the effect mode execution means are waited until the timing set by the display timing setting means. The gaming machine F'15, characterized in that it has a production mode standby means for causing the movement.

According to the game machine F'15, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F'1 to F'14, the following effects are produced. That is, within the predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means, the timing for executing the display of the effect mode displayed on the display means by the display timing setting means is set at a predetermined interval. The execution of the selection mode performed by the effect mode execution means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition is made to wait until the timing set by the effect mode standby means. As a result, the effect mode to be executed within the predetermined period is also executed at a predetermined timing. Therefore, it is possible to produce a sense of unity among a plurality of game machines, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game machines F'2 to F'14, the display execution time for setting the time for executing the display of the effect mode displayed on the display means at a predetermined time interval based on the time information acquired by the acquisition means. An effect mode in which the setting means, the effect mode executing means for executing the effect mode based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the effect mode execution means for executing the effect mode are waited until the time set by the display execution time setting means. A game machine F'16 characterized by having a standby means.

According to the game machine F'16, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F'2 to F'14, the following effect is played. That is, the display execution time setting means sets the time for executing the display of the effect mode displayed on the display means based on the time information acquired by the acquisition means at predetermined time intervals. The execution of the selection mode performed by the effect mode execution means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions is set by the effect mode standby means and waits until a time. As a result, the effect mode to be executed within the predetermined period is also executed at a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to produce a sense of unity among the plurality of game machines, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines F'1 to F'16, the predetermined period setting means has an operating means capable of performing a predetermined input operation, and the predetermined period setting means performs the predetermined period based on the predetermined input operation by the operating means. A game machine F'17 characterized in that it is to be set.

According to the game machine F'17, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F'1 to F'16, a predetermined period by the predetermined period setting means is set based on a predetermined operation by the operating means. There is an effect that a predetermined period can be easily set to a desired period.

In any of the game machines F'1 to F'17, an effect information output means for outputting at least the effect information including the specific effect mode information based on the specific effect mode displayed on the display means, and the effect information output thereof. An effect information input means capable of inputting information corresponding to the effect information output by the means, a specific effect mode setting means for setting the specific effect mode based on the information input by the effect information input means, and a specific effect mode setting means. A game machine F'18 characterized by having.

According to the game machine F'18, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F'1 to F'18, the following effect is played. That is, the effect information including at least the specific effect mode information based on the specific effect mode displayed on the display means by the effect information output means is output. Information corresponding to the effect information is input by the effect information input means. The specific effect mode setting means sets a specific effect mode based on the information input by the effect information input means. As a result, it is possible to set a specific effect mode displayed on another pachinko machine, so that the effect mode can be freely synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets tired of the game machine at an early stage.

In addition, it is preferable that the effect information output by the game machine F'18 includes information on the time when a specific effect is displayed. By doing so, there is an effect that the time when the specific effect mode is displayed can be synchronized regardless of the timing at which the specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means.

In the game machine F'18, the effect information output means displays the effect information on the display means in a manner that can be acquired by an external device.

According to the game machine F'19, in addition to the effect of the game machine F'18, the effect information is output in a mode (for example, a two-dimensional information code) that the effect information output means can be acquired by an external device (for example, a mobile terminal). Since it is displayed, there is an effect that the setting work of the specific effect mode can be facilitated by the specific effect mode setting means.

<Characteristic G group> Design size displayed on a fisheye liquid crystal First display means having a display area formed by arranging a plurality of first pixels composed of the first display size, and the first display means thereof. A second display means having a display area arranged in close proximity to the display area and having a display area formed by arranging a plurality of second pixels having a second display size smaller than the first display size, and the first display unit. A game characterized by having a display control means capable of moving and displaying the same symbol data from the display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. Machine G1.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed that provides a novel production mode by arranging a plurality of display devices and providing the player with different display modes (for example,). Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-270417). However, this type of pachinko machine has a problem that the load applied to the display control becomes large and the control load increases. The game machine G1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the game machine G1 is to provide a game machine capable of reducing a control load.

According to the game machine G1, the first display means is configured by a display area formed by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured in the first display size. The second display means is configured by a display area formed by arranging a plurality of second pixels having a second display size smaller than the first display size and arranged close to the display area of the first display means. ing. The same symbol data is moved and displayed by the display control means from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. As a result, by displaying the same display data on different display means, it is possible to display the symbols in different display sizes. Therefore, even when it is desired to change the display size of the symbol and display it, the load of the control process for changing the enlargement ratio of the display data or the like can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

In the game machine G1, the game machine G2 is characterized in that the first display size and the second display size are each configured at a predetermined enlargement ratio.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the first display size and the second display size are each composed of a predetermined enlargement ratio, so that the size of the displayed symbol is a predetermined enlargement. There is an effect that it can be displayed differently depending on the rate.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the symbol data that is commonly displayed by the first display means and the second display means is image information that is scroll-displayed.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, the symbol data commonly displayed by the first display means and the second display means is image information that is scroll-displayed. The design can be scrolled and displayed across the first display means and the second display means, which has the effect of providing the player with a fresh effect.

In any of the game machines G1 to G3, the storage means in which the symbol data to be displayed by the display control means is stored, the symbol data is acquired from the storage means, and the acquired symbol data is stored in the display control means. The display control means has a display data setting means for setting an enlargement ratio to be displayed on the screen, and the display control means is moved from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the symbol data having the same enlargement ratio set by the display data setting means is moved and displayed.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G3, the following effect is played. That is, the symbol data displayed by the display control means is stored by the storage means. The display data setting means sets an enlargement ratio for acquiring symbol data from the storage means and displaying the acquired symbol data on the display control means. When the display control means moves from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means to display, the symbol data of the same enlargement ratio set by the display data setting means is displayed. It is moved and displayed by the control means. As a result, the display size of the symbol can be displayed differently between the first display means and the second display means without changing the enlargement ratio. Therefore, there is an effect that the load due to the process of changing the display size of the symbol and displaying it can be reduced.

In any of the game machines G1 to G4, the game machine G5 is characterized in that the first display means has a display area larger than that of the second display means.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G4, the first display means has a larger display area than the second display means, so that the player can display a different impression. It has the effect of being able to produce.

In any of the game machines G1 to G5, there is a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the display control means dynamically transmits identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means with the symbol. A game machine G6 characterized in that it is to be displayed.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G5, the following effect is played. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. In the display control means, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is dynamically displayed by the display control means as a symbol. As a result, the lottery result can be discriminated by the symbol, and there is an effect that the player can be interested in the dynamic display of the symbol.

In the game machine G6, the symbol showing the identification information is scrolled and displayed by scrolling the data set at the predetermined enlargement ratio by the second display means, and then set to the first display means at the enlargement ratio. The gaming machine G7 is characterized in that after being moved and displayed with the information, the data is scrolled and displayed with the data set at a predetermined enlargement ratio by the first display means.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of the game machine G6, the symbol showing the identification information is displayed in the first display after scrolling and displaying the data set at a predetermined enlargement ratio by the second display means. After the information set at the enlargement ratio is moved and displayed on the means, the display control means scrolls and displays the symbol indicating the identification information with the data set at the predetermined enlargement ratio on the first display means. When the display means is moved from the display means to the first display means and the enlargement ratio is changed for display, there is an effect that the processing for changing the enlargement ratio can be reduced.

<Characteristic G'group> Design size 2 displayed on fisheye LCD
The first display means having a display area formed by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured in the first display size and the first display means arranged close to the display area of the first display means, the first display size. A second display means having a display area formed by arranging a plurality of second pixels having a second display size smaller than that of the first display means, and the second display means or the second display means from the first display means. The gaming machine G'1 is characterized by having a display control means capable of moving and displaying the same symbol data to the first display means.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed that provides a novel production mode by arranging a plurality of display devices and providing the player with different display modes (for example,). Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-270417). However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the load applied to the display control becomes large and the control load increases. The game machine G'1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the game machine G'1 is to provide a game machine capable of reducing a control load.

According to the game machine G'1, the first display means is configured by a display area formed by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured in the first display size. The second display means is configured by a display area formed by arranging a plurality of second pixels having a second display size smaller than the first display size and arranged close to the display area of the first display means. ing. The same symbol data is moved and displayed by the display control means from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. As a result, by displaying the same display data on different display means, it is possible to display the symbols in different display sizes. Therefore, even when it is desired to change the display size of the symbol and display it, the load of the control process for changing the enlargement ratio of the display data or the like can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

In the game machine G'1, the game machine G'2 is characterized in that the first display size and the second display size are each configured at a predetermined enlargement ratio.

According to the game machine G'2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G'1, the first display size and the second display size are each composed of a predetermined enlargement ratio, so that the size of the displayed symbol is large. Has the effect of being able to be displayed differently at a predetermined magnification.

In the game machine G'1 or G'2, the symbol data that is commonly displayed by the first display means and the second display means is image information that is scroll-displayed. ´3.

According to the game machine G'3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G'1 or G'2, the symbol data commonly displayed by the first display means and the second display means is a scroll-displayed image. Since it is information, the symbol can be scrolled and displayed across the first display means and the second display means, and there is an effect that a fresh effect can be provided to the player.

In any of the game machines G'1 to G'3, a storage means in which the symbol data to be displayed by the display control means is stored, and the symbol data acquired from the storage means, and the acquired symbol data is stored. The display control means includes a display data setting means for setting an enlargement ratio to be displayed on the display control means, and the display control means has the first display means from the first display means or the second display means to the first display. The gaming machine G'4 is characterized in that when it is moved to a means and displayed, the symbol data of the same enlargement ratio set by the display data setting means is moved and displayed.

According to the game machine G'4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G'1 to G'3, the following effect is played. That is, the symbol data displayed by the display control means is stored by the storage means. The display data setting means sets an enlargement ratio for acquiring symbol data from the storage means and displaying the acquired symbol data on the display control means. When the display control means moves from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means to display, the symbol data of the same enlargement ratio set by the display data setting means is displayed. It is moved and displayed by the control means. As a result, the display size of the symbol can be displayed differently between the first display means and the second display means without changing the enlargement ratio. Therefore, there is an effect that the load due to the process of changing the display size of the symbol and displaying it can be reduced.

In any of the game machines G'1 to G'4, the game machine G'5 is characterized in that the first display means has a display area larger than that of the second display means.

According to the game machine G'5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G'1 to G'4, the first display means has a larger display area than the second display means, so that the game It has the effect of being able to give a different impression to the person.

In any of the game machines G'1 to G'5, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions is provided, and the display control means provides identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means. A game machine G'6 characterized in that it is dynamically displayed with a pattern.

According to the game machine G'6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G'1 to G'5, the following effect is played. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. In the display control means, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is dynamically displayed by the display control means as a symbol. As a result, the lottery result can be discriminated by the symbol, and there is an effect that the player can be interested in the dynamic display of the symbol.

In the game machine G'6, the symbol indicating the identification information is enlarged and displayed by scrolling the data set at the predetermined enlargement ratio by the second display means, and then the first display means is displayed at the enlargement ratio. The gaming machine G'7 is characterized in that after being moved and displayed with the set information, it is scroll-displayed with the data set at a predetermined enlargement ratio by the first display means.

According to the game machine G'7, in addition to the effect of the game machine G'6, the symbol showing the identification information is enlarged and displayed by scrolling the data set at a predetermined enlargement ratio by the second display means. , After being moved and displayed on the first display means with the information set at the enlargement ratio, a symbol indicating the identification information with the data set at the predetermined enlargement ratio by the first display means is scrolled and displayed by the display control means. Therefore, when the enlargement ratio is changed when the display is moved from the second display means to the first display means, there is an effect that the process of changing the enlargement ratio can be reduced.

<Characteristic H group> Pre-pseudo-variation on the sub screen The first display means having a specific first display area, the second display means having a second display area different from the first display area, and the acquisition conditions. Based on the establishment, it is determined that a predetermined condition is satisfied with the acquisition means capable of acquiring information, the display control means for displaying the effect based on the information on the first display means or the second display means. The display control means includes the condition determination means, and when the condition determination means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display control means performs an effect based on the information on the first display area or the first display area. 2. The gaming machine H1 characterized in that it moves from one of the display areas of the display areas to the other display area for display.

Here, in some conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided, and various effect images are displayed on the display device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-13528). .. However, although the above-mentioned game machine can display various effect images, since the effect image is displayed only at one place, it provides a surprising game using the effect image. There was a problem that the player could not do it and the player got bored. The game machine H1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and by providing an unexpected game using a production image, a game machine capable of alleviating the player's boredom. The purpose is to provide.

According to the game machine H1, the display control means displays an effect based on the information acquired by the acquisition means on the first display means having the first display area or the second display means having the second display area. Will be done. Then, when it is determined by the condition determination means that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect displayed in either the first display area or the second display area is moved to the other display area. It is possible to provide a game that is unexpected, and there is an effect that the player's boredom can be alleviated.

In the game machine H1, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means for executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied, and a determination means thereof. As the effect based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display control means for causing the first display means to perform the dynamic display for a predetermined time, and the storage means before the determination by the determination means is executed. A pre-determination means that executes a pre-determination based on the stored information, and a pre-dynamic display that causes the second display means to perform a pre-dynamic display as the effect based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means. A gaming machine H2 characterized by having a control means.

Here, in a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the winning opening, a variable display is performed according to the lottery result, and the right of the lottery is reserved and stored. There is a gaming machine that performs an effect of changing the display mode during variable display (so-called look-ahead effect) based on the contents of the lottery of the reserved memory (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-16499). However, in the game machine described above, the variable display according to the lottery result and the display of the look-ahead effect described above are executed by one display means, and when the look-ahead effect corresponding to a specific reserved memory is performed, the look-ahead effect is executed. , There is a problem that the player is not interested in the variable display for the other reserved memories because the production mainly for the specific reserved memory is forcibly performed. The game machine H1 is designed to solve the above-exemplified problems, and provides a game machine capable of preventing the player's interest from being lowered while performing an effect based on the hold memory. The purpose.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H1, the following effects are played. That is, when the determination condition is satisfied, the determination means executes a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and causes the first display means to perform dynamic display as an effect based on the determination result. Prior to the determination by the determination means, the advance determination is executed based on the information stored in the storage means, and the effect is dynamically displayed in advance on the second display means as an effect based on the advance determination result. To do. As a result, by displaying the dynamic display on the first display means and the pre-dynamic display on the second display means, each movement is expected while expecting the lottery contents reserved and stored by the pre-dynamic display. You can pay close attention to the result of the target display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the dynamic display.

In the game machine H2, the storage means can store a plurality of the information up to a predetermined number, and the information selection means for selecting arbitrary information from the plurality of information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the pre-dynamic display control means is for causing pre-dynamic display corresponding to the information selected by the information selection means.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H2, the following effects are played. That is, the storage means stores a plurality of pieces of information up to a predetermined number, and the information selection means selects arbitrary information from the plurality of stored information. The pre-dynamic display control means causes the information selected by the information selection means to perform pre-dynamic display in an appropriate manner. As a result, the pre-dynamic display based on the information desired by the player is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's boredom can be alleviated.

In the game machine H3, the second display means is configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of pre-dynamic displays corresponding to a plurality of information stored in the storage means, and the information selection means is the said. The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that an arbitrary pre-dynamic display is selected from a plurality of pre-dynamic displays displayed on the second display means.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, a plurality of pre-dynamic displays corresponding to a plurality of information stored in the storage means are displayed on the second display means, and the plurality of displayed pieces are displayed. Since any pre-dynamic display is selected from the pre-dynamic display by the information selection means, there is an effect that the player can easily select the desired pre-dynamic display.

The game machine H3 or H4 has a hold symbol display control means for displaying at least the hold symbol corresponding to the information before the determination is executed by the determination means among the information stored in the storage means. The information selection means selects an arbitrary reserved symbol from a plurality of reserved symbols displayed by the reserved symbol display control means, and the pre-dynamic display control means selects by the information selection means. A game machine H5 characterized in that a pre-dynamic display corresponding to a reserved symbol is performed.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machine H3 or H4, the following effects are produced. That is, the reserved symbol display control means displays the reserved symbol corresponding to at least the information before the determination by the determining means is executed among the information stored in the storage means. An arbitrary reserved symbol is selected from the plurality of displayed reserved symbols by the information selection means, and the pre-dynamic display control means causes the pre-dynamic display to perform the pre-dynamic display corresponding to the selected reserved symbol. As a result, any pre-dynamic display can be selected while looking at the displayed reserved symbols. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily select the desired pre-dynamic display.

The game machine H5 is characterized by having an identification means for identifiablely displaying the reserved symbol selected by the reserved symbol selection means.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of the game machine H5, the hold symbol selected by the hold symbol selection means is displayed in an identifiable manner by the identification means, so that the hold corresponding to the displayed pre-dynamic display is supported. It has the effect of being able to easily grasp which design is.

The game machine H5 or H6 is characterized by having a holding symbol display mode changing means for changing the display mode of the reserved symbol to a predetermined display mode suggesting the display content of the pre-dynamic display corresponding to the reserved symbol. Game machine H7 to play.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of the game machine H5 or H6, a predetermined display suggesting the display content of the pre-dynamic display corresponding to the hold symbol by the holding symbol display mode variable means. Since it is variable to the mode, there is an effect that the player can easily select the desired pre-dynamic display.

In any of the game machines H1 to H7, the information specifying means for specifying the information used for the determination by the determination means and the information used for the determination by the prior determination means is provided, and the advance The dynamic display control means satisfies a determination condition in which the pre-dynamic display displayed based on the one piece of information specified by the information specifying means is determined by the determination means based on the one piece of information. In some cases, the gaming machine H8 is characterized in that the pre-variation display is stopped.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effects played by the game machines H1 to H7, the following effects are played. That is, the information used for the determination by the determination means and the information used for the determination by the prior determination means are specified by the information identification means. The pre-dynamic display displayed based on one piece of information specified by the information specifying means is stopped when the judgment condition that the pre-dynamic display control means makes a judgment based on one piece of information is satisfied. Let me. As a result, the pre-dynamic display based on one piece of information can be stopped at the timing when the dynamic display based on one piece of information is started. Therefore, it is possible to display so that the pre-dynamic display arbitrarily selected by the player is switched to the dynamic display without discomfort. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display or the pre-dynamic display from being lowered.

The game machine H9 is characterized in that any one of the game machines H1 to H8 is provided with a switching means for switching between the display content displayed on the first display means and the display content displayed on the second display means. ..

According to the game machine H9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H8, the display content displayed on the first display means and the display content displayed on the second display means are switched by the switching means. , The player can display the desired display content by the desired display means, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be reduced.

In the game machine H9, when the pre-dynamic display corresponding to the one information selected by the information selection means is displayed by the switching means by the first display means, the switching means is the one. The gaming machine H10 is characterized in that when the dynamic display corresponding to the information of the above is started, the dynamic display is switched to be displayed by the first display means.

According to the game machine H10, in addition to the effects of the game machine H9, the following effects are obtained. That is, when the pre-dynamic display corresponding to one piece of information is displayed by the first display means by the switching means, the switching means displays the dynamic display corresponding to the one piece of information by the first display means. Switch to display. As a result, when the pre-dynamic display corresponding to the information arbitrarily selected by the player is displayed by the first display means, the dynamic display corresponding to the information is continuously displayed by the first display means. Therefore, it is possible to display so that the pre-dynamic display is switched to the dynamic display without any discomfort. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display or the pre-dynamic display from being lowered.

In any of the game machines H8 to H10, the pre-dynamic display includes at least a determination result mode display based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, and corresponds to one information specified by the information specifying means. The gaming machine H11 is characterized in that the determination result mode display displayed in the pre-dynamic display is continuously displayed in the dynamic display corresponding to the one information.

According to the game machine H11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H8 to H10, the following effect is played. That is, as the pre-dynamic display, at least the judgment result mode display based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment means is displayed, and the judgment result mode displayed in the pre-dynamic display corresponding to one piece of information specified by the information specifying means. The display is continuously displayed in the dynamic display corresponding to one piece of information. As a result, the determination result mode display is displayed straddling the pre-dynamic display and the dynamic display, so that the pre-dynamic display and the dynamic display can be continued without any discomfort. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display or the pre-dynamic display from being lowered.

<Characteristic I group> Synchronous effect A specific effect mode is set based on a display means capable of displaying the effect mode, an information input means capable of inputting predetermined information, and the predetermined information input by the information input means. An effect period setting means for setting a period that can be displayed on the display means, and a specific effect for executing the specific effect mode based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period set by the effect period setting means. A game machine I1 characterized by having an aspect execution means.

Here, in a game machine such as a conventional pachinko machine, there is a game machine that executes a synchronous effect all at once at predetermined time intervals (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252534). However, since the above-mentioned gaming machine controls to execute the synchronous effect according to the time, there is a problem that the timing of performing the synchronous effect becomes monotonous and the player gets bored. The game machine I1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the game machine I1 is to provide a game machine capable of alleviating the tiredness of a player.

According to the game machine I1, the effect mode is displayed on the display means. Based on the predetermined information input by the information input means, the effect period setting means sets a period during which a specific effect mode can be displayed on the display means. A specific effect is executed by the specific effect mode executing means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied within that period. Thereby, it is possible to set a period during which a specific effect mode can be displayed based on the input predetermined information. Therefore, it is possible to change the setting of the period in which a specific effect mode can be displayed, and it is possible to alleviate the player's boredom. Further, by inputting the same information as predetermined information to the gaming machines arranged side by side, it is possible to experience the dynamic display at a desired timing, and there is an effect that the player's boredom can be alleviated. ..

The game machine I1 has a timekeeping means capable of timekeeping and a time information acquisition means for acquiring time information from the timekeeping means, and the effect period setting means is acquired by the time information acquisition means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that a period during which a specific effect mode can be displayed on the display means is set based on the time information and the information input to the information input means.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I1, the following effects are played. That is, the time information timed by the timekeeping means is acquired by the time information acquisition means, and a period during which a specific effect can be displayed on the display means is set based on the time information and the information input to the information input means. .. Thereby, it is possible to set a period in which a specific effect mode can be displayed based on two pieces of information, the time information and the information input by the information input means. Therefore, it is possible to set various periods by combining the information, and it is possible to alleviate the player's boredom.

In the game machine I1 or I2, after the specific effect mode execution timing setting means for setting the timing for executing the specific effect mode and the predetermined condition are satisfied within the period set by the effect period setting means. The specific effect mode execution standby means that waits for the execution of the specific effect mode for a period until the timing of executing the specific effect mode set by the execution timing setting means. Game machine I3 to play.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I1 or the game machine I2, the following effects are played. That is, within the period set by the effect period setting means, the timing for executing the specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode execution timing setting means. During the period from the establishment of the predetermined condition to the timing of executing the specific effect mode set by the execution timing setting means, the specific effect mode execution standby means makes the item of the specific effect mode wait. This has the effect of unifying the execution timing of a specific effect mode.

In any of the game machines I1 to I3, the specific effect mode for setting the specific effect mode from the effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of effect mode and the plurality of effect mode stored in the effect mode storage means. A game machine I4 characterized by having an effect mode setting means.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines I1 to I3, the following effects are played. A plurality of effect modes are stored in the effect mode storage means, and a specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means from the effect modes. As a result, since a specific effect mode that can be displayed within the period set by the effect period setting means is set from the plurality of effect modes, it is not necessary to prepare data for the specific effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of data can be reduced.

In the game machine I4, the specific effect mode setting means is for setting the specific effect mode based on the time information acquired from the timekeeping means.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I4, the specific effect mode setting means sets the specific effect mode based on the time information acquired from the timekeeping means, so that the specific effect mode can be easily changed. It has the effect of being able to.

The game machine I4 has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that determines that the operation means has performed a predetermined operation, and the specific effect mode setting means is the operation determination. The game machine I6 is characterized in that the specific effect mode is set based on a predetermined operation determined by the means.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, a predetermined operation is performed by an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a specific effect mode is set based on the predetermined operation determined by the operation determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect mode desired by the player can be set to a specific effect mode.

In any of the game machines I4 to I6, the specific effect mode and the effect mode set by the specific effect mode setting means are restricted so as not to be executed except for the period set by the effect period setting means. A game machine I7, characterized in that it has means for restricting execution.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I4 to I6, the effect period setting means sets the specific effect mode and the effect mode set by the specific effect mode setting means by the specific effect mode execution limiting means. Since it is restricted so that it is not executed except for the period set in the above, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a special feeling of the production while eliminating the need to prepare data for a specific production mode.

In any of the game machines I1 to I7, the effect information output means that outputs the effect information including at least the specific effect mode information based on the specific effect mode displayed on the display means, and the effect information output means. It has an effect information input means capable of inputting information corresponding to the effect information, and a specific effect mode setting means for setting the specific effect mode based on the information input by the effect information input means. Characteristic gaming machine I8.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I7, the following effect is played. That is, the effect information including at least the specific effect mode information based on the specific effect mode displayed on the display means by the effect information output means is output. Information corresponding to the effect information is input by the effect information input means. The specific effect mode setting means sets a specific effect mode based on the information input by the effect information input means. As a result, it is possible to set a specific effect mode displayed on another pachinko machine, so that the effect mode can be freely synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets tired of the game machine at an early stage.

In addition, it is preferable that the effect information output by the game machine I8 includes information on the time when a specific effect is displayed. By doing so, there is an effect that the time when the specific effect mode is displayed can be synchronized regardless of the timing at which the specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means.

In the game machine I8, the effect information output means displays the effect information on the display means in a manner that can be acquired by an external device.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effect of the game machine I8, the effect information output means displays the effect information in a mode (for example, a two-dimensional information code) that can be acquired by an external device (for example, a mobile terminal). There is an effect that the setting work of a specific effect mode can be facilitated by the specific effect mode setting means.

A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, A game machine K1 characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine in any one of G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, A gaming machine K2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, In any one of G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9, the gaming machine K3 is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. .. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, a game machine has been proposed in which a display device such as one liquid crystal display device is provided and various effect images are displayed on the display device (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-13528).
In this type of pachinko machine, it is possible to display various production images, but since the production image is displayed in only one place, it is necessary to provide an unexpected game using the production image. There was a problem that the player could not do it and the player got bored.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of alleviating the player's boredom by providing an unexpected game using a production image.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a first display means having a specific first display area and a second display means having a second display area different from the first display area. A predetermined condition is satisfied with the acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the display control means for displaying the effect based on the information on the first display means or the second display means. The display control means has a condition determination means for determining that the determination has been made, and when the condition determination means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first display control means performs an effect based on the information. The display area is moved from one of the display areas or the second display area to the other display area for display.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the storage means stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied. A determination means that executes a determination based on information, a dynamic display control means that causes the first display means to perform dynamic display for a predetermined time as the effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and the determination means. As the pre-determination means for executing the pre-determination based on the information stored in the storage means and the effect based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means before the determination is executed by the second It has a pre-dynamic display control means for causing the display means to perform pre-dynamic display.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, and the storage means can store a plurality of the information up to a predetermined number, and the plurality of storage means stored in the storage means. It has an information selection means for selecting arbitrary information from the information of the above, and the pre-dynamic display control means causes the pre-dynamic display corresponding to the information selected by the information selection means to be performed. ..
The game machine of the technical idea 4 is the game machine described in the technical idea 3, and the second display means can display a plurality of pre-dynamic displays corresponding to a plurality of information stored in the storage means. It is configured, and the information selection means selects an arbitrary pre-dynamic display from a plurality of pre-dynamic displays displayed on the second display means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 corresponds to at least the information before the determination by the determining means is executed among the information stored in the storage means in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 or 4. It has a reserved symbol display control means for displaying the reserved symbol, and the information selection means selects an arbitrary reserved symbol from a plurality of reserved symbols displayed by the reserved symbol display control means. The pre-dynamic display control means causes pre-dynamic display corresponding to the reserved symbol selected by the information selection means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the information acquired by the display control means to the first display means having the first display area or the second display means having the second display area is used. The based effect is displayed. Then, when it is determined by the condition determination means that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect displayed in either the first display area or the second display area is moved to the other display area. It is possible to provide a game that is unexpected, and there is an effect that the player's boredom can be alleviated.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, when the determination condition is satisfied, the determination means executes a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and causes the first display means to perform dynamic display as an effect based on the determination result. Prior to the determination by the determination means, the advance determination is executed based on the information stored in the storage means, and the effect is dynamically displayed in advance on the second display means as an effect based on the advance determination result. To do.
As a result, by displaying the dynamic display on the first display means and the pre-dynamic display on the second display means, each movement is expected while expecting the lottery contents reserved and stored by the pre-dynamic display. You can pay close attention to the result of the target display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the dynamic display.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2. That is, the storage means stores a plurality of pieces of information up to a predetermined number, and the information selection means selects arbitrary information from the plurality of stored information. The pre-dynamic display control means causes the information selected by the information selection means to perform pre-dynamic display in an appropriate manner.
As a result, the pre-dynamic display based on the information desired by the player is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's boredom can be alleviated.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 3, a plurality of pre-dynamic displays corresponding to a plurality of information stored in the storage means are displayed as a second display means. Since any pre-dynamic display is selected by the information selection means from the plurality of pre-dynamic displays displayed on the screen, there is an effect that the player can easily select the desired pre-dynamic display.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3 or 4. That is, the reserved symbol display control means displays the reserved symbol corresponding to at least the information before the determination by the determining means is executed among the information stored in the storage means. An arbitrary reserved symbol is selected from the plurality of displayed reserved symbols by the information selection means, and the pre-dynamic display control means causes the pre-dynamic display to perform the pre-dynamic display corresponding to the selected reserved symbol.
As a result, any pre-dynamic display can be selected while looking at the displayed reserved symbols. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily select the desired pre-dynamic display.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine )
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
203a Special symbol 1 Hold ball storage area (part of storage means)
203b Special symbol 2 Hold ball storage area (part of storage means)
S1004 jackpot control process (privilege granting means)
S1852 8 pieces Hold effect processing ( variable mode display means)
S2802 Identification symbol display means S2806 Part of the symbol variable means S4206 , S4306 Judgment means S4406, S4413 Acquisition means

Claims (1)

An acquisition method that can acquire information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions,
A storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a storage means for storing the information.
A discriminating means that executes the discriminant based on the information stored in the storage means, and
A display means that dynamically displays identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means,
When the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player and the privilege giving means.
Among the information stored in the storage means, in the gaming machine determines had a an identification symbol display means for displaying on said display means the identification symbols corresponding to the information before being executed by the determination means,
When a predetermined number or more of the identification symbols are displayed based on a predetermined opportunity, it is possible to change the display mode of the plurality of the identification symbols displayed on the display means to a predetermined display mode. Design variable means and
Based on the variable conditions are satisfied, as a mode for indicating the contents discriminated by the discriminating means, that can be displayed in a variable manner the variable has been pre SL identification symbols on the predetermined display mode It has a variable mode display means and
It said variable mode display means,
In a state where the front Symbol identification symbols that are variably displayed so as to constitute the variable mode is displayed, if the identification symbols for newly the information corresponding to that stored in the storage means is displayed is based on the fact that the newly displayed identification symbols the variable condition is satisfied, it is possible to display by varying the variable aspect,
By the time the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the discrimination result for the information corresponding to the identification symbol is started, the variable condition corresponding to the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode is satisfied. If not, the gaming machine characterized in that the dynamic display of the identification information is started without the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode being changed by the variable mode display means. ..

Images